P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printer

User’s Manual
 READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER
Software License Agreement Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND 1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER
CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE contained in the Software will meet your requirements or
AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or
OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to make
REFUNDED. changes and/or improvements in the Software without
Definitions. notice at any time.
“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable 2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE
data and program. The term “Software Product” includes the FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS
Software resident in the printer and its documentation. The INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
Software Product is licensed (not sold) to you, and Printronix, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF
the Software Product. PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
License. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR
1. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive
MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
license to use the Software resident in the printer solely
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
for your own customary business or personal purposes.
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
2. Restrictions. DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc., APPLY TO YOU.
you agree to maintain the Software Product and
3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage
other proprietary information concerning the
caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any
typefaces in strict confidence.
other performance under this Agreement.
b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software
Product.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our
liability of any kind (including liability for negligence
c. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise except liability for personal injury caused solely by our
transfer all or any portion of the Software Product negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
separate from the printer, without the prior written Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance
consent of Printronix, Inc. by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the
d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of remedies specified by this Agreement.
the Software Product.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a
Termination of License Agreement
network, by telephone, or electronically using any
means; or reverse engineer, decompile or This License shall continue until terminated. This license may
disassemble the Software. be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc.
f. You agree to keep confidential and use your best or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail to comply with the terms of this
efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days
Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return
use. to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
3. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the
printer, but only if the recipient agrees to accept the U.S. Government Restricted Rights
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Your license is Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to
automatically terminated if you transfer the Software restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and
Product and printer. Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision
Limited Software Product Warranty (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
the Software will perform in accordance with specifications applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR
published by Printronix, Inc. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant 52.227-19 (c) (2).
that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
Remedy YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE
in connection with the Software is replacement of defective BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER
software with a copy of the same version and revision level. PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR
REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS
AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS
EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY
PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO
ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT.
User’s Manual
P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers
 This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated, or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this
material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible
for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection
with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or use of this material. The
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
COPYRIGHT 2013 PRINTRONIX, INC.

Trademark Acknowledgements
ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute,
Inc.
Artifex, the Artifex logo , Ghostscript, and the Ghostscript logo
are registered trademarks of Artifex Software, Inc.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.
Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation.
EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association.
ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental
Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Printronix has
determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
IBM, AS/400, and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and Intelligent Printer
Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Printronix, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and IGP are registered trademarks, and
P8005, P8010, P8015, P8205, P8210, P8215, P8220, and SureStak are
trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark, and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro
Systems, Inc.
TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.
UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
 Table of Contents

1 Introduction........................................................... 11
Printer Overview .....................................................................................11
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP) ...............11
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise ...................................14
Protocols and Emulations .......................................................................15
Graphics Enhancements ........................................................................15
Taking Care of Your Printer ....................................................................15
Conventions in this Manual.....................................................................15
Warnings and Special Information..........................................................16
Related Documents ................................................................................16
Contact Information ................................................................................17
Printronix Customer Support Center ................................................17
Printronix Supplies Department........................................................17
Corporate Offices .............................................................................18

2 Setting Up The Printer .......................................... 19

Before You Begin....................................................................................19
Power Requirements ..............................................................................19
Select a Site............................................................................................19
Printer Dimensions .................................................................................21
Printer Component Locations .................................................................26

3 Operating The Printer ........................................... 27

Powering on the Printer ..........................................................................27
Operating Modes ....................................................................................27
The Control Panel...................................................................................28
Control Panel Keys ..........................................................................29
Cancel a Print Job ............................................................................33
Operational Procedures..........................................................................34
Reload Paper ...................................................................................34
Unload Paper ...................................................................................45
Integrated Print Management System ....................................................48
Output Darkness ..............................................................................48
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge ....................................................49
Lighter or Darker Print ......................................................................49
Changing Ribbon Cartridge..............................................................50
Table of Contents

4 The Configuration Menus ..................................... 53

Configuration Overview .......................................................................... 53
Main Menu ....................................................................................... 53
Changing Parameter Settings .......................................................... 54
Saving Parameter Settings .............................................................. 54
Default and Custom Configurations ................................................. 54
Navigating the Menus ...................................................................... 55
Top Level Menu Overview ...................................................................... 56
Changing Parameters Example ....................................................... 58
Auto Save Configuration .................................................................. 62
Saving Your New Configuration ....................................................... 63
Optimizing Print Quality.................................................................... 68
Optimizing Print Speed .................................................................... 69
Dynamic Menu Options .......................................................................... 70
Active Emulations ................................................................................... 71
P8000 Standard Firmware ...............................................................73
P8000 TN Firmware ......................................................................... 74
P8000 PCL-II Firmware.................................................................... 75
P8000 LG Firmware ......................................................................... 76
P8000 ANSI Firmware .....................................................................77
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware ..................... 78
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware .............................. 79
H-Series Firmware..................................................................................80
P8000 Indian Language Firmware.......................................................... 81
QUICK SETUP Menu ............................................................................. 82
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu .................................................................... 91
HOST INTERFACE Menu ...................................................................... 93
Auto Switching Submenu ................................................................. 94
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu.................................... 96
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ........................................................98
Serial Submenu.............................................................................. 100
NETWORK SETUP Menu .................................................................... 105
Ethernet Address ........................................................................... 105
Ethernet Params ............................................................................ 107
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS ................................. 109
EMULATION Menu............................................................................... 111
3270 Params.................................................................................. 112
5250 Params.................................................................................. 119
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language) ................... 124
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB) ........................... 126
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji) .................................. 128
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul) ............................... 132
 Table of Contents

P-Series Emulation ........................................................................147

P-Series XQ Emulation ..................................................................153
Serial Matrix Emulation ..................................................................155
Proprinter XL Emulation .................................................................160
Epson FX Emulation ......................................................................163
ANSI Emulation ..............................................................................166
IGP/PGL Emulation ........................................................................173
IGP/PGL Submenu ........................................................................175
IGP/VGL Emulation ........................................................................185
IGP/VGL Submenu ........................................................................186
IPDS Emulation ..............................................................................197
PCL - II Emulation ..........................................................................202
LG Emulation .................................................................................206
OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation ......................................211
Postscript/PDF Interpreter..............................................................211
PRINTER CONTROL Menu .................................................................216
ADVANCED USER Menu.....................................................................220
SURE SCAN Submenu ..................................................................222
DIAGNOSTICS Menu ...........................................................................238
Printer Mgmt Menu ...............................................................................242

5 Interfaces............................................................ 243
Overview...............................................................................................243
RS-232 Serial Interface ........................................................................245
USB ......................................................................................................246
Centronics Parallel Interface.................................................................247
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals .............................................248
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface.................................................................249
Compatibility Mode.........................................................................249
Nibble Mode ...................................................................................249
Byte Mode ......................................................................................249
Signals ...........................................................................................250
Ethernet ................................................................................................252

6 Reprogramming the Security Key....................... 253

Reprogramming the Security Key.........................................................253
How to Program the Security Key ..................................................253
Table of Contents

7 Downloading Firmware ....................................... 255

Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe) .................................................. 256
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 257
Windows Driver Download.................................................................... 259
Automatic Download (.exe)...................................................................260
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence................................................. 262
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence .............................................. 263
Sending Firmware in Download Mode.................................................. 264
Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR) ........................................... 264
Sending Firmware via USB ............................................................ 264
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter ........................................ 265
Sending Firmware via Parallel ....................................................... 270
Sending Firmware via Serial .......................................................... 271
Downloading Files to the Main File System.......................................... 272
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus .......................................... 272
File Properties Not Shown in Menus .................................................... 273
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 273
PTX_SETUP Download........................................................................ 275
Manual Two-Key Download.................................................................. 275
Downloading Files to the SD Card........................................................ 276
Using TrueType Fonts ..........................................................................277
Downloading TrueType Fonts ........................................................ 277
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts .............................. 279
Demo Facility ........................................................................................ 280

8 Troubleshooting .................................................. 283

Cleaning Requirements ........................................................................ 283
Exterior Cleaning............................................................................ 283
Interior Cleaning............................................................................. 284
Diagnosing Problems............................................................................ 286
Bar Code Verification ..................................................................... 286
Printing a Hex Dump ...................................................................... 287
Most Frequent Problems and Solutions................................................289
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors ............................ 290
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order) ..................................... 290
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix) ................................ 310
 Table of Contents

A Printer Specifications ......................................... 327

Ribbon Cartridge Specifications ...........................................................327
ASCII ..............................................................................................327
HD and H-Series ............................................................................327
Paper Specifications .............................................................................328
Labels ...................................................................................................328
Printer Weight and Dimensions ............................................................329
Environmental Characteristics ..............................................................329
Acoustic Noise Level ............................................................................330
Energy Star...........................................................................................330
Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................331
Input Voltage (ASCII Models).........................................................331
Input Voltage (H-Series Models) ....................................................332
Interfaces ..............................................................................................332
Printing Speed ......................................................................................333

B ASCII Character Set........................................... 335

C SureStak™ Power Stacker ................................ 337

Introduction ...........................................................................................337
Stacker Operation.................................................................................337

D Zero Tear Pedestal Printer................................. 343

Overview...............................................................................................343
Operation ..............................................................................................344
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides ..................344
Load Paper.....................................................................................346
Position the Paper Out Sensor.......................................................348
Set the Tear Bar Distance ..............................................................349
Set the Top of Form .......................................................................350
ZTP SETTINGS Menu ..........................................................................351
Performance Limitations .......................................................................352

E Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC) ........ 355

Overview...............................................................................................355
Installing the QCMC..............................................................................356
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC ..................................357
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer .................359
Table of Contents

F PTX_SETUP Commands ................................... 361

Overview............................................................................................... 361
The PTX_SETUP Commands .............................................................. 361
General Commands ....................................................................... 362
Line Matrix Commands .................................................................. 369

G Customer Support .............................................. 371

Printronix Customer Support Center..................................................... 371
Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................ 371
Corporate Offices.................................................................................. 372

H Communication Notices ..................................... 373

Notices.................................................................................................. 373
Energy Star........................................................................................... 375
Communication Statements.................................................................. 376
Software License Agreement................................................................ 381
 1 Introduction

Printer Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions
used within this manual.

Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers

(CRP)
Printronix® has been the global leader in industrial printing solutions for over
30 years, earning a reputation for designing and manufacturing leading edge
products and delivering them to market with unsurpassed service and
support.
The Printronix P8000™ Line Matrix Printing Platform extends the series of
technology innovations that cement Printronix’s leadership position. Line
matrix printing is Printronix’s flagship technology, and it remains the
workhorse solution for supply-chain and back-office printing applications
because of its reliability, lower cost of ownership and flexibility of printing
applications.
• Most reliable printer ever – provides more up time and lower operating
costs
• Cartridge ribbons – deliver darker image, last longer, and costs less to
operate than other print technologies
• Integrated print management system – provides precise control over print
quality, print costs, and job planning
• Tabletop, cabinet, pedestal, enclosed pedestal, or zero tear pedestal
(ZTP) styles – best user access and forms handling flexibility
• Unsurpassed ease of use – larger graphics LCD simplifies operation and
enhances productivity

11
Chapter 1 Printer Overview

Table 1. P8000 Series Models and Configurations

Print Speed
Model Number Configuration
(Lines per Minute)

P8003H 300

P8003HZT 300

LMPPLS P8005 500

(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal Low Speed) P8005ZT 500

P8010 1000

P8010ZT 1000

P8006 600

LMPPHS P8006HZT 600

(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal High Speed) P8000HD 600

P8000HDZT 600

P8203H 300
LMPCLS
P8205 500
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet Low Speed)
P8210 1000

P8215 1500

P8220 2000

P8215 (with stacker) 1500

LMPCHS
P8220 (with stacker) 2000
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet High Speed)
P8206H 600

P8208H 800

P8200HD 800

12
 Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)

Five printer configurations are available:

Tabletop (P80XX or P80XXH)

• The tabletop models are designed for space constrained environments,
allowing for the printer to be placed on a desk or tabletop for quiet use.
• Paper guides allow for paper input under the table or as a small stack on
the table.
• Output forms are easily accessible from the front of the printer.
• Using the top paper exit, this printer is ideal for short print runs and easy
access to output.
• Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models

Cabinet (P82XX, P8200HD, or P82XXH)

• The enclosed cabinet models provide for near silent operation, making
these printers perfectly suitable for use in the quietest of office
environments.
• Provides the best paper handling for large print runs. All paper input and
output is contained inside the cabinet and protected from bumping and
contamination.
• Highly effective combination of moveable fences and chains allows for
precise stacking all the way up to a full box of paper.
• For tougher forms that tend not to refold well, a SureStak power stacker
option is available for the 1500, 2000, H-Series, and OpenPrint HD
enclosed cabinet models.
• Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500, 1000, 1500 and 2000 line per minute models
H-Series – 600 and 800 line per minute models
OpenPrint HD (available only for cabinet models)

Pedestal (P80XX, P8000HD, or P80XXH)

• The pedestal model has a clamshell design that allows easy access to all
controls providing faster ribbon replacements and easier paper loading.
• Oversized casters are standard making movement easy.
• Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models

13
Chapter 1 Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise

Enclosed Pedestal (P80XX or P80XXH)

• The enclosed pedestal model has a lower enclosure that holds the input
paper while providing for near silent operation.
• The paper enclosure can accommodate a full paper box (12” maximum
length forms).
• The paper output area is not enclosed for easy access to printed media.
• Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models

Zero Tear Pedestal (P80XXZT or P80XXHZT)

• Special push tractor configuration enables printing from the very first to
the very last line of a form and then tear-off with no forms lost
• The elimination of wasted forms between jobs can yield significant
savings.
• An ideal solution for supply-chain and back-office applications.
• Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models

Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise

The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise
(PNE). PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current
consumable status of all printers. PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on
all consumable warnings. When a ribbon reaches the low state, PNE notifies
the system administrator remotely via an automated e-mail alert of the low
condition. This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches
its end of life. If the ribbon is not changed, an alert will again be initiated once
the ribbon reaches the 0% end point. Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise
Remote Management Software manual for details.

14
 Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)

Protocols and Emulations

A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the
printer and its host computer. These rules consist of codes that manipulate
and print data and allow for machine-to-machine communication. A printer
and its host computer must use the same protocol. As used in this manual,
protocol and emulation mean the same thing.
Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text, numbers,
and punctuation marks. Some characters are defined as control codes.
Control codes instruct the printer to perform specific functions, such as
underlining text, printing subscripts, setting page margins, etc. The difference
between most printer protocols is the characters used to create control codes
and the ways in which these characters are formatted.
When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular
printer protocol, it is emulating that printer.

Graphics Enhancements
The IGP/PGL and IGP/VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms,
generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and create other graphics.
Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed.
These emulations are available as factory-installed or field-installed options,
except on H-series models. For more information, contact your authorized
service representative.

Taking Care of Your Printer

Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of.
Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer
supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance. Chapter 8
explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in
Appendix A.

Conventions in this Manual

Control panel keys and indicators are highlighted in UPPERCASE BOLD
PRINT.
Example: Press the CANCEL key, then press the ONLINE key.
Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ONLINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.
Example: “Press  + ” means press the  (UP) key and the  (DOWN)
key at the same time.

15
Chapter 1 Warnings and Special Information

Warnings and Special Information

Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:

WARNING A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you.

CAUTION A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the
printer.

IMPORTANT Information vital to proper operation of the printer.

NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and
maintenance.

Related Documents
• Quick Reference Guide — Explains how to set up the printer for basic
operation (load ribbon cartridge and media, and clear paper jams).
• Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line
matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.
• ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides host control codes
and character sets for the ANSI emulation.
• PCL®-II/LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides
host control codes and character sets for the PCL-II emulation.
• LG Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and
character sets for the LG emulation.
• Character Sets Reference Manual — Information about and examples of
the character sets available in line matrix printers.
• IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used
with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.
• IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used
with the optional Code VTM emulation enhancement feature.
• PrintNet Ethernet User's Manual — Information about network protocols,
configuration, and operation.
• IPDS Emulation Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides an
overview of Intelligent Printer Data StreamTM (IPDS) features, commands,
and diagnostics.
• LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host
control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation.
• LQ-1600K Emulation For The P8000 H-Series Of Line Matrix Printers
Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the
LQ-1600K emulation.
• KS Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for
the KS emulation.
• KSSM Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes
for the KSSM emulation.

16
 Printronix Customer Support Center

Contact Information
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
• Model number
• Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
• Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
• Configuration printout (Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press
ENTER)
• Network test page if Ethernet is enabled.
• Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
• Description of the problem (be specific)
• Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing
of these samples may be required)
Americas (714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114
China (86) 800-999-6836
[Link]

Printronix Supplies Department

Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas (800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4132
China (86) 400-886-5598
India (800) 102-7869
[Link]

17
Chapter 1 Contact Information

Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at [Link]

18
 2 Setting Up The Printer

Before You Begin

Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer. The
printer is easy to install. However, for your safety and to protect valuable
equipment, perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented.

Power Requirements
The printer must be connected to a power supply outlet that supplies 90 to
264 volts AC at its upper and lower limits. These limits take into account
normal voltage sags and surges created on the nominal line voltage by other
AC power loads associated with the AC distribution line. The printer
automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage
range.
Primary circuit protection is provided by the AC source protection device.
Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines.

IMPORTANT Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected

at 20 amperes maximum for 100 - 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz.

Select a Site
Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements:
• Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors.
• For cabinet models, allows at least three feet of clearance behind the
printer. (This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides
access to the paper stacking area.)
• For pedestal models, DO NOT place the side of the printer (inlet and exit
air vents) against a wall or other object. A minimum of 6 inch spacing is
recommended.
• Has a standard power outlet that supplies 100-135 Volts AC or
178-240 Volts AC power, at 47 to 63 Hz.
• Is relatively dust-free.
• Has a temperature range of 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F) and a
relative humidity from 15% to 90% non-condensing.

19
Chapter 2 Select a Site

• Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host

computer. This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use,
as shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length

Interface Type Maximum Cable Length

Centronics Parallel 5 meters (15 feet)

IEEE 1284 Parallel 10 meters (32 feet)

Serial RS-232 15 meters (50 feet)

USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus 5 meters (15 feet)

Twisted Pair / Type 3 300 meters (985 feet)

Ethernet 10/100Base-T 100 meters (328 feet)

20
Printer Dimensions

37.73 in
(95.8 cm)

11.36 in
(28.9 cm)

184751c
6.1 in
(15.5 cm)

.75 in
(1.9 cm)

25.92 in
(65.8 cm) 19.1 in
(73.9 cm)

Figure 1. Tabletop Model

21
Chapter 2 Printer Dimensions

57.5 in
(146.1 cm)

184819a
41.0 in 27.0 in
(104 cm) (68.6 cm)

29.0 in
(73.7 cm)
27.0 in 83.0 in
(68.6 cm) 27.0 in (210.8 cm)
(68.6 cm)

Figure 2. Cabinet Model

184820a

42.5 in 59.0 in
27.0 in (107.8 cm) (149.9 cm)
(68.6 cm)
32.5 in
83.0 in (82.6 cm) 27.0 in
(210.8 cm) (68.6 cm)
27.0 in
32.0 in
(68.6 cm)
(81.3 cm)

Figure 3. Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker

22
 29.5 in.
(74.93 cm)

11.36 in.
(28.9 cm.)

54.0 in.
184564b
(137.2 cm)

25.92 in. 19.1 in.

(65.8 cm) (48.5 cm)
29.1 in.
(73.9 cm.)

184564 REV B
Figure 4. Pedestal Model

23
Chapter 2 Printer Dimensions

54.0 in.
(137.2 cm)

35.9 in.
(91.2 cm)

6.5 in.
(16.5 cm)

184750b

25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(48.5 cm)

38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)

Figure 5. Enclosed Pedestal

24
 60.1 in.
(152.7 cm)

42.0 in.
(106.7 cm)

184821b

31.95 in.
25.92 in. (81.2 cm)
(65.8 cm) 19.1 in.
(43.8 cm)

38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)

Figure 6. Zero Tear Pedestal Model

25
Chapter 2 Printer Component Locations

Printer Component Locations

Ribbon

Ribbon
Cartridge

Tab (2) Ribbon

Tension Knob
Tractor (2)

Blue Tractor
Lock (2) Splined Shaft

Hammer Bank
Paper Support (2) Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Tab Slot (2)
Vertical
Position Knob

184555b

Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Ribbon Cartridge
Interface

Air Shroud
Assembly

Figure 7. Printer Component Locations

26
 3 Operating The Printer

Powering on the Printer

When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. The default power-up
state is online. When the self-test completes and the software has initialized
successfully, the status indicator light turns on, indicating the printer is online.
The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears in the
LCD display. The ribbon life remaining is shown on the bottom of the LCD
display.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the status indicator flashes and a specific
fault message appears on the display (such as “LOAD PAPER”). The alarm
also sounds if it is configured to do so. See “ LCD Message Troubleshooting
Table” on page 291 for information on fault messages and solutions.

Operating Modes
Online. In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the
host. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode.
The status indicator is lit in online mode.
Offline. In offline mode, you can perform operator functions, such as loading
paper and setting top-of-form. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer
from offline to online mode. The status indicator is off in offline mode.
Menu. In offline mode, pressing ENTER moves the printer into Menu mode.
In this mode, you can navigate through all menus and change the printer
configuration. To return to offline mode, press the ONLINE key.
Fault. In fault mode, a condition exists which must be cleared before printing
can continue. The status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps (if configured to
sound), and a descriptive fault message displays.
The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can
result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.

27
Chapter 3 The Control Panel

The Control Panel

Figure 8 shows the keys, displays, and indicators as they appear on the
control panel. The following section provides the descriptions, and functions
of the control panel keys.
Key combinations are indicated with the plus (+) sign. For example, “Press 
+ ” means to press the  key and the  key at the same time.

Cabinet Model Enter

TOF CONFIG

VIEW SELECT

ONLINE
ADVANCE CANCEL

184554a
Pedestal Model

Legend:
TOF = Set TOF (Top of Form)
VIEW = View/Eject
ADVANCE = Paper Advance
CONFIG = Print Config
SELECT = Load Config/Print Mode1
CANCEL = Cancel Job
ADVANCE VIEW TOF

ONLINE = Online/Clear
Enter
CANCEL SELECT CONFIG

NOTE:
1 Print Mode only available for H-Series

printers.
ONLINE
184732a

Figure 8. Control Panel

28
 Control Panel Keys

Control Panel Keys

ONLINE
Toggles the printer between online and offline modes. The key performs the
following in Online, Offline, Fault, and Menu modes:
• Online Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
• Offline Mode – sets the printer to Online Mode.
• Fault Mode – causes the printer to recheck the faults; if the faults are
cleared, the printer toggles to Offline Mode. If the fault condition is not
corrected before pressing the ONLINE key, the fault message reappears.
• Menu Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
NOTE: When changing to Online Mode, if the user has changed menu items
without saving the changes in a configuration, the user will be
prompted to save the changes.

ADVANCE
Performs advance to top-of-form, as defined by the current active form length.
The key works both online and offline.
• If online with data in the printer buffer, the data will print and then the
paper will move to the next top-of-form.
• In the fault state, pressing ADVANCE will advance the paper. The first
press moves to the top of the next available form. All subsequent presses
advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length.

VIEW
When the printer is online or offline, pressing this key executes the view or
eject function, depending on the setting of the menu View Function.
If online with data in the printer buffer, the data prints and the key functions as
described below.
If in a fault state, this key will be ignored.
• View Function — When the View Function menu is set to Enable,
pressing the VIEW key for a short time (less than 1/2 second) moves the
last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in the view state, the
message "Printer in View" displays, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow
keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. This is done to
align the image within a pre-printed form, for example. Refer to the UP
and DOWN key functions for additional details on the microstep feature.
Pressing VIEW a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print
position.

29
Chapter 3 The Control Panel

• Eject Function — When the VIEW key is pressed and the View Function
menu is set to Disable, or when the View Function menu is set to Enable
and the VIEW key is pressed for a long time (more than 1/2 second), the
bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position as set by
the Tear Bar Dist. menu value. The message "READY TO TEAR/EJECT
To Return" displays. While in this position, pressing the UP or DOWN
arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. Refer to
the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep
feature. When the VIEW key is pressed a second time, the printer will
move the paper either forward or backward to enable printing on the next
available form.

CANCEL
In offline mode, this key cancels all data in the print buffer, if enabled in the
“ADVANCED USER Menu” (see page 220). The print buffer is cleared without
printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top-of-
form. If this function is disabled, the CANCEL key will be ignored.
NOTE: 1. Use of this key will cause loss of data.
2. For OpenPrint products, pressing the CANCEL key advances the
paper to the next TOF.

TOF
Sets the top-of-form on the printer. This key is active only when the printer is
offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition. The paper
moves down to the print position and aligns to the top-of-form. Refer to the
Quick Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top-of-form.
NOTE: If there is any data in the buffer, the paper will move to the last print
position.

CONFIG
In offline mode, CONFIG prints the current short configuration. This key
requires a confirmation with the ENTER key; pressing any other key will exit
from this function. See “The Configuration Menus” on page 53 for an
explanation of configuration menus.

SELECT
In offline mode, this key allows for fast selection of any of the previously
stored configurations. Pressing this key causes the printer to cycle through
the following configuration load options: Factory, Cfg 1, Cfg 2, Cfg 3,..., Cfg 8.
For H-Series models, this key can be alternatively configured to select Print
Mode.

30
 Control Panel Keys

ENTER ( ↵ )
When navigating the configuration menus, the Enter key (referenced by the
symbol ↵ ) selects the currently displayed option value as the active value. An
asterisk (*) appears next to the active value on the display. Enter is also used
for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout.
NOTE: The Enter key must be unlocked to execute the select function.
See UP + DOWN, later in this section.
The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a
key combination other than  +  (see page 235).
• In Offline mode, pressing the Enter key places the printer in Menu mode.
This will bring up a set of icons to select.
• In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), pressing the Enter key moves
down into the menu tree of the highlighted icon.
• Within a menu tree: if the highlighted menu contains submenus instead of
a selectable parameter, pressing the Enter key will go into the submenu.
If the highlighted menu is a display only menu, then pressing the Enter
key performs no function. If the highlighted menu has selectable
parameters, pressing the unlocked Enter key will select the displayed
parameter. An asterisk (*) displays next to the selected parameter.
• If the highlighted menu is an executable menu, pressing the unlocked
Enter key will cause the function associated with the executable menu to
run. If the ENTER key is locked, pressing the Enter key for highlighted
menus that are executable or contain selectable parameters will cause
the message, THE ↵ KEY IS LOCKED, to display momentarily.
NOTE: Press the UP and Down keys at the same time to lock/unlock
the ↵ key.
For special Network Address menus or String menus, pressing the Enter key
will move down into a special multiple segment setting menu. Exit this menu
by pressing Enter again to save changes or Cancel to exit without saving
changes. This key is inactive in all other modes.

UP or DOWN ( or )
Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes
vertical forms adjustment. After pressing VIEW, press  or  to adjust the
paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment.
When the printer is in offline mode, press  or  to move through levels in
the configuration menus.

UP + DOWN ( + )
Locks and unlocks the ENTER key.
NOTE: The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a
key combination other than  +  (see page 235).

31
Chapter 3 The Control Panel

PREV or NEXT ( or )
Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu. In the
configuration menu, press  to scroll backward or press  to scroll forward
through the menu selections on the same level.

PREV + NEXT (  + )
When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the printer will reset to the
power-up configuration and reset its internal state (in offline mode).

 + ONLINE (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press  + ONLINE. If there is data in the printer buffer, the
printer will be placed in online mode, print one page, and return to the offline
mode. This action can be repeated until the end of a print job. Only one page
prints each time you press  + ONLINE. If there is no data in the printer
buffer, the printer is placed in online mode.
In the fault state,  + ONLINE does not work.

 + ADVANCE (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press  + ADVANCE. The printer will perform a reverse
linefeed. If you hold down the  + ADVANCE keys for longer than
1/2 second, the printer moves to the previous top-of-form position. If there is
data in the printer buffer, the data does not print.
In the fault state,  + ADVANCE does not work.

 + VIEW (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press  + VIEW. If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer, the
printer will be placed in online mode, print one line, and return to offline mode.
This action can be repeated until the end of the job. This function prints only
one line of text. If the data is not text, only 1/6 inch prints. If there is no data in
the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then
returns to offline mode.
In the fault state,  + VIEW does not work.

Ribbon Life Indicator

The bottom of the LCD displays the remaining life of the currently installed
ribbon. The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for
most applications; no special user setup is needed. If your particular
application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing, the ribbon
end point can be adjusted as appropriate. Please refer “Ribbon End Point” on
page 90.

32
 Cancel a Print Job

Cancel a Print Job

The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your
application software. Contact your system administrator for additional
information.
1. If the printer is online, press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode.
2. From the host system, stop the print job.
NOTE: If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing
CANCEL, the print job continues with data missing when the printer
returns to online mode. Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data
loss occurrences, as this function deletes unprinted data in the
printer. This function is active only in offline mode; the purpose of this
function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when
print jobs are canceled.
3. Press CANCEL.
NOTE: You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel.
See “ADVANCED USER Menu” on page 220 for details.
4. Set the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Reference Guide.

33
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

Operational Procedures
This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to:
• reload paper
• unload paper

Reload Paper
Do this procedure when “LOAD PAPER” displays. (This message occurs
when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot.) This procedure
reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply, while
retaining the current top-of-form setting.
184738b

Metal Paper Guide

(2000 lpm only)
184737a

Paper Slot

Paper Slot
Tabletop Model Cabinet Model
184737 REV A

Wire Wire
Guide (2) Guide (2)
Paper
Slot Paper Slot
184558b

184739b

Pedestal Model Enclosed Pedestal Model

Figure 9. Paper Slot Location

34
 Reload Paper

Upper Paper Guide

Wire Guide (2)

Paper Slot

184936a
Zero Tear Pedestal Model

Figure 9. Paper Slot Location (continued)

1. Raise the printer cover. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
(See Figure 7 on page 26 for the location of the lever.)
NOTE: Do not open tractor doors or remove the existing paper.
2. Tabletop models: place the paper supply on the table underneath the
printer, centered under the paper slot. See Figure 9 on 34.
Cabinet models: open the front door and align the paper supply with the
label on the floor.
Pedestal models: place the paper supply on the floor of the printer,
centered under the paper slot.
Enclosed pedestal and Zero Tear Pedestal models: open the front
door and place the paper supply inside the printer, on the floor of the
cabinet.
3. Ensure the paper pulls freely.
4. Feed the paper up through the paper slot (see Figure 9). It may be easier
to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first. When this
corner can be grasped from the top, rotate the paper back to the normal
position.
NOTE: If you are using thick, multi-part forms and are unable to load the new
paper over the existing paper, go to step 15.
5. Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper
slot.

35
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

New Paper
Existing Paper

184565a
Figure 10. Loading New Paper into the Printer
6. Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask, but in front of the
existing paper. See Figure 7 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location.
If necessary, gently press the existing paper back.
7. Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing
paper.
8. Load the new paper over the existing paper. Open and load the tractors
one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping.
NOTE: Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top
horizontal perforation of the last page.

36
 Reload Paper

Vertical Position
Knob

Paper Thickness
Indicator

183445b
A
183444b

183446b
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
Figure 11. Setting the Platen Lever
9. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the
paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,
and 6-part paper thickness).
NOTE: If you are using the same thickness of paper, there is no need to
readjust.
10. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
11. Press ONLINE to remove the “LOAD PAPER” fault message from the
display.
12. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly
beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper
to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
13. Close the printer top cover. Close the cabinet front door.
14. Press ONLINE to place the printer in online mode and resume printing.

37
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

NOTE: Perform steps 15 to 31 only if you are unable to load the new paper
over the existing paper.
15. Open both tractor doors.
16. Remove the old paper from the tractors. Allow the paper to fall into the
paper supply area.
17. Feed the new paper up through the paper slot. Hold the paper to prevent
it from slipping down through the paper slot (see Figure 9 on page 34).

Left Tractor Door

Paper

Left Tractor Lock

TO
F
F
TO 183441b

Figure 12. Loading Paper on the Left Tractor

18. Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask. See Figure 7 on
page 26 for the ribbon mask location.
19. Load the paper on the left tractor.
20. Close the tractor door.

38
 Reload Paper

Tractor
Paper
Tractor
Splined Shaft

Tractor Lock 183442b

Paper Scale

Figure 13. Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage

CAUTION To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen, always
position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the “1” mark on the
paper scale.
21. Normally, you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor.
If adjustment is necessary, unlock the left tractor by placing the tractor
lock in the middle position. Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of
the number “1” on the paper scale and lock it. (You can also use the
paper scale to count columns.)

39
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

Tractor Door

TO
F
F
TO

TO
F
F
TO

183443b
Tractor Lock

Figure 14. Loading Paper onto the Sprockets

22. Unlock the right tractor.
23. Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door.
If necessary, slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for
various paper widths. Then, lock the tractor.

40
 Reload Paper

Upper Paper
Guide
Upper Paper
Guide

184738b

Metal Paper Guide

(2000 lpm only)

184737a
Paper Slot
Paper Slot
Tabletop Model Cabinet Model
184737 REV A

Upper Paper Upper Paper

Guide Guide

Wire Wire
Guide (2) Guide (2)
Paper
Slot Paper Slot
184558b

184739b

Pedestal Model Enclosed Pedestal Model

184558 REV B

Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper

41
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

Upper Paper Guide

Wire Guide (2)

Paper Slot

184936a
Zero Tear Pedestal Model

Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper (continued)
24. Tabletop, Pedestal, or Zero Tear Pedestal models:
Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up, guide the paper
over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top
cover.
25. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly
beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper
to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
26. Cabinet models:
Open the cabinet rear door. Make sure the paper is aligned with the label
in the output area (inside the cabinet). Close the front and rear doors.

42
 Reload Paper

TOF Indicator

Perforation

TO
F
F
TO

Vertical
Position
Knob

TO
F
F
TO

184752a
Figure 16. Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator
27. Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by
rotating the vertical position knob. For best print quality, it is
recommended that the top-of-form be set at least one print line or more
below the perforation.
NOTE: For exact positioning, press the VIEW key to move the last data
printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in View mode “Printer in
View” displays. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper
vertically in small increments. Pressing the VIEW key a second time
moves the paper back to the adjusted print position. The key works
both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode. (This
procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models.)

43
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

Vertical Position
Knob

Paper Thickness
Indicator

183445b
A
183444b

183446b
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
183444 REV B

Figure 17. Adjusting the Platen Lever

28. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the
paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,
and 6-part paper thickness. Adjust until you have the desired print
quality).
NOTE: The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent
thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen
lever.
29. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
30. Press ONLINE to clear any fault messages (such as “LOAD PAPER”)
from the LCD.
31. Press TOF. The top-of-form you have set moves down to the print
position. If there is data in the buffer, the paper moves forward to the last
print position on the next page.
32. Press ONLINE and close the printer cover.

44
 Unload Paper

Unload Paper
1. Press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer
cover.
2. For cabinet models, open the cabinet rear door. For models with the
power stacker installed, press the STACKER UP key on the rear control
panel.

Paper

Perforation

TO
F
F
TO

TO
F
F
TO

183477b
Figure 18. Unloading the Paper from the Printer
3. Tear off the paper at the perforation.
4. Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper
stacking area.
5. For pedestal models, remove the stacked paper from the paper tray.

45
Chapter 3 Operational Procedures

183478b
Paper

Power Stacker

Figure 19. Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer

6. For cabinet models, remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor.
For cabinet models with the power stacker installed, remove the paper
from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the
stacker mechanism.
7. Close the cabinet rear door.

46
 Unload Paper

Tractor Door

TO
F
F
TO

184571a
Platen Lever

Figure 20. Completely Removing the Paper

8. To completely remove the paper from the printer:
a. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors.

CAUTION Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path,
especially when using a label stock. If you are not careful, labels can
detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path, where only an
authorized service representative can remove them.
b. Open the cabinet front door.
c. Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot. Allow the paper to
fall into the paper supply area.
d. Remove the paper from the paper supply area.

47
Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System

Integrated Print Management System

The P8000 has a feature that automatically monitors and communicates the
status of the ribbon life to help the operator know when to change ribbons.
Using an ink delivery system called the Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), the
printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded, and all
ribbon properties. The ribbon is contained in a plastic box (the cartridge) and
feeds only in one direction. The CRS contains an interface board that allows
communication between the printer and the cartridge. Using the CRS, the
P8000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and
determines the ribbon’s length, ink color, and expected yield. The ribbon life,
starting from 100% when new and decreasing to 0% when depleted, is always
displayed on the control panel. See Figure 8 on page 28.
When the ribbon life reaches 2%, a warning message “RIBBON UNDER 2%/
Change RBN soon” appears on the control panel display. The control panel
status indicator lamp flashes. The printer will continue printing in this condition
until the ribbon life reaches 0% at which time, printing will stop. The ribbon
may be changed at any time while the printer is in the “CARTRIDGE AT END
POINT/Change Cart” condition without losing data in the printer’s buffer. If a
new ribbon is loaded, the system automatically detects the change, clears the
condition when the platen is closed, and restarts the life at 100%. If a partially
used ribbon is loaded, the system continues the life at the percentage
indicated for the used ribbon.
You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without
changing the ribbon by pressing the ONLINE key twice. This may be done as
many times as needed to complete the job in progress.
Ribbon usage information is calculated by maintaining a count of impressions
(dots) that is stored on the ribbon cartridge and updated periodically so that
the cartridge can be used on a different printer with the information intact. This
allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and
consumable costs. The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows
for efficient planning of print jobs. For example, if the displayed ribbon life
were low, you can install a new ribbon before printing a large print job.

Output Darkness
By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements.
However, some applications require that the output remains darker than the
nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a
lighter final image. The system can easily adjust to this variability. A setting
under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the
final output. The range is as follows:
Normal (Default)
Darker +1 through +6
Lighter -1 through -10
The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100% and 0%, but if a darker
setting is selected, zero will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is
selected, the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero.

48
 Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge

Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge

You can take the ribbon cartridge off the printer and reload it at a later time.
The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining
capacity.
NOTE: Since the ribbon usage information is stored on the ribbon cartridge,
you can reload a partially used cartridge onto a different printer.

Lighter or Darker Print

The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management
System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is
as good as it was when the ribbon was new. You may adjust the ribbon end
point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs.
See “PRINTER CONTROL Menu” on page 216.

49
Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System

Changing Ribbon Cartridge

Before changing the ribbon cartridge, determine whether at the end of ribbon
life if you want to make the print lighter (extend the ribbon life) or darker
(shorten the ribbon life). If you want to make the print lighter or darker, go to
“Ribbon End Point” on page 90 and follow the procedures for adjusting the
image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, continue with the
following steps.
NOTE: Ribbon cartridge instructions and illustrations shown in the following
section are for the pedestal model. Follow the same procedures for
the cabinet model.

Blue Tractor
Door (2) TO
TO
F
F

184559a

Platen Lever

Figure 21. Preparing to Load the Ribbon

1. Open the printer cover.
2. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
3. Close the tractor doors.
4. Remove the old ribbon cartridge and discard properly.

50
 Changing Ribbon Cartridge

Ribbon

Ribbon
Tab (2) Cartridge

Ribbon
Tension Knob
Tab Slot (2)

184555b
Air Shroud
Assembly

Figure 22. Installing the Ribbon Cartridge

5. Remove the ribbon slack on the new ribbon cartridge by turning the
ribbon tension knob clockwise.

CAUTION Do not turn the ribbon tension knob counterclockwise. This could
damage the ribbon cartridge.
6. Hold the cartridge at an angle, so that the rear side nearest you is lower
than the side with the ribbon. Find the two tabs on the outside of the
cartridge and place them into the corresponding slots on the air shroud
assembly (see Figure 22).

51
Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System

Ribbon
Cartridge
A

Ribbon Mask
Hammerbank
Cover

184556b
A
Ribbon

184557a
Ribbon Tension Knob

Ribbon Cartridge

Figure 23. The Ribbon Cartridge Snapped in Place

7. Rock the cartridge downward, making sure that the ribbon goes between
the guide and the mask (see Figure 23). You will feel it snap into place.

CAUTION Make sure that the ribbon does not twist or fold over.
8. Turn the ribbon tension knob clockwise a few times to make sure the
ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
9. Close the platen lever.
10. Close the printer top cover.
11. Press the ONLINE key twice to return the printer to operation.

52
 4 The Configuration Menus

Configuration Overview
To print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands
received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of matching the
printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to
specific tasks, such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper.
The characteristics which define the printer's response to signals and
commands received from the host computer are called configuration
parameters.
You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control
panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer
attached to the printer. This chapter provides an introduction to configuring
the printer and includes the configuration menus available (depending on
which emulation you have installed in the printer).

IMPORTANT Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the

configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the
procedures in this chapter.

Main Menu
The Main Menu is organized based on the following firmware types:
1. P8000 Standard Firmware (IPDS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
2. P8000 TN Firmware (TN/PGL/VGL/LP+)
3. P8000 PCL-II Firmware (PCL-II/PGL/VGL/LP+)
4. P8000 LG Firmware (LG/PGL/VGL/LP+)
5. P8000 ANSI Firmware (ANSI/PGL/VGL/LP+)
6. OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
7. OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS)
8. H-Series Firmware (LP+)
9. Indian Language Firmware (LP+)

53
Chapter 4 Configuration Overview

Changing Parameter Settings

You may change a printer parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms
length, either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation
control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer. The
control panel allows you to configure the printer’s resident set of configuration
menus. An example procedure for using the control panel to change
parameter settings begins on page 58.
When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer, they override
control panel settings. For example, if you set the line spacing to 6 lpi with the
control panel, and application software later changes this to 8 lpi with a control
code, the control code overrides the control panel setting.

Saving Parameter Settings

The parameter settings that you have changed can be permanently stored in
the printer’s memory as a configuration. See “Auto Save Configuration” on
page 62 and “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63.
You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command
host control code. See your IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for
details.

Default and Custom Configurations

A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings, such as line
spacing, forms length, etc. Your printer provides a fixed default configuration
and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular
print jobs. The factory default configuration can be loaded, but it cannot be
altered.
Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements. The
“Save Config.” option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in
memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8. An
explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom
configuration using the “Save Config.” menu option begins on page 63.

54
 Navigating the Menus

Navigating the Menus

To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about
navigating through the menus.
You must be Menu mode to navigate the menus.

Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE.

Press ENTER to enter Menu mode. Menus are
accessed only in Menu mode.
ONLINE

Scroll up, down, left, or right through the icons to

highlight the area of interest.

Press to enter the area of interest. This will take you

into that section and list three menu selections, with
the middle selection highlighted.

NOTE: For display languages in Korean, Simplified

Chinese, or Traditional Chinese, only one
menu selection is shown at a time.

Press to move up or down through the menu

selections. The highlighted menu is the active
selection.
OR

Press to scroll through the available choices for the

highlighted menu. If the highlighted menu contains
submenus, these buttons have no effect and the
message “↵ for Submenu” will display.
OR

ENTER Press to confirm selection. For normal menus, this will

change or execute the menu. If the selection has
submenus, the submenu will be entered.

Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key. The ENTER

key is locked by default to prevent you from
accidentally changing the printer configuration. The
+ lock and unlock function can be configured to be other
than  +  (See “Set Lock Key” on page 235.)

55
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Press to return to the previous menu level.

CANCEL

Press to return to Offline mode. If changes were made,

the user will be prompted to save or discard the
configuration.
ONLINE

To experiment with navigating the menus, use the example on the next page
as a tutorial.

Top Level Menu Overview

When entering Menu mode, the user will see top level menus represented as
icons as shown below. Use the navigation buttons up, down, right, and left to
highlight the desired icon. As the user navigates, the name of the top level
menu displays on the top line of the LCD.

Table 3 provides brief descriptions of first level configuration menu options:

Table 3. Icon Level Menus

Menu Icon Menu Description

QUICK SETUP These options allow quick access to the most

frequently changed or inputted parameters during the
installation of the printer.

PRINTER This menu allows you to select parameters common to

CONTROL a general user, such as display language and Barcode
quality.

ADVANCED USER This menu allows you to select several advanced

operating parameters for the printer, such as the speed
at which paper will advance when slewing. The SURE
SCAN menu for OpenPrint models is under this menu.

CONFIG. CONTROL These options allow you to save, print, load, delete,
name, and reset entire sets of configuration
parameters.

56
 Top Navigating
Level Menuthe
Overview
Menus

Table 3. Icon Level Menus

Menu Icon Menu Description

HOST INTERFACE These options allow you to select either the Serial
RS-232, Centronics® parallel, Ethernet™, IEEE® 1284
parallel, or Auto Switching interface for the printer. This
menu also allows you to configure several parameters
for each interface.

NETWORK SETUP This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address
options and Ethernet Parameters options.

EMULATION This menu allows you to configure the options which

are available for the current operating (active)
emulation. For example, if LinePrinter+ is the active
emulation, then the LinePrinter+ emulation options can
be configured using this menu. The ACTIVE IGP
EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION menus are under
this menu.

DIAGNOSTICS This menu includes the diagnostic tests, system

memory, software build part number, Feature File
(if one exists), the shuttle type, and statistics of the
printer. The Printer Mgmt menu is under this menu.

57
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Changing Parameters Example

OFFLINE
* = Factory Default

QUICK ... CONFIG.

SETUP CONTROL

Load Save Print Delete

Config. Config. Config. Config.
Factory* Cfg 1* Current Short* All*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8 Cfg 2 - Cfg 8 Current Full Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8

Power-Up Protect Name Reset Cfg Auto

Config. Configs. Configs Names Save

Factory* Disable* (see Example 2 Cfg 1* Enable*

Cfg 1 - Cfg 8 Enable on page 66) Cfg 2 - Cfg 8 Disable
All

A configuration consists of several parameters. The default factory

configuration has a starting set of parameters. In the configuration menu
above, and in all the configuration menus in this chapter, the factory default
values are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default
settings. This section provides an example procedure for changing individual
parameter values.

58
 Changing Parameters Example

The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the
Barcode Quality and Panel Display options. Use these guidelines to navigate
the configuration menus and change other parameters.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2.

ONLINE

3. ENTER Shows the top level icons.

4. Allows you to make configuration changes.

5.

UNTIL

6. ENTER

59
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Step Press LCD Notes

7.

8.

UNTIL

9.

UNTIL

10. ENTER The * indicates this choice is active.

11.

UNTIL

12.

UNTIL

13. ENTER The * indicates this choice is active.

60
 Changing Parameters Example

Step Press LCD Notes

14. Locks the ENTER key.

15. Press ENTER to go back into the menus or

press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.

ONLINE

16. Configuration changes were detected and

you are prompted to save the configuration
permanently or temporarily, to cancel
ONLINE changes, or restore the Factory
Configuration.

17A. ENTER Saves the Configuration as Config 1 then

returns the printer ONLINE.

17B. Places the printer online after permanently

saving the configuration changes as
Config 1.

18. The printer is ready for operation

61
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Auto Save Configuration

If the user makes a menu change and attempts to place the printer online
without saving the changes to a configuration, the following prompt displays:

The active option is highlighted. Use the Up and Down keys to scroll through
the different options; the keys will loop at the top and bottom options. The ↵
(Enter) key selects the highlighted option. After performing the selected
option, the printer will go to Online mode.
NOTE: Only the Up, Down, and Enter keys work at the Menu Changes
Detected prompt.
• Save Permanently (factory default). This option causes the printer to
save the configuration to the active configuration and make the active
configuration the Power-Up default configuration. If the active
configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the
configuration to an open configuration and make that open configuration
the Power-Up default configuration.
If no open configuration is available, the user must decide which
configuration to overwrite. In this case the printer will display the Save
Configuration menu, otherwise, the printer will go Online.
• Save Temporarily. Menu changes will be implemented, but will not be
saved once the printer is powered off.
• Cancel Changes. This option causes the printer to reload the Active
Configuration, then go Online.
• Restore Factory. This option will cause the printer to reload the Factory
Configuration, then go Online.
NOTE: A printer fault during the Auto Save process causes the printer to
Save Temporarily.

62
 Saving Your New Configuration

Saving Your New Configuration

The Save Config. option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations
to meet different print job requirements. Once you have changed all of the
necessary parameters, you may save them as a numbered configuration
(Example 1 on page 64) or a named configuration (Example 2 on page 66)
that can be stored and loaded later for future use. If you do not save your
configuration using the Auto Save, or this option, all of your parameter
changes will be erased when you power off the printer.
Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option, it will not be
lost if you power off the printer. You can load a configuration for a specific
print job (see “Load Config.” on page 91). You can also modify and resave it.
You may want to print your configurations (see “Print Config.” on page 91)
and store them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet. If the
Protect Configs. parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing
configuration, the new configuration will not be saved until the existing
configuration has been deleted (see “Delete Config.” on page 92).
NOTE: Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.

63
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Example 1
This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered
configuration, then later print it.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2.

ONLINE

3. ENTER

4. Allows you to make configuration changes.

5.

UNTIL

6. ENTER

64
 Saving Your New Configuration

Step Press LCD Notes

7.

8.

UNTIL

9. ENTER The * indicates this choice is active.

NOTE: We recommend that you print the configuration. To print the configuration go to Step 10. To skip this
procedure and resume printer operation, go to Step 13.

10.

11.

UNTIL

12. ENTER

13. Locks the ENTER key.

65
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Step Press LCD Notes

14. Press ENTER to go back into the menus or

press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.

ONLINE

15. Places the printer ONLINE.

ONLINE

16. If you printed the configuration, store it in a safe place. The printer is ready for operation.

Example 2
This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2. Follow Steps 2-6 from

Example 1 (page 64).

3.

UNTIL

4. ENTER

5.

66
 Saving Your New Configuration

Step Press LCD Notes

6. ENTER

7. Press the left or right key to choose the

character that is highlighted.

or

8. Press the up key to select the next character

in the string. Press the down key to go back
to the previous character and continue
editing as necessary.
or

9. ENTER Configuration 2 is renamed TEST.

10.

CANCEL

11.

UNTIL

12.

UNTIL

67
Chapter 4 Top Level Menu Overview

Step Press LCD Notes

13. ENTER Your configuration is saved as TEST.

14. Locks the ENTER key.

15. Press ENTER to go back into the menus or

press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.

ONLINE

16. Places the printer ONLINE.

ONLINE

Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed.

Optimizing Print Quality

LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and
characters. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed.
To optimize print quality, you can change the values of the following
configuration parameters:
• Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Dark” or “Draft.”
Dark prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. Draft prints at a
faster speed than Dark, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 217
for a written description of Bar Code Quality.)
• Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Best” or “High.” Best prints
the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. High prints at a faster
speed than Best, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 175 for
the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and page 182 for a written description
of Print Quality.)
• Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “High.” (See page 186 for the
IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and page 190 for a written description of
Print Quality.)

68
 Optimizing Print Speed

OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations

You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper text and barcodes by
using the following configuration parameters:
• Unidirectional (Printer Control menu): Select “Enable” for best quality
but reduced throughput (half speed).
• Resolution (Postscript/PDF menu): Select higher values (horizontal by
vertical DPI) to get better print quality.

H-Series Emulations
Print quality varies based on the typeface selected. Both text and barcodes
will print using the resolution of the selected typeface.

Optimizing Print Speed

LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed. To
optimize print quality instead, you can change values for specific configuration
parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality. Doing so, however,
will decrease the printer speed.
If you have optimized the printer for print quality, you can change it to optimize
the speed by selecting the values as follows:
• Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select Draft.
(See page 216 for the Printer Control Menu, and see page 217 for a
written description of Bar Code Quality.)
• Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 175 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 182
for a written description of Print Quality.)
• Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 186 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 190
for a written description of Print Quality.)

OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations

The printer has been configured at the Factory for optimal print quality
through the Resolution configuration parameter (Postscript/PDF menu).
However, users can reduce the horizontal, vertical, or both DPI values of this
menu to increase printer speed. The downside of using a lower DPI value is
as follows:
• Print quality is reduced and it can be difficult to read small characters.
• Barcodes may not get detected and optimized (barcodes are not
searched for DPI values less than 120).
Users are encouraged to use the Resolution menu to find the right
combination of Print Quality, Barcode Optimization, and Print Speed.

69
Chapter 4 Dynamic Menu Options

H-Series Emulations
The print speed varies based on the typeface selected.

Dynamic Menu Options

The main menus for each of the different firmware types have several
footnotes based on the possible options installed with the printer. This
includes HOST IO connectivity, various hardware/mechanical options, and
software emulations and features. The P8000 products dynamically detect
options installed and only include relevant menus for the user to configure.
The following is a description of the types of installation options and their
effect on the main menu:
• HOST INTERFACE: Ethernet related menus are only present when the
hardware is installed/enabled.
• NETWORK SETUP: The NETWORK SETUP menu is only present when
Ethernet is installed.
• Centronics and IEEE 1284: Options are only selectable or configurable
when the optional parallel interface card is present.
• SureStak Power Stacker: The power stacker and auto elevator options
are available for configuration when the SureStak power stacker is
installed.
• QUICK SETUP: This menu is a collection of popular menus to help users
quickly configure the printer. It is also affected by the installed options.

70
 Active Print
Optimizing Emulations
Speed

Active Emulations
The emulations present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and
the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and do
not require any action from the user.

IMPORTANT Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. H-Series and Indian
Language products only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.

Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options

Optional ACTIVE IGP ACTIVE

Firmware Type Emulations EMULATION 3
Available EMUL 1 EMULATION 2

IPDS
IGP/PGL* N/A IGP/PGL
IPDS LinePrinter+
P8000 Standard PGL/VGL
IPDS
IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL* N/A IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+
P8000 TN PGL/VGL
IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
PCL-II* PCL-II

IGP/PGL & IGP/PGL

P8000 PCL-II PGL/VGL N/A LP+ LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & IGP/VGL

LP+ LinePrinter+
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces
the options.
3 The
selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

71
Chapter 4 Active Emulations

Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options

Optional ACTIVE IGP ACTIVE

Firmware Type Emulations EMULATION 3
Available EMUL 1 EMULATION 2

LG* LG
IGP/PGL & IGP/PGL
P8000 LG PGL/VGL N/A LP+ LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & IGP/VGL

LP+ LinePrinter+

44/48XX- 44/48XX-ANSI
ANSI*

P8000 ANSI PGL/VGL N/A IGP/PGL & IGP/PGL

LP+ LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & IGP/VGL

LP+ LinePrinter+

Postscript/ Postscript/PDF
PDF*

OpenPrint P8000 PGL/VGL N/A IGP/PGL & IGP/PGL

LP+ LinePrinter+
Standard 4
IGP/VGL & IGP/VGL
LP+ LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P8000 HD 4 N/A N/A N/A Postscript/PDF

H-Series N/A NA N/A LinePrinter+

Indian Language N/A NA N/A LinePrinter+

NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces
the options.
3 The
selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
4
The Postscript emulation cannot process color documents. All documents sent to the
OpenPrint printer must be either gray scale or black and white.

72
 P8000 Standard Firmware

P8000 Standard Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE IGP EMUL
ZTP DataTime 4 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 IPDS 2
ZTP WaitTime 4 Print Config. Centronics 1 LinePrinter+
ZTP TearDist 4 Delete Config. Serial IGP/PGL 3
ACTIVE IGP EMUL 1 Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 IGP/VGL 2
PGL SFCC 3 Protect Configs. USB
VGL SFCC 2 Name Configs
Active Protocol Reset Cfg Names
Form Length Auto Save
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 4 PTX_SETUP Option Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Power-up State Phase Value
Bar Code Quality Downloaded Fonts Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 5 PMD Fault System Memory
View Function Power Stacker 1 Print Statistics
Unidirectional Auto Elevator 1 Software Build
Display Language Auto Locking Feature File 6
Panel Display Main File System Shuttle Type
Accented Chars. SD File System 1 Auto Dump
Set Sharing Printer Mgmt
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port 1
If installed.
Ret. Status Port 2
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
Set Lock Key 3 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

RBN Low Warn@ 4

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
RBN Low Action 5
Available for pedestal printers only.
RBN End Action 6 If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Print Energy 7 7
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
Disp. Intensity

73
Chapter 4 Active Emulations

P8000 TN Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE IGP EMUL
ZTP DataTime 4 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 3270 Params
ZTP WaitTime 4 Print Config. Centronics 1 5250 Params
ZTP TearDist 4 Delete Config. Serial LinePrinter+
ACTIVE IGP EMUL 1 Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 IGP/PGL 2
PGL SFCC 2 Protect Configs. USB IGP/VGL 3
VGL SFCC 3 Name Configs
Active Protocol Reset Cfg Names
Form Length Auto Save
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 4 PTX_SETUP Option Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Power-up State Phase Value
Bar Code Quality Downloaded Fonts Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 5 PMD Fault System Memory
View Function Power Stacker 1 Print Statistics
Unidirectional Auto Elevator 1 Software Build
Display Language Auto Locking Feature File 6
Panel Display Main File System Shuttle Type
Accented Chars. SD File System 1 Auto Dump
Set Sharing Printer Mgmt
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
1If installed.
Pwr Save Control
2
Cancel Key If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
3
Rcv. Status Port If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
4 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Ret. Status Port
5
Set Lock Key Available for pedestal printers only.
6
RBN Low Warn@ If a Feature File has been downloaded.
7 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 7
Disp. Intensity

74
 P8000 PCL-II Firmware

P8000 PCL-II Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE EMULATION
ZTP DataTime 6 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 LinePrinter+ 4
ZTP WaitTime 6 Print Config. Centronics 1 IGP/PGL 2
ZTP TearDist 6 Delete Config. Serial IGP/VGL 3
ACTIVE EMULATION Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 PCL-II 5
PGL SFCC 2 Protect Configs. USB
VGL SFCC 3 Name Configs
Active Protocol 4 Reset Cfg Names
Form Length 4 Auto Save
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Page Length Rep. 5
Max Line Width 5
LPI Adjust 5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 6 Hex Dump Mode Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Power-up State Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF PMD Fault Phase Value
Bar Code Quality Power Stacker 1 Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 7 Auto Elevator 1 System Memory
View Function Auto Locking Print Statistics
Unidirectional Main File System Software Build
Display Language SD File System 1 Feature File 8
Panel Display Shuttle Timeout Shuttle Type
Slow Paper Slew Auto Dump
Alarm Printer Mgmt
Power Saver Time 1If
Pwr Save Control installed.
2
Cancel Key If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3
Rcv. Status Port If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4 If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Ret. Status Port 5
Set Lock Key If PCL-II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6
RBN Low Warn@ Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7 Available for pedestal printers only.
RBN Low Action 8
RBN End Action If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Print Energy 9 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
Disp. Intensity

75
Chapter 4 Active Emulations

P8000 LG Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE EMULATION
ZTP DataTime 6 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 LinePrinter+ 4
ZTP WaitTime 6 Print Config. Parallel Type 1 IGP/PGL 2
ZTP TearDist 6 Delete Config. IEEE 1284 1 IGP/VGL 3
ACTIVE EMULATION Power-Up Config. Serial LG 5
PGL SFCC 2 Protect Configs. USB
VGL SFCC 3 Name Configs
Active Protocol 4 Reset Cfg Names
Form Length 4 Auto Save
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Vert Forms 5
Horiz Forms 5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 6 Hex Dump Mode Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Power-up State Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF PMD Fault Phase Value
Bar Code Quality Power Stacker 1 Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 7 Auto Elevator 1 System Memory
View Function Auto Locking Print Statistics
Unidirectional Main File System Software Build
Panel Display SD File System 1 Feature File 8
Display Language Shuttle Timeout Shuttle Type
Slow Paper Slew Auto Dump
Alarm Printer Mgmt
Power Saver Time
1
Pwr Save Control If installed.
2
Cancel Key If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Rcv. Status Port 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
Ret. Status Port If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
Set Lock Key If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
RBN Low Warn@ 6 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
RBN Low Action Available for pedestal printers only.
8
RBN End Action If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Print Energy 9 9 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.

Disp. Intensity

76
 P8000 ANSI Firmware

P8000 ANSI Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE EMULATION
ZTP DataTime 6 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 LinePrinter+ 4
ZTP WaitTime 6 Print Config. Centronics 1 44/48XX-ANSI 5
ZTP TearDist 6 Delete Config. Serial IGP/PGL 2
ACTIVE EMULATION Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 IGP/VGL 3
PGL SFCC 2 Protect Configs. USB
VGL SFCC 3 Name Configs
Margins 5 Reset Cfg Names
Active Protocol 4 Auto Save
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC 4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 6 PTX_SETUP Option Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Power-up State Phase Value
Bar Code Quality Downloaded Fonts Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 7 PMD Fault System Memory
View Function Power Stacker 1 Print Statistics
Unidirectional Auto Elevator 1 Software Build
Display Language Auto Locking Feature File 8
Panel Display Main File System Shuttle Type
Accented Chars. SD File System 1 Auto Dump
Set Sharing Printer Mgmt
Shuttle Timeout
1
Slow Paper Slew If installed
2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Alarm
3
Power Saver Time If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
Pwr Save Control If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5 If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Cancel Key
6
Rcv. Status Port Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Ret. Status Port Available for pedestal printers only.
8 If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Set Lock Key
9
RBN Low Warn@ Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity

77
Chapter 4 Active Emulations

OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 ACTIVE EMULATION
ZTP DataTime 6 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 LinePrinter+ 4
ZTP WaitTime 6 Print Config. Centronics 1 IGP/PGL 2
ZTP TearDist 6 Delete Config. Serial IGP/VGL 3
ACTIVE EMULATION Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 Postscript/PDF 5
Resolution 5 Protect Configs. USB
Paper Size 5 Name Configs
PGL SFCC 2 Reset Cfg Names
VGL SFCC 3 Auto Save
Active Protocol 4
Form Length 4
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 6 SURE SCAN 5 Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point PTX_SETUP Option Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Hex Dump Mode Phase Value
Bar Code Quality 4 Power-up State Paper Out Dots
Tear Bar Dist. 7 Downloaded Fonts System Memory
View Function PMD Fault Print Statistics
Unidirectional Power Stacker 1 Software Build
Display Language Auto Elevator 1 Feature File 8
Panel Display Auto Locking Shuttle Type
Accented Chars. Main File System Auto Dump
SD File System 1 Printer Mgmt
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout 1If installed
Slow Paper Slew 2
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Alarm 3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Power Saver Time 4 If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Pwr Save Control 5
If Postscript/PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
Cancel Key 6
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Rcv. Status Port 7 Available for pedestal printers only.
Ret. Status Port 8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Set Lock Key 9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity

78
 OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 211

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 Postscript/PDF

ZTP Data Time 2 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1
ZTP Wait Time 2 Print Config. Centronics 1
ZTP Tear Dist 2 Delete Config. Serial
Resolution Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1
Paper Size Protect Configs. USB
Ribbon End Point Name Configs
Load Config. Reset Cfg Names
Save Config. Auto Save
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 2 SURE SCAN Printer Tests

Ribbon end Point PTX_SETUP Option Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Hex Dump Mode Phase Value
Tear Bar Dist. Power-Up State Paper Out Dots
Unidirectional PMD Fault System Memory
Display Language Auto Locking Print Statistics
Panel Display Main File System Software Build
SD File System 1 Feature File 3
Set Sharing Shuttle Type
Shuttle Timeout Auto Dump
Slow Paper Slew Printer Mgmt
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action 1
Print Energy 4 If installed.
2 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Disp. Intensity 3
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
4
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.

79
Chapter 4 H-Series Firmware

H-Series Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 LinePrinter+

ZTP Data Time 5 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1 Printer Protocol
ZTP Wait Time 5 Print Config. Centronics 1 LQ 1600K 2
ZTP TearDistance 5 Delete Config. Serial OKI 4
Graphic Spd Up Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1 KS 3
Typeface Protect Configs. USB KSSM 3
DBCS CPI Name Configs
Select LPI Reset Cfg Names
DBCS ASCII Style Auto Save
[Link] Mode 2
Ribbon End Point
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Load Config.
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238

ZTP SETTINGS 5 PTX_SETUP Option Printer Tests

Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Test Width
Open Platen @ BOF Power-Up State Phase Value
Tear Bar Dist. 6 Downloaded Fonts Paper Out Dots
View Function PMD Fault System Memory
Unidirectional Power Stacker 1 Print Statistics
Display Language Auto Elevator 1 Software Build
Panel Display Auto Locking Feature File 7
Accented Chars. Main File System Shuttle Type
SD File System 1 Auto Dump
Set Sharing Printer Mgmt
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time 1 If installed.
Pwr Save Control 2
Availalbe for Hanzi and Kanji LP+ Printers only.
Cancel Key 3
Available for Hangul LP+ Printers only.
Rcv. Status Port 4 Available only when the OKI emulation is enabled. If necessary,
Ret. Status Port
refer to the N7000 User's Manual.
Job Set/Typeface 5
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Print Hist. Log 6 Available for pedestal printers only.
RBN Low Warn@ 7
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
RBN Low Action 8
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
RBN End Action
Print Energy 8
Disp. Intensity

80
 P8000
OpenPrint P8000 Indian
HD Language Firmware
Postscript/PDF

P8000 Indian Language Firmware

OFFLINE

QUICK CONFIG. HOST NETWORK EMULATION

SETUP CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP 1
page 82 page 91 page 93 page 105 page 111

Active Host Load Config. Active Host Ethernet Address 1 LinePrinter+

ZTP DataTime 2 Save Config. Auto Switching Ethernet Params 1
ZTP WaitTime 2 Print Config. Centronics 1
ZTP TearDist 2 Delete Config. Serial
Active Protocol Power-Up Config. IEEE 1284 1
Form Length Protect Configs. USB
Form Width Name Configs
Select CPI Reset Cfg Names
Select LPI Auto Save
P-Series SFCC
Indian Option
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Plat @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew

PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL USER
page 216 page 220 page 238
PTX_SETUP Option
ZTP SETTINGS 2 Printer Tests
Hex Dump Mode
Ribbon End Point Test Width
Power-Up State
Open Platen @ BOF Phase Value
Downloaded Fonts
Bar Code Quality Paper Out Dots
PMD Fault
Tear Bar Dist. 3 System Memory
Power Stacker 1
View Function Print Statistics
Auto Elevator 1
Unidirectional Software Build
Auto Locking
Display Language Feature File 4
Main File System
Panel Display Shuttle Type
SD File System 1
Accented Chars. Auto Dump
Set Sharing
Printer Mgmt
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm 1 If installed.
Power Saver Time 2
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Pwr Save Control 3
Available for pedestal printers only.
Cancel Key 4 If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Rcv. Status Port 5
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 5
Disp. Intensity

81
Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Menu

QUICK SETUP Menu

When the printer is in offline mode, QUICK SETUP is the first Main Menu
option that appears on the control panel. The QUICK SETUP menu offers
basic menu items required to configure your printer. This section describes
the options within the QUICK SETUP menu.
NOTE: The options in your menu will vary depending on the firmware, host
IO, emulations selected, and other features available with your
printer.

Active Host
The Active Host menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between
the printer and your host computer. The Auto Switching option (factory
default) allows all ports to be active at the same time.

ZTP DataTime
This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires
before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The
values range from .5 to 5 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.

ZTP WaitTime
This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear
bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to
print the next form. The adjustable values range from 500 to 5000
milliseconds in increments of 500 milliseconds. The default value is 2
seconds.

ZTP TearDist
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear
bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The up and down arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the
current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print
position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new
value.

DBCS CPI (H-Series)

Defines the default values for horizontal character spacing in DBCS mode.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, and Others
CPI. For the Hangul LP+ printer, selected from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.5, 10, and
others CPI.
The factory default for the Hanzi LP+ printer is 6.7 cpi. The factory default for
the Hangul LP+ printer is 6.0 cpi. The factory default for the Kanji LP+ printer
is 7.5 cpi.

82
 QUICK SETUP
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)

This option specifies the operating mode of the Hanzi printer. If set to DBCS
mode, the printer can print double-byte characters and a limited number of
single-byte characters. Otherwise, the printer can only print single-byte
characters.
Available for the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printers only.

DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)

This option specifies the appearance of the single-byte numeric characters.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from Normal, Oversize and OCRB.
For the Hangul LP+ printer, select from Normal, and OCRB.
If set to Oversize, the numeric characters will appear larger than other
single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character "8" will be
changed to "8". If set to OCRB, the numeric characters will print in OCRB
style.

Graphics Spd-Up (H-Series)

This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on
Enhanced/Turbo mode.
• Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics
resolution.
• Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Normal mode.
• Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the
printer is faster than Enhanced mode.
• Match Typeface. The input 180 x 180 dpi graphics resolution will drop-
dot to the resolution matching the typeface selected.

Typeface (H-Series)
Sets the typeface of the printer. This key requires confirmation with the
ENTER key.
The factory default for the Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS LP+ is Near LQ.
The factory default for the Hangul and Hanzi Big5 LP+ is LQ.

Active Emulation
The Active Emulation menu enables you to select a combination of
emulations as described in Table 4 on page 71.

Active IGP Emulation

The Active IGP Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or
VGL emulation. This menu is only available with the P8000 Standard and TN
firmware as described in Table 4 on page 71.

83
Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Menu

PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
• 7E (factory default)
• 1 – FF

VGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
• 5E (factory default)
• 1 – FF

Active Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.

Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).

Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.

Select CPI
This parameter allows you to specify the characters per inch (cpi) values.
The options are 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0. The factory default is
10.0 CPI. Also, 6.0 CPI is available for Indian Language firmware.

Select LPI
This parameter allows you to specify the lines per inch (lpi) values.
• ASCII: The options are 6.0, 8.0, 9.0 and 10.3 LPI. The factory default is
6.0 LPI.
• Indian Language: All ASCII options are available with additional options
3.0, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 LPI.
• H-Series: The options are 6.0 or 8.0 LPI. The factory default for the Hanzi
and Hangul LP+ is 6.0. The factory default for Kanji LP+ is 8.0.

84
 QUICK SETUP
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
• SOH (hex 01) (factory default)
• ESC (hex 1B)
• ETX (hex 03)
• CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E) – also called caret (^)
• TILDE (hex 7E) – (~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)
are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data
stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will
occur.

Margins
• Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
• Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
• Top Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the top of the page
and incrementing from the top down.
• Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.

Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).

Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.

85
Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Menu

Vert Forms (LG)

• Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the
forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch),
ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press
the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top
margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is
selected.
• Top Mrg 6/0 This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must
specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198
lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and
bottom margins do not cross each other.

Horiz Forms (LG)

• Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1
inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value,
left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The
margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not
cross each other.
• Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify
the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The
default value is 13.2. Press NEXT to increase the value, PREV to
decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will
automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each
other.

Page Length Rep (PCL-II)

• Inches/Page (factory default). Allows the user to set the page length in
inches.
• Lines/Page. Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines.

Max Line Width (PCL-II)

Set the maximum line width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the
printer.

LPI Adjust (PCL-II)

Set the lines per inch value for the PCL-II emulation.

86
 QUICK SETUP
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

Resolution (OpenPrint)
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used
when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print
resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard:
• 120x144 DPI (factory default)
• 90 x 96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD:
• 180x180 DPI (factory default)
• 180x90 DPI
• 90x180 DPI
• 120x120 DPI
• 90x90 DPI

Paper Size (OpenPrint)

This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. Available options
include:
• Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
• Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch
increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
• Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three
length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1
inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6
to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8
to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of
the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,
select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu
must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”
menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not
exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing
that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration
printout will also show the length menu used.

87
Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Menu

• See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.

Table 5. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

US Fanfold 13.6 x 11 in
Letter 8.5 x 11 in

Legal 8.5 x 14 in

Executive 7.3 x 10.5 in

A3 11.7 x 16.5 in

A4 8.3 x 11 2/3 in

A5 5.8 x 8.3 in

A6 4.1 x 5.8 in
Fanfold 10x14in 10 x 14 in

Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in

Fanfold 12x12in 12 x 12 in

JIS B5 7.2 x 10.1 in

US Folio 8.5 x 13 in

No. 10 Envelope 4.1 x 9.5 in

DL Envelope 4.3 x 8.7 in

C5 Envelope 6.4 x 9 in

C6 Envelope 4.5 x 6.4 in

ISO B5 6.9 x 9.8 in

Indian Option (Indian Language)

• Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page,
and Data Page.
• Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without
composing.
• Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for
non-table format.
• Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for table-
formatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands
nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.

88
 QUICK SETUP
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

• Tall ASCII Font. The available options include enable and disable.
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII
characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12,
and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
• Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian
character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not
with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the
character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 6 shows the space width adjustment
value according to its typeface and CPI setting.

Table 6. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on

Indian Language Printers

Typeface CPI Space Width

6 20

10 12

12 10
Data Processing 13.3 9

15 8

17.1 7

20 6

6 30

10 18

12 15
Near Letter Quality
13.3 13

15 12
17.1 10

• Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi

numerals.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.

89
Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Menu

Ribbon End Point

This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon
as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a
darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting
is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%.

Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.

Save Config
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print
job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings
for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost
if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new
configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been
deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.

Power Up Config
This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or
1-8) will be the power-up configuration.

Open Platen @ BOF

Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through
the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen
when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,
you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between
perforations

Slow Paper Slew

• Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at
maximum speed.
• Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that
certain forms will stack neatly.

90
 OpenPrint P8000 HDCONFIG. CONTROL
Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

CONFIG. CONTROL Menu

The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s
configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs.

CONFIG. * = Factory Default

CONTROL

(from page 73,

74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)

Load Save Print Delete Power-Up Protect

Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Configs.

Factory* Cfg 1* Current Short* All* Factory* Disable*

Cfg 1 - Cfg 8 Cfg 2 - Cfg 8 Current Full Cfg 1 - Cfg 8 Cfg 1 - Cfg 8 Enable
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8

Name Reset Cfg Auto Save

Configs Names

(see Example Cfg 1* Enable*

2 on page 66) Cfg 2 - Cfg 8 Disable
All

Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.

Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print
job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings
for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost
if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new
configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been
deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.

Print Config.
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral.

91
Chapter 4 CONFIG. CONTROL Menu

Delete Config.
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory
default configuration cannot be deleted.

Power-Up Config.
You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the
power-up configuration.

Protect Configs.
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When
disabled (factory default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays.

Name Configs
This option allows you to rename any of the eight different configurations.
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.
menus. The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
See example 2 on page 66 on how to name configurations.

Reset Cfg Names

You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number.

Auto Save
• Enable (factory default). When a change has been made to a Config.
menu, this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the
change to a Config #.
If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change,
pressing ENTER saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and
becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a
menu change is made, pressing ENTER will save the change to Config 1.
• Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.

92
 HOST INTERFACE
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Menu
Firmware

HOST INTERFACE Menu

HOST
* = Factory Default
INTERFACE 1
If installed.
2 Used by LG firmware instead of Centronics and IEEE 1284.
(from page 73, 3
Default for Indian Language firmware.
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)

Active Auto Parallel Centronics 1 Serial IEEE 1284 1

Host Switching Type 2

Auto Switching (see page 94) Centronics* (see page 98) (see page 100) (see page 96)
Centronics 1 IEEE 1284
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
Ethernet 3
USB
Parallel 2

USB

(see page 100)

The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many
types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently
selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message
display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface
parameters which can be configured.

IMPORTANT When set to Auto Switching, the printer will load the power-up
configuration and the new interface parameters. Any settings made and
not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost.

93
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

Auto Switching Submenu

Auto Switching * = Factory Default

1
(from page 93) If Installed.

Parallel Serial USB Ethernet

Hotport 1 Hotport Hotport Hotport1

Port Type Trickle Time Timeout Timeout

Centronics 1/4 sec* 10 sec.* 10 sec.*
(see page 98 for options) 1/2 sec 10 - 60 sec (10-60)
IEEE 1284* 1 sec Switch Out On
(see page 96 for options) 2 sec Data Timeout
Disable 4 sec Session Close
Trickle Time 8 sec
1/4 sec* 16 sec
1/2 sec Off
1 sec Timeout
2 sec 10 sec.*
4 sec (10-60)
8 sec Report Status
16 sec Disable*
Off Enable
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable

Auto Switching gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams
sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to
the serial, parallel, USB, and Ethernet ports as if they were the only interface
connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received. The
user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.

Port Type
Select the parallel interface type connected to the printer. For example, if your
printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection, you would select
Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu.

94
 Auto Switching Submenu

Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the
parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.

Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in
order to service the other ports.

Report Status
• Disable (factory default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the
active port reports the fault to the host.
• Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active
port.

Switch Out On
NOTE: This option is only available under Ethernet Hotport.
• Data Timeout (factory default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has
been received for the selected Time Out period.
• Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is
closed. If the Ethernet option is not installed the Network Socket is always
reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.

95
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu

* = Factory Default
1
IEEE 1284 OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended
(from page 93) range to 256 with a default of 64.
2
Not available on LG or PCL-2 products.

Prime TOF Buffer Size Auto Trickle Offline

Signal Action in K 1 Trickle Time Process 2

Enable* Reset* 16* Disable* 1/4 sec* Disable*

Disable Do Nothing 1-16 Enable 1/2 sec Enable
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off

The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and
supports bidirectional communication. Configuration of this interface is
controlled from the host. Refer to “IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface” on page 249
for more details about the available modes (Compatibility, Nibble, and Byte).

Prime Signal
• Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
• Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.

TOF Action
• Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start
when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only
if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
• Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is
asserted from the host.

Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284
parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte
increments. The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a
default of 64K.

96
 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu

Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the
parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the
printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the
rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty.

Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.

Offline Process
• Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel data while offline.
• Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer's
buffer is full.

97
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

Centronics (Parallel) Submenu

* = Factory Default
1 OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended
Centronics
range to 256 with a default of 64.
(from page 93)

Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data Resp. Busy On Latch

Polarity Polarity Strobe Data On

Enable* Enable* Standard* Standard* Enable* Leading*

Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Disable Trailing

Prime TOF Action Buffer Size Auto Trickle

Signal in K 1 Trickle Time

Enable* Reset* 16* Disable* 1/4 sec*

Disable Do Nothing (1-16) Enable 1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off

Data Bit 8
• Enable (factory default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character
set.
• Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a
zero, regardless of its actual setting.

PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
• Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as
characters or control codes.
• Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.

Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your
host computer.
• Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to invert
the data.
• Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.

98
 Centronics (Parallel) Submenu

Resp. Polarity
The Resp. Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of
your host computer.
• Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
• Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.

Busy On Strobe
• Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is
received.
• Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.

Latch Data On
Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data
strobe signal. The default is leading.

Prime Signal
• Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
• Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.

TOF Action
• Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start
when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only
if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
• Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is
asserted from the host.

Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port
buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a
default of 64K.

Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the
parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the
printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the
rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out.

99
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the
parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.

Serial Submenu

* = Factory Default
Serial 1 OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.
(from page 93) H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have an extended
range to 256 with a default setting of 64.

Data Baud Word Stop Parity Data Term

Protocol Rate Length 8 Bits 1 Ready

XON/XOFF* 600 Baud 8* 1* None* True*

ETX/ACK 1200 Baud 7 2 Odd On-Line and BNF
ACK/NAK 2400 Baud Even Off-Line or BF
Series1 1 Char 4800 Baud Mark On-Line
Series1 2 Char 9600 Baud* Sense False
ENQ/ACK 19200 Baud
DTR 38400 Baud
57600 Baud
115200 Baud

Request to Buffer Size Poll Poll Idle

Send in K 1 Character Response Response

On-Line and BNF* 16* 00 Hex* 0 ms* Disable*

Off-Line or BF 1-16 (00-FF Hex) (0-30 ms) Enable
On-Line
False
True

One Char Framing Offline

Enquiry Errors Process

Disable* Disable Disable*

Enable Enable* Enable

100
 Serial Submenu

Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host
interface requirements.
• XON / XOFF (factory default). The printer controls the flow of
communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off. In
some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is
too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by
sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is sent when the number
of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the
buffer size. If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the
printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters
received. When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON).
The data does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-
block protocol.
• ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX
signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has
received the entire block of data.
• ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has
accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device
did not receive the transmission.
• SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from
the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters
sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75
percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response
character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer
full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.
Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate
response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the
printer will send a response character every two seconds while the
number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer
size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character
xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will
send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll
Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n
milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed
from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause
problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit
image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character
and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no
effect and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from
buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.

101
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

The response characters are described in Table 7.

Table 7. Series1 1 Char Response Characters

Printer State Response

Online and Buffer Empty CR

Online and Buffer Full 3

Offline and Buffer Empty 0

Offline and Buffer Full 2

• SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the

Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The
response characters are described in Table 8.

Table 8. Series1 2 Char Response Characters

Printer State Response

Online and Buffer Empty 1 CR

Online and Buffer Full 3 CR

Offline and Buffer Empty 0 CR

Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR

• ENQ/ACK. Enquiry/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of data by

sending an ENQ (Enquiry, decimal 5, Control-E) approximately every 80
characters. When the printer is ready for more data, it replies with an ACK
(Acknowledge, decimal 6, Control-F).
• DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to
the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send
a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal. DTR
tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during
an unsafe condition, data will be lost.)

Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The choices for the RS-232 interface are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud. The default is 9600 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may also
want to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve
performance.

102
 Serial Submenu

Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host
computer.

Stop Bits 1
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in
the host computer.

Parity
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must
match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.

Data Term Ready

This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the
printer is ready to receive data.
• True (factory default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
• On Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
• Off Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
• On Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
• False. Never asserts the DTR signal.

Request To Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or
not the printer is ready to receive data.
• On Line and BNF (factory default). Asserts the RTS signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
• Off Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the
internal serial buffer is full.
• On Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
• False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
• True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.

103
Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Menu

Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port
buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: 1. If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may want to
increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance.
2. H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and
a default of 64K.

Poll Character
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this
character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the
printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF
hexadecimal.

Poll Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the
printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the
response. It may be configured from 0 through 30.

Idle Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. The printer will send a response character every two seconds
while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the
buffer size.

One Char Enquiry

The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from
the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to
turn on and off this feature.

Table 9. One Char Enquiry Response Characters

Printer State Response (hex)

Online and Buffer Not Full 22

Online and Buffer Full 23

Offline and Buffer Not Full 20

Offline and Buffer Full 21

The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is
set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically
disabled.

104
 NETWORK SETUP
Ethernet Menu
Address

Framing Errors
Possible errors that can occur when the printer’s serial interface settings do
not match those of the host computer.
• Enable (factory default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message will
display on the control panel.
• Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the
control panel.

Offline Process
• Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process serial data while in offline mode.
• Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without
printing the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer’s
buffer is full.

NETWORK SETUP Menu

NETWORK
SETUP 1
Only if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed.
(from page 73
to 80)

Ethernet Ethernet
Address 1 Params 1

See section below. See page 107.

Ethernet Address

Ethernet * = Factory Default

Address
(from page 105)

IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC IP

Mask Address Address Assignment

[Link] [Link] [Link] hhhhhhhhhhhh DHCP

Disable
Enable*
BootP
Disable*
Enable

105
Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu

IP Address
A numeric address such as [Link] which identifies a printer or server in
a LAN or WAN.

Subnet Mask
A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or
subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be
forwarded to other subnets.

Gateway Address
A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that
translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include
protocol translation.

MAC Address
This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for
each printer. It is read-only.

IP Assignment
This menu provides two options to control IP Assignment: DHCP and BootP.
• DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable and Enable (factory default).
• BootP. You can enable/disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable (factory default) and Enable.

106
 Ethernet Params

Ethernet Params

* = Factory Default
Ethernet 1
If installed.
Params
(from page 105)

ASCII IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Job Control Offline

Data Port Port 1 Timer Speed Process

9100* 5001* 3 Minutes* Auto Select* Standard* Disable*

1025 - 65535 1025 - 65535 0- 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced Enable
10 Full Duplex Fast Standard
100 Half Duplex Off
100 Full Duplex

The Ethernet Params menu helps your printer communicate on a network.

For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet
Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual.

ASCII Data Port

This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number
needs to match your host system setting.
• 9100 (factory default)
• 1025 - 65535

IPDS Data Port

This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the
IPDS option is installed.
• 5001 (factory default)
• 1025 - 65535

Keep Alive Timer

This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer
on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has
terminated.
• 3 Minutes (factory default)
• 0 - 10 Minutes

107
Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu

Ethernet Speed
This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card
(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different
systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.
• Auto Select. (factory default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to
perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half
Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
• 10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
• 10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
• 100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
• 100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.

Job Control
The job control mode has four options:
• Standard (factory default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving
the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done”
when the job is completely received by the NIC.
• Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job
before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is
fully printed.
• Off. No job synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
• Fast Standard. The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged
immediately. Use this selection if the job is timed out due to a delay in the
acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data
being printed.
NOTE: It is recommended to set this option to Enhanced if the emulation is
Postscript.

Offline Process
• Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
network data while in offline mode.
• Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without
printing the current network job while the printer is offline until the printer’s
buffer is full.

108
 ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS
Ethernet Params

ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS

The emulation types present in the printer are based on the firmware installed
and the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and
do not require any action from the user.

IMPORTANT Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. The H-Series and Indian
Language printers only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.
This ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION function allows you to
activate the desired emulation. There are two methods for selecting the
desired emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the
printer menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the
emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual for details).
When changing from one emulation to the other, the printer will load the
power-up configuration and the new emulation parameters. Any configuration
settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in
NVRAM will be lost.

Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options

ACTIVE IGP ACTIVE

Firmware Type EMULATION 3
EMUL 1 EMULATION 2

IPDS
IGP/PGL* N/A IPG/PGL
LinePrinter+
P8000 Standard
IPDS
IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL* N/A IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+
P8000 TN
IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1 The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

109
Chapter 4 ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS

Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options

ACTIVE IGP ACTIVE

Firmware Type EMULATION 3
EMUL 1 EMULATION 2

PCL-II* PCL-II

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

P8000 PCL-II N/A LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

LG* LG

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

P8000 LG N/A LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

44/48XX-ANSI* 44/48XX-ANSI

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

P8000 ANSI N/A LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

Postscript/PDF* Postscript/PDF

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

OpenPrint P8000 N/A LinePrinter+
Standard IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P8000 HD N/A N/A Postscript/PDF

H-Series N/A N/A LinePrinter+

Indian Language N/A N/A LinePrinter+

NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1 The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3 The
selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

110
 EMULATION Menu
Ethernet Params

EMULATION Menu
The EMULATION menu allows you to configure the emulation used with your
printer. The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ, and Serial
Matrix emulations are all part of ASCII LinePrinter+. The H-Series
LinePrinter+ has a unique set of emulations such as LQ1600K, KS, and
KSSM depending on the firmware type. You can configure options for the
active emulation via the EMULATION menu. Emulation options are further
described in their corresponding Programmer's Reference Manual.
The menus shown for the ASCII LinePrinter+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL are
specific to the Standard, ANSI, and TN firmware. These emulations may be
structured differently for the PCL-II and LG Firmware. For PCL-II and
LG Firmware, some of the character sets or options may not be available.

* = Factory Default
EMULATION 1
Optional Emulation
2 OpenPrint firmware only.
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)

3270 5250 LinePrinter+ 44/48XX- IGP/PGL1 IGP/VGL1

Params 1 Params 1 ANSI1

page 112 page 119 page 124 page 166 page 173 page 185

IPDS1 PCL-II 1 LG 1 Postscript/

PDF 2

page 197 page 202 page 206 page 211

111
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

3270 Params
* = Factory Default
3270 1
This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed.
Params 1
(from page 74)

Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial Early Print PTX
Select Tbl Set Line Cmpl Transparent

(see page 113) Secondary Sets* Enable* Disable* Lead-in Chars

Primary Sets Disable Enable Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code

Change Set Text Intervention Compatibility Host Format

Case Orientn Req Op Override Control

Dual Case* Left to Right* Send To Host* CR At MPP + 1 Disable* Disable*

Mono Case Right to Left Do Not Send On* Enable Enable
Off
NL At MPP + 1
On*
Off
Position Aft FF
On
Off*
Last Char = FF
On*
Off
Null Suppression
Off*
On
FF Validity
Off*
On
Auto Skip At End
Off*
On
FF After Job
Off*
On
CR, EM, & NL
On*
Off

Max. Print
Width

13.2 inches*
Printer Width

112
 3270 Params

3270 * = Factory Default

Params

Char Set Select

(from page 112)

Primary Sets Secondary Sets

0037 English US* English US*

0037 Eng Nether English UK
0285 English UK Austrian/German
0273 Austr/Germ German (Alt)
0274 Belg. Old Belgian
0275 Brazilian Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren Canadian French
0277 Danish Danish/Norweg.
0287 Danish Alt Danish (Alt)
0278 Finnish Finnish/Swedish
0288 Finn. Alt Finnish (Alt)
0297 French French
0500 Internat 5 International
0280 Italian Italian
0281 Japan. Eng Japanese Eng.
0282 Portuguese Japanese Katak.
0284 Span Speak Portuguese
0289 Span. Alt Portug. (Alt)
0500 Swiss Bil Spanish
0500 Belg. New Spanish (Alt)
0803 Hebrew Old Spanish Speak.
0424 Hebrew Swiss Fren/Ger
0892 ORC A Old Hebrew
0893 ORC B Hebrew
0420 Arabic Farsi/Latin
0880 Cyril. Old Greek Old
0423 Greek Old Greek New
0875 Gr New Euro Arabic
0871 Icelandic Turkish
0290 Japan Katak Turkish Old
0870 Latin 2 Latin 2/ROECE
0838 Thai Yugoslavian
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0905 Turk. Old
0256 Intern. 1
0924 Euro Lat-9
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.

113
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the Coax interface’s current character set. This operation
is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface.

Active Char Set

Specifies which character language set will be the active set.
• Secondary Sets (factory default)
• Primary Sets

Prt Partial Line

• Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer
to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
• Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.

Early Print Cmpl

Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the
host before the printer is actually done printing all data. Early Print Complete
is only available if the IPDS feature is installed.
• Disable (factory default). Means the printer will suppress the Early Print
Complete response until all printing is complete.
• Enable. Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host
when it is able to accept more data.
NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, the
data in the printer will remain in the buffer (regardless of the setting of
the Cancel Buffer option). It is recommended that local procedures be
followed to recover from the error.
Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress. If
this is done you will need to restart the printer.

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through
standard TN3270 emulations. To access these features, send text commands
in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets
are available:
• Set 1. start code: <% (factory default)
stop code: >
• Set 2. start code:¬¬
stop code: $
• Set 3. start code: _%
stop code: _
• User Defined.

114
 3270 Params

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII
character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for
the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes
for the User Defined option:
• Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
• Start Code 2 5F
• Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
• Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.

Change Case
Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-
SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed
online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of
the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi.
SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by
the host computer.
• Dual Case (factory default)
• Mono Case

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This
allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of
left to right.
• Left to Right (factory default).
• Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.

Intervention Req
Select from the following:
• Send To Host (factory default). The printer sends a signal to the host
computer when any of the following occur:
• Printer faults occur.
• Hold mode time–out occurs.
• Not Send To Host
If not selected, the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause
data loss (paper jam, ribbon stall, online platen open, etc.).

115
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Compatibility Op
The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the
non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.

CR At MPP+1
MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This
option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.
• On (factory default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of
the next line.
• Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.

NL At MPP+1
Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.
• On (factory default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from
the current position.
• Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.

Position Aft FF (4234 only)

Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed
command is sent.
• On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the
next form.
• Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first
print line on the next form.

Last Char = FF
Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code
encountered in the print buffer.
• On (factory default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of
the next form.
• Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.
NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.
If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,
the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form
regardless of the setting of this option.

Null Suppression
• Off (factory default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.
• On. Treats nulls as blank spaces.

116
 3270 Params

FF Validity
Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.
• Off (factory default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print
position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command
at any other position is recognized as a space.
• On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the
data stream.

Auto Skip At End

Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a
print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed
function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.
• Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next
line.
• On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next
form.

FF After Job
Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print
screen function).
• Off (factory default). Performs an automatic new line command after
completing a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return
command was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print
position 1 of the next line.
• On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was
the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the
first line on the next form.

CR, EM, and NL (3287 only)

CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that
the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as
control codes.
• On (factory default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control
codes.
• Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces.

117
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
• Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override
operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),
characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the
information appearing on the message display may not match the data
stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable
option.
• Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after
absolute and relative move commands are executed.
• Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL
feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the
new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
• Enable.

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host
interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the
printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be
truncated.
• 13.2 inches (factory default)
• Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)

118
 5250 Params

5250 Params

* = Factory Default
5250 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed.
Params 1
(from page 74)

Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial PTX Graphic

Select Tbl Set Line Transparent Chek Err

(see page 120) Secondary Set* Enable* Lead-in Chars Enable*

Primary Set Disable Set 1 <%>* Disable
Set 2 ¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code

Graphic Set Text Host Format Max. Print

Chek Cod Orientn Override Control Width

60* Left to Right* Disable* Disable* 13.2 inches*

40-FE Right to Left Enable Enable Printer Width

119
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

5250 * = Factory Default

Params

Char Set Select

(from page 119)

Primary Sets Secondary Sets

0037 English US* English US*

0037 Eng Nether Austrian/German
0500 Swiss Bil Belgian
0500 Belg. New Brazilian
0273 Austr/Germ Canadian French
0274 Belg. Old Danish/Norweg.
0275 Brazilian Finnish/Swedish
0260 Canad Fren French
0277 Danish Italian
0278 Finnish Japanese Eng.
0297 French Japanese Katak.
0280 Italian Portuguese
0281 Japan. Eng Spanish
0282 Portuguese Spanish Speak.
0284 Span Speak English UK
0285 English UK Old Hebrew
0892 OCR A Hebrew
0893 OCR B Farsi/Latin
0424 Hebrew Greek Old
0803 Hebrew Old Greek New
0420 Arabic Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old Turkish
0423 Greek Old Latin 2/ROECE
0875 Gr New Euro Yugoslavian
0871 Icelandic Multinational
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0256 Intern. 1
1112 Balt Mult
0924 Euro Lat-9
1122 Estonian
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
0500 Internat 5

120
 5250 Params

Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface’s current character set. This
operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface.

Active Char Set

Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.
• Secondary Set (factory default)
• Primary Set

Prt Partial Line

• Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer
to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
• Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through
standard TN5250 emulations. To access these features, send text commands
in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets
are available:
• Set 1. start code: <% (factory default)
stop code: >
• Set 2. start code:¬¬
stop code: $
• Set 3. start code: _%
stop code: _
• User Defined.

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII
character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for
the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes
for the User Defined option:
• Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
• Start Code 2 5F
• Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
• Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.

121
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Graphic Chek Err

Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action)
command.
• Enable (factory default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the
printer. If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the
printer will stop when a graphic error is detected.
• Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not
stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character
selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.

Graphic Chek Cod

Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable
character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40
through FE. The character becomes the printer default when:
• The printer is powered off and then powered on.
• An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.
• The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.
The value can be the following:
• 60 (factory default)
• 40 – F4

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This
allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of
left to right.
• Left to Right (factory default)
• Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.

Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
• Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override
operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),
characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the
information appearing on the message display may not match the data
stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable
option.
• Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

122
 5250 Params

Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as earlier generation line
matrix printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed.
• Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL
feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the
new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
• Enable.

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using an IBM host
interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the
printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be
truncated.
• 13.2 Inches (factory default)
• Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)

123
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)

* = Factory Default
1
EMULATION Indian Language Firmware
(from page 111)

LinePrinter+

Printer CPI/LPI Host Font Page Print Char.

Protocol Select Command Attributes Format Set

(see page 125) Select CPI Enable* (see page 125) (see page 125)
6.0 CPI 1 Ignore All
10.0 CPI* Ignore CPI
12.0 CPI Ignore LPI
13.3 CPI Ignore Unidir.
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
3.0 LPI 1
4.0 LPI 1
4.5 LPI 1
5.0 LPI 1
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
9.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
P/S Mode CPI
Changed*
Unchanged

Indian Reset Cmd Set Barcode Barcode

Option 1 CFG Ld Substitution x-offset Height

Indian Formatter Disable* Inactive* Disable* Disable*

Tall ASCII Font Power up config Active Enable Enable
Space Width Adjust Current config
Hindi Numeral Factory config

124
 * = Factory Default
1 Hidden when IPDS is active.
2
Indian Language Firmware
Printer
Protocol
(from page 124)

Active P-Series P-Series Serial Proprinter Epson

Protocol XQ Matrix XL FX

P-Series* (see page 147) (see page 153) (see page 155) (see page 160) (see page 163)
P-Series XQ
Serial Matrix
Proprinter XL
Epson FX

Font Attributes
(from page 124)

Typeface Prop. Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Text ASCII

Spacing Zero Position Compatible 2

Data Processing* Disable* Disable* Disable* Disable* Top of Line* Disable*

NLQ Enable Enable Forward Slant Enable Bottom of Line Enable
OCR-A Backward Slant
OCR-B
High Speed
NLQ Sans Serif
High Speed 100
NLQ 200
DP 200
High Speed 64
BARCODE 145
BARCODE 160
DP 144
High Speed 144

Page Format
(from page 124)

Form Form Margins Perforation

Length Width Skip 1

Abs. Length IN 1 Abs. Width IN 1 Left Margin 1 Disable*

11.0* inches 13.6* inches 0* columns 1/2 Inch
(0.1-24) (0.1-13.6) (0-369) 2/3 Inch
Abs. Length MM 1 Abs. Width MM 1 Right Margin 1 5/6 Inch
279.4* mm 345.4* mm 0* columns 1 inch
(0.1-609.6) (0.1-345.4) (0-369)
Funct. of Lines Function of CPI Bottom Margin
66* lines 136* characters 0* lines
(1-192) (1-272) (0-451)

125
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB)

EMULATION * = Factory Default

(from page 111)

LinePrinter+

Printer CPI/LPI Host Font

Protocol Select Command Attributes

Select CPI Enable Typeface DBCS ASCII Style

LQ-1600K 10.0 CPI* Ignore All LQ Normal*
12.0 CPI Ignore CPI Near LQ* Oversize
13.3 CPI Ignore LPI Normal OCRB
See page 129. 15.0 CPI Ignore Unidir* Hi-Speed Text Position
17.1 CPI Super Hi-Speed Bottom of Line*
20.0 CPI Ultra Hi-Speed Top of Line
Select LPI Styling Type Compressed Mode
6.0 LPI* SONG* Disable*
8.0 LPI High Density Enable
DBCS CPI Disable* DBCS Compressed
5.0 CPI Enable Disable*
6.0 CPI Prop. Spacing Enable
6.7 CPI* Disable*/Enable Font Scale
7.5 CPI Bold Print Standard*
Others CPI Disable*/Enable 16 x 24
Italic Print Encoding
Disable* Address Table*
Forward Slant UTF-8
Backward Slant Taller 15 CPI
Slashed Zero Disable*
Disable*/Enable Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode Horizontal Expnd
DBCS Mode* 24* pt size
ASCII Mode (24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size

Graphics Page Reset Cmd Error

Spd Up Format CFG Ld Handling

Normal* See page 137. Disable* Illegal Code Pt.

Enhanced Power up Config. Normal*
Turbo Current Config. As Space
Match Typeface Factory Config.

126
 LinePrinter
LinePrinterPlus
PlusEmulation
Emulation(H-Series
(H-SeriesHanzi
HanziBig5)
GB)

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi Big5)

EMULATION * = Factory Default

(from page 111)

LinePrinter+

Printer CPI/LPI Host Font

Protocol Select Command Attributes

Select CPI Enable Typeface DBCS ASCII Style

LQ-1600K 10.0 CPI* Ignore All LQ* Normal*
12.0 CPI Ignore CPI Near LQ Oversize
13.3 CPI Ignore LPI Normal OCRB
See page 129. 15.0 CPI Ignore Unidir* Hi-Speed Text Position
17.1 CPI Super Hi-Speed Bottom of Line*
20.0 CPI Ultra Hi-Speed Top of Line
Select LPI Styling Type Compressed Mode
6.0 LPI* MING* Disable*
8.0 LPI High Density Enable
DBCS CPI Disable* DBCS Compressed
5.0 CPI Enable Disable*
6.0 CPI Prop. Spacing Enable
6.7 CPI* Disable*/Enable Encoding
7.5 CPI Bold Print Address Table*
Others CPI Disable*/Enable UTF-8
Italic Print Taller 15 CPI
Disable* Disable*
Forward Slant Enable
Backward Slant Horizontal Expnd
Slashed Zero 24* pt size
Disable*/Enable (24 - 72) pt size
DBCS/ASCII Mode Vertical Expnd
DBCS Mode* 24* pt size
ASCII Mode (24 - 72) pt size

Graphics Page Reset Cmd Error

Spd Up Format CFG Ld Handling

Normal See page 137. Disable Illegal Code Pt.

Enhanced Power up Config. Normal
Turbo Current Config.* As Space*
Match Typeface* Factory Config. As Square

127
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji)

EMULATION * = Factory Default

(from page 111)

LinePrinter+

Printer CPI/LPI Host Font

Protocol Select Command Attributes

Select CPI Enable Typeface DBCS ASCII Style

LQ-1600K 10.0 CPI Ignore All LQ Normal*
12.0 CPI Ignore CPI Near LQ* Oversize
13.3 CPI Ignore LPI Normal OCRB
See page 129. 15.0 CPI* Ignore Unidir* Hi-Speed Text Position
17.1 CPI Super Hi-Speed Bottom of Line*
20.0 CPI Ultra Hi-Speed Top of Line
Select LPI Styling Type Compressed Mode
6.0 LPI Mincho* Disable*
8.0 LPI* High Density Enable
DBCS CPI Disable* DBCS Compressed
5.0 CPI Enable Disable*
6.0 CPI Prop. Spacing Enable
6.7 CPI Disable*/Enable Encoding
7.5 CPI* Bold Print Address Table*
Others CPI Disable*/Enable UTF-8
Italic Print Taller 15 CPI
Disable* Disable*
Forward Slant Enable
Backward Slant Horizontal Expnd
Slashed Zero 24* pt size
Disable*/Enable (24 - 72) pt size
DBCS/ASCII Mode Vertical Expnd
DBCS Mode* 24* pt size
ASCII Mode (24 - 72) pt size

Graphics Page Reset Cmd Error

Spd Up Format CFG Ld Handling

Normal* See page 137. Disable* Illegal Code Pt.

Enhanced Power up Config. Normal*
Turbo Current Config. As Space
Match Typeface Factory Config.

128
 LQ-1600K
LinePrinter Plus Emulation Emulation
(H-Series Kanji)

LQ-1600K Emulation

Printer * = Factory Default

Protocol 1
For Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS only

LQ-1600K
(from pages
126, 127, 128)

Define CR Autowrap Define LF Printer Character Set

Code Code Select

CR = CR* With LF+CR* LF = CR + LF* Disable* Standard Sets*

CR = CR + LF With CR LF = LF Enable Epson Set*
Disable ASCII (USA*)
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
IBM PC

20 CPI Alt Set 80-9F Currency AR3240

Condensed Sign 1 Compat.1

Enable* Printable* RMB Select* Disable*

Disable Control Code $ Select Enable

129
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.

Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
• LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.

Printer Select
• Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
• Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson® emulation.

130
 LQ-1600K
LinePrinter Plus Emulation Emulation
(H-Series Kanji)

20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
• Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
• Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
• Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

Currency Sign (for GB and Kanji)

• RMB Select (factory default). The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a RMB
“¥” character in DBCS mode. Default for GB.
• $ Select. The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a dollar “$” character in
DBCS mode. Default for Kanji.

AR3240 (for GB and Kanji)

• Disable (factory default). AR3240 emulation does not take effect. Default.
• Enable. AR3240 takes effect, SUB (0x1A) is used as another SFCC. The
listed commands will take effect and turn the extending table character
on.

131
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

EMULATION * = Factory Default

1
(from page 111) Hangul KSSM only.

LinePrinter+

Printer CPI/LPI Host Font

Protocol Select Command Attributes

KS* Select CPI1 Enable* Typeface DBCS ASCII Style

(see page 133.) 10.0 CPI* Ignore All LQ* Normal*
KSSM 12.0 CPI Ignore CPI Near LQ OCRB
(see page 135) 13.3 CPI Ignore LPI Normal Normal Thin
15.0 CPI Ignore Unidir Hi-Speed Text Position
17.1 CPI Ignore Pg. Fmt Super Hi-Speed Bottom of Line*
20.0 CPI Ultra Hi-Speed Top of Line
Select LPI Styling Type Encoding
6.0 LPI* Myungjo* Address Table*
8.0 LPI Gothic UTF-8
DBCS CPI High Density Taller 15 CPI 1
5.0 CPI Disable* Disable*
6.0 CPI* Enable Enable
6.7 CPI Bold Print Horizontal Expnd
7.5 CPI Disable*/Enable 24* pt size
8.5 CPI Italic Print (24 - 72) pt size
9.0 CPI Disable* Vertical Expnd
10.0 CPI Forward Slant 24* pt size
Others CPI Backward Slant (24 - 72) pt size
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode1
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode

Graphics Page Reset Cmd Error

Spd Up Format CFG Ld Handling

Normal* See page 137. Disable* Illegal Code Pt.

Enhanced Power up Config. Normal*
Turbo Current Config. As Space
Match Typeface Factory Config.

132
 KS Emulation
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

KS Emulation

Printer
Protocol

KS
(from page 132)

Define CR CR Bold Select Autowrap Define LF Printer Select

Code Code

CR = CR* Enable* With LF+CR* LF = CR + LF* Disable*

CR = CR + LF Disable With CR LF = LF Enable
Disable

Alt Set 80-9F Emulation

Extend

Control Code* Disable*

Printable Enable

Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.

CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
• Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together
with the text before CR.
• Disable. Normal CR function.

133
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
• LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.

Printer Select
• Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
• Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
• Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

Emulation Extend
• Disable (factory default). Does not select the extension command.
• Enable. Selects the extension command (ESC 4/ESC 5 to select/cancel
Italic Printing and ESC SP to select Intercharacter Spacing).

134
 KSSM Emulation
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

KSSM Emulation

Printer
Protocol

KSSM
(from page 132)

Character Define CR CR Bold Autowrap Define LF Printer Select

Sets Code Select Code

Standard Sets* CR = CR* Enable* With LF+CR* LF = CR + LF* Disable*

IBM PC* CR = CR + LF Disable With CR LF = LF Enable
Epson Set Disable

20 CPI Alt. Set 80-9F

Condensed

Enable* Control Code*

Disable Printable

Character Sets
This parameter selects a character set for the KSSM emulation.

CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
• Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together
with the text before CR.
• Disable. Normal CR function.

Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.

135
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
• LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.

Printer Select
• Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
• Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
• Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 cpi font will compress to 20 cpi.
• Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
• Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

136
 LinePrinter Page Format Submenu
Plus Emulation (H-Series)
(H-Series Hangul)

Page Format Submenu (H-Series)

Page Format * = Factory Default for Hanzi and Hangul printer

(from page 126, ** = Factory Default for Kanji printer
127, 128, 132)

Form Form Margins Perforation

Length Width Skip

Abs. Length IN Abs. Width IN Left Margin Disable*

11.0* inches 13.6* inches 0* columns 1/2 inch
08.5** inches (0.1-13.6) (0-369) 2/3 inch
(0.1-24) Abs. Width MM Right Margin 5/6 inch
Abs. Length MM 345.4* mm 0* columns 1 inch
279.4* mm (0.1-345.5) (0-369)
215.9** mm Funct. of CPI Bottom Margin
(0.1-609.6) 136* Characters 0* lines
Funct. of Lines 204** Characters (0-451)
66* Lines (1-272)
68** Lines
(1-192)

Printer Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information with ASCII products.
For H-Series Hanzi GB, Hanzi Big5, or Kanji LP+ printers, refer to the
LQ-1600K Programmer’s Reference Manual for details. For the H-Series
Hangul LP+ printer, refer to the KS or KSSM Programmer’s Reference
Manual for details.

CPI/LPI Select
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per
inch (lpi) values.

Host Command
This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being
acknowledged by the printer.
• Enable (factory default). All host commands are acknowledged by the
printer.
• Ignore All. All host commands are ignored by the printer.
• Ignore CPI. All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the
printer.
• Ignore LPI. All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.
• Ignore Unidir. All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored
by the printer.
• Ignore Pg. Fmt. All page format commands sent by the host are ignored
by the printer. This is applicable for H-Series Hangul LP+ printers only.

137
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Font Attributes

Typeface (ASCII)
NOTE: Not all firmware types have the entire list of typefaces.
• Data Processing (factory default). A general purpose font printing out at
120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary
with each cpi. For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets
must be selected for Indian characters to print.
• NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi
vertically. This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi.
For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets must be selected
for Indian characters to print.
• OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
• High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi
vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
• NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96
dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies
with the cpi.
• High Speed 100. A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and
48 dpi vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
• NLQ 200. This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then
be varied, but the width will not change.
• DP 200. This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72
vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi
can then be varied, but the width will not change.
• High Speed 64. This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to
10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
• BARCODE 145. This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally
and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
• BARCODE 160. This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally
and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 13 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.

138
 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

Typeface (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to select the typeface for printing in the emulation.
• LQ. Default value for Hanzi Big5/Hangul.
• Near LQ. Default value for Hanzi GB/Kanji printer.
• Normal
• Hi-Speed
• Super Hi-Speed
• Ultra Hi-Speed

Styling Typeface (H-Series)

• SONG. Only for Hanzi GB printer.
• MING. Only for Hanzi Big5 printer.
• Mincho. Only for Kanji printer.
• Myungjo, Gothic. Only for Hangul printer. Myungjo is the default value.

Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)

Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character. This
menu only works in ASCII mode and is not available for the H-Series Hangul
product.
• Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same
width. Each column in the printed text will line up.

• Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, which gives text a typeset appearance.

Bold Print
• Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
• Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.

139
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Italic Print
• Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
• Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
• Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.

Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
• Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
• Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)

• DBCS Mode (factory default). The printer is in DBCS mode. It can print
double-byte characters as well as a limited number of single-byte
characters.
• ASCII Mode. The printer is in ASCII mode. It can only print single-byte
characters.

DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the single-byte
alphanumeric characters in DBCS mode.
• Normal (factory default).
• Oversize. The alphanumeric characters will appear larger than normal
single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character “8” will
be changed to “8”.
• OCRB. The alphanumeric characters will print in OCRB style. It only
takes effect on LQ typeface for Hanzi/Kanji printer.
• Normal Thin. The alphanumeric characters will be slightly thinner
compared with Normal style. This is only applicable for Hangul printer.

140
 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

Text Position
Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to
Top-of-Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to
Bottom-of-Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi
line space. The following example shows both Top-of-Line and Bottom-of-Line
text positions:

Dot
Row
Top of Linespace 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 1
Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace 9
10
11
Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace12
Text Position
Text Position
Text Position
Text Position
Top-of-Line
Top of Line Bottom-of-Line
Bottom of Line

ASCII Compatible
Allows you to specify ASCII characters print position alignment. This option
affects device font characters only, and does not affect graphics or barcodes.
• Disable (factory default). The ASCII characters print position aligns
(horizontally) with Indian characters.
• Enable. The ASCII characters print position shifts up to align
(horizontally) with standard ASCII characters.
If Indian character sets, such as Hindi, Kannada, Gujarati or Tamil are
selected, the menu will automatically switch to Disable. Enable will not be
available for selection until non-Indian character sets are selected.
If the “Tall ASCII Font” option is available, the menu automatically switches to
Disable. Enable will not be available for selection until the Tall ASCII Font is
disabled.

Compressed Mode (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS
characters in ASCII mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. Prints out ASCII mode ASCII characters and half-width DBCS
characters.

141
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

DBCS Compressed (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS
characters in DBCS mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. Both the DBCS and ASCII characters will be printed as half-width
of their original size.

Font Scale (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the font size. It is
applicable for the H-Series GB printer.
• Standard (factory default). The character prints as 24 x 24 cell size.
• 16 x 24. The character prints as 16 x 24 cell size.

Encoding (H-Series)
• Address Table (factory default). Specifies the address table supported.
GB18030 is for Hanzi GB printer.
BIG5 (factory default), CNS, TCA, ETEN, IBM5550, TELETEXT,
BIG5+, BIG5E, and HKSCS are for Hanzi Big5 printer.
KSC5601 is for Hangul printer.
Shift-JIS is for Kanji printer.
• UTF-8. The printer takes in UTF-8 data stream and prints out according to
Unicode format.

Taller 15 CPI (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII characters as
15 CPI in ASCII mode.
• Disable (factory default). The characters in 15 CPI appear shorter than
other CPIs such as 10 CPI.
• Enable. The height of 15 CPI characters is the same as other CPIs such
as 10 CPI.

Horizontal Expnd (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify dot character horizontal expansion for
both ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.

Vertical Expnd (H-Series)

This parameter allows you to specify dot character vertical expansion for both
ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.

142
 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

Graphics Spd Up (H-Series)

This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on
the Enhanced/Turbo mode.
• Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics
resolution.
• Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Normal mode.
• Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Enhanced mode.
• Match Typeface. The input 180x180 dpi graphics resolution will drop-dot
to the resolution which matches the typeface selected.

Page Format

Form Length
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form length only displays as a function of
lines.

Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form width only displays as a function of
characters.

Margins
• Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
• Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
• Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.

Perforation Skip
• Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
• 1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, 1 inch. You may set up a skip-over margin of
1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1 inch. For example, a skip-over margin of
1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page.

143
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Print Char. Set

When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current
character set is printed.

Indian Option
• Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page,
and Data Page.
• Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without
composing.
• Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for
non-table format.
• Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for table-
formatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands
nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.
• Tall ASCII Font. The available options include Enable and Disable.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII
characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12,
and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
• Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian
character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not
with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the
character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 11 on page 145 shows the space width
adjustment value according to its typeface and CPI setting.

144
 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)

Table 11. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on

Indian Language Printers

Typeface CPI Space Width

6 20

10 12
12 10

Data Processing 13.3 9

15 8

17.1 7

20 6

6 30

10 18
12 15
Near Letter Quality
13.3 13

15 12

17.1 10

• Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi

numerals.
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected
configuration is loaded.
• Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded
when the reset command is executed.
• Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is executed.
• Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
• Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.

145
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Set Substitution
When this option is activated, the character set overlay in RAM is activated.
This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX. In
either case, a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active. If the
power-up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both
enabled, the character set overlay is automatically activated at power-up or
during a soft reset. See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual
for more information.

Barcode x-offset
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not
set to the origin.

Barcode Height
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable. If Barcode x-offset is enabled, the barcode height follows P5000
legacy barcode behavior.

Error Handling (H-Series)

This command determines the way illegal DBCS characters are processed:
• Normal (factory default). Will ignore illegal DBCS characters.
• As Space. Will insert two space characters (0X20, 0X20) when the data
stream contains the illegal DBCS character.
• As Square. Will insert a black square (0xAIBD) when the data stream
contains the illegal DBCS character. This is applicable for the Hanzi Big5
build only.

146
 P-Series Emulation

P-Series Emulation

Printer * = Factory Default

Protocol
(from page 125)

P-Series

Control Code Control Code Define CR Autowrap Overstrike Define LF

06 08 Code Code

8.0 LPI* Elongated* CR = CR* Wrap LF+CR* Enable* LF = CR + LF*

10.3 LPI Backspace CR = CR + LF Wrap CR Disable LF = LF
6.0 LPI Disable

P-Series VFU Select Alt. Set Character SFCC d PSeries Dbl FF valid
SFCC 80-9F Set Command High at TOF

1* EVFU* Control Code* (see page 150) Even dot plot* Normal* Enable*
(0-7F hex) DVFU Printable Double high P3/4/6/9 Compat Disable
CVFU
Disable

Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Control Code 08
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can
define the code to output the following character:
• Elongated (factory default).
• Backspace.

Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

147
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width, causing the excess
text to print on the next line.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
• Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike
printing slows down the printer.
• Disable. Turns off bold print.

Define LF Code
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with
each line feed command. The next print position is print position 1 of the
next line.
• LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.

P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
• ESC (hex 1B)
• SOH (hex 01)
• ETX (hex 03)
• CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)
• TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)
are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data
stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will
occur.

148
 P-Series Emulation

VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
• EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
• DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
• CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
• Disable. Disables all VFU processing.

Alt. Set 80-9F

Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex
9F as control codes or as printable characters. The options include:
• Control Code (factory default)
• Printable.

Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “P-Series Character Set Menu” on
page 150. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within
that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the
desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection
allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

SFCC d Command
• Even dot plot (factory default). This option interprets SFCC d Command
as even dot plot.
• Double High. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.

PSeries Dbl High

Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers.
• Normal (factory default). This is normal, double-high printing for current
model printers.
• P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers print two dot rows higher, this
option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match
the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).

FF Valid at TOF
• Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
• Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.

149
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

P-Series Character Set Menu

* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 147)

Active Char Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* See page 152. ASMO 449* Cyrillic 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
UTF-8 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets Sets

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

150
 P-Series Emulation

Indian Language Character Set Menu

* = Factory Default
Character Set 1 Indian Language firmware
(from page 147)

Active Char Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* See page 152. ASMO 449* Cyrillic 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
Hindi Sets 1 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
Tamil Sets 1 Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
Gujarati Sets 1 Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
Kannada Sets 1 Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
UTF-8 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc. Hindi Tamil

Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets1 Sets1

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi* ISCII* ISCII*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set PC-ISCII PC-ISCII
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi EA-ISCII EA-ISCII
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set TAM_Tamil’99
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish TAB_Tamil’00
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish Gujarati Kannada
Code Page 853 Sets1 Sets1
INFO Turkish
ISCII* ISCII*
Win. CP 1254
PC-ISCII PC-ISCII
Code Page 857
EA-ISCII EA-ISCII
Azeri

NOTE: The Indian Language Character Set Menu applies to P-Series and all
LinePrinter+ protocols.

151
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Character Set
(P-Series)
(from page 147)

Standard
Sets

Active IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult. CP 858

Std Sets EURO
IBM PC* Primary Subset ASCII (USA)* Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
Multinational ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC ASCII (USA)* French
EMCA Latin 1 French German German
DEC Multi. German Swedish English
CP 858 EURO English Danish Norw./Danish
Danish Norwegian Swedish
Swedish Finnish Italian
Italian English Spanish
Spanish Dutch Japanese
Japanese French French
French Canadian Spanish Canadian
Latin American Italian Dutch
Norwegian Turkish Finnish
Danish II Japanese Swiss
Spanish II Extended Subset
Latin Am II Multinational*
Extended Subset Barcode 10 CPI
Code Page 437* Mult. DP 10 CPI
Code Page 850 Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI

152
 P-Series XQ Emulation

P-Series XQ Emulation

* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)

P-Series
XQ

Control Code Define CR Autowrap Define LF Compressed Elong/Alt.

06 Code Code Print Font

8.0 LPI* CR = CR* With LF+CR* LF = CR + LF* char 01 SOH* Elng=BS Font=SO*
10.3 LPI CR = CR + LF With CR LF = LF char 03 ETX Elng=SO Font=BS
6.0 LPI Disable char 09 HT

HS Print VFU Select Upr. Case Slew

Select Relative

char 02 STX* EVFU* Disable* 1 to 15 lines*

char 03 ETX DVFU Enable 1 to 16 lines
char 09 HT CVFU
Disable

Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

153
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Define LF Code
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with
each line feed command received. The next print position is print position
1 of the next line.
• LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.

Compressed Print
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
• Char 01 SOH (factory default)
• Char 03 ETX
• Char 09 HT

Elong/Alt. Font
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and
extended character set.
• Elng=BS Font=SO (factory default)
• Elng=SO Font=BS

HS Print (High Speed Print)

Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
• Char 02 STX (factory default)
• Char 03 ETX
• Char 09 HT

VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. The choices are:
• EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
• DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
• CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
• Disable. Disables all VFU processing.

154
 Serial Matrix Emulation

Upr. Case Select

Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the
host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.
• Disable (factory default). Prints lowercase characters received from the
host computer as lowercase, and prints uppercase characters received
from the computer as uppercase.
• Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters
received from the computer print as uppercase.

Slew Relative
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew
Relative command is received. The options include:
• 1-15 Lines
• 1-16 Lines (factory default)

Serial Matrix Emulation

* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)

Serial
Matrix

Control Code Define CR Autowrap Overstrike Define LF Printer

06 Code Code Select

8.0 LPI* CR = CR* With LF+CR* Enable* LF = LF* Disable*

10.3 LPI CR = CR + LF With CR Disable LF = CR + LF Enable
6.0 LPI Disable

Alt. Set Character ESC d

80-9F Set command

Control Code* (see page 158) Even dot plot*

Printable Double high

155
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
• Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike
printing slows down the printer.
• Disable. Turns off bold print.

Define LF Code
• LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return
when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the
current print position of the next line.
• LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.

Printer Select
• Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
• Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

156
 Serial Matrix Emulation

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
• Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “Serial Matrix Character Set Menu”
on page 158. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading
(such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set
within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and
the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are
shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

ESC d command
• Even dot plot (factory default). Interprets the ESC d command as even
dot plot.
• Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this
option for backward compatibility.

157
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Serial Matrix Character Set Menu

* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 155) Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.

Active Char Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* (see page 159) ASMO 449* Cyrillic 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
UTF-8 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets Sets

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

158
 Serial Matrix Emulation

Character Set
(Serial)
(from page 158)

Standard
Sets*

IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult. CP 858

EURO
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)* Primary Subset ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC ASCII (USA)* French
French German German
German Swedish English
English Danish Norw./Danish
Danish Norwegian Swedish
Swedish Finnish Italian
Italian English Spanish
Spanish Dutch Japanese
Japanese French French
French Canadian Spanish Canadian
Latin American Italian Dutch
Norwegian Turkish Finnish
Danish II Japanese Swiss
Spanish II Extended Subset
Latin Am II Multinational*
Extended Subset Barcode 10 CPI
Code Page 437* Mult. DP 10 CPI
Code Page 850 Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI

159
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Proprinter XL Emulation

Printer * = Factory Default

Protocol
(from page 125)

Proprinter
XL

Define CR Autowrap Define LF FF valid at Character Alt. Char 20 CPI

Code Code TOF Set Set Condensed

CR = CR* With LF+CR* LF = LF* Enable* (see page 162) Set 1* Enable*
CR = CR + LF With CR LF = CR + LF Disable Set 2 Disable
Disable

Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Autowrap LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code
• LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return
when a Line Feed command is received. The next print position will be
the current print position of the next line.
• LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.

160
 Proprinter XL Emulation

FF Valid at TOF
• Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
• Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.

Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in “Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu” on
page 162. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within
that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the
desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection
allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Alt. Char Set

This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should
be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.
• Set 1 (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F as a control code.
• Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15,
and 80 through 9F.

20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount
of information on a page.
• Enable (factory default). Prints characters about 60 percent the width of
normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host
computer.
• Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.

161
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu

* = Factory Default
Character Set
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
(from page 160)

Active Char Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* Active Std Sets ASMO 449* Cyrillic 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets Code Page 437* ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets Code Page 850 ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets OCR-A ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets OCR-B MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets Multinational MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets CP 858 EURO Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets Multinational Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
UTF-8 ASCII (USA)* CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
EBCDIC Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets Sets

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

162
 Epson FX Emulation

Epson FX Emulation

* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)

Epson FX

Define CR Autowrap Define LF Printer Character 20 CPI Alt. Set

Code Code Select Set Condensed 80-9F

CR = CR* With LF+CR* LF = LF* Disable* (see page 165) Enable* Control Code*
CR = CR + LF With CR LF = CR + LF Enable Disable Printable
Disable

Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host
computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
• LF = LF (factory default). Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.
• LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.

163
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Printer Select
• Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
• Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in
“Epson FX Character Set Menu” on page 165.
NOTE: When OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu (page 124)
is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as
European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that
group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired
set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows
printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in
the Character Sets Reference Manual.

20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount
of information on a page.
• Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
• Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.

Alt. Set 80-9F

• Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
• Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

164
 Epson FX Emulation

Epson FX Character Set Menu

* = Factory Default
Character Set
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
(from page 163)

Active Char Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* Active Std Sets ASMO 449* Cyrillic 866* Latin 2 8859-2* DEC 256 Greek*
Arabic Sets Epson Set * ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek
Cyrillic Sets OCR-A ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3
European Sets OCR-B ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky ABY Greek
Greek Sets Multinational MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek
Hebrew Sets Code Page 850 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek
Turkish Sets CP 850 EURO Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851
Misc. Sets IBM PC Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437
UTF-8 Epson Set CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859-7
ASCII (USA)* Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1 Win. CP 1253
French Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9 Greek 813 EURO
German Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15 Greek 869 EURO
English Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
Danish I Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Swedish Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Italian Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
Spanish I 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Japanese Lith. CP 773
Norwegian Serbo Croatic 1
Danish II Serbo Croatic 2
Spanish II CP 774
Latin Am I CP 775
French Canadian ISO 8859-4
Latin Am II
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC

Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets

Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*

Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

165
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

ANSI Emulation

* Factory Default

EMULATION
(from page 111)

44/48XX-
ANSI

CPI/LPI Font Page Define CR Autowrap Define LF

Select Attributes Format Code Code

Select CPI (see page 167) (see page 167) CR = CR* With LF+CR* LF = CR + LF*
10.0* CPI CR = CR + LF With CR LF = LF
12.0 CPI Disable
13.3. CPI
15.0 CPI
16.7 CPI
17.1 CPI
Select LPI
6.0* LPI
8.0 LPI
3.0 LPI
4.0 LPI

Character Printer ESC c Reset Cmd Received Received

Set Select Sequence CFG Ld CR DEL

(see page 167) ON=DC1/OFF=DC3* Enable* Disable* Observe* Observe*

Disable Disable Power up config Ignore Ignore
Current config
Factory config

Private Pos. on BC Check Barcode PUM Truncate PI

Mode BC/OvrSz Digit darkmode Default Slew

Set 2* Set to top* by host* Enable* Decipoints* Truncate at TOF*

Set 1 Set to bottom by printer Disable Lines/columns Disable

ETX/ACK

Disable*
Immediate
After Print

166
 ANSI Emulation

* = Factory Default

Font Attributes
(from page 166)

Typeface Prop. Bold Print Slashed

Spacing Zero

Data Processing* Disable* Disable* Disable*

Gothic NLQ Enable Enable Enable
Char. Graphics
High Speed
Italics NLQ
Courier NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B

Character Set
(from page 166)

Latin 1 8859-1* Latin 9 8859-15

Cyrillic 8859-5 DEC 256 Greek
IBM PC-2 CP 437 Turkish CP 857
IBM PC-2 CP 850 USA
Page Format
Slavic CP 852 German
(from page 166)
Cyrillic CP 855 French A
Fr. Can. CP 863 French B
Russian CP 866 French Canadian
Greek CP 851 Dutch Netherlds
Margins Form Form Width
Turkish CP 853 Italian
Length
Portug. CP 860 United Kingdom
Left Margin Funct. of lines Function of CPI Arabic CP 864 Spanish
0 columns* 66 lines* 136 Characters* Nordic CP 865 Danish/Norw. A
(0-369) (1-192) (1-272) Latin 2 8859-2 Danish/Norw. B
Right Margin Latin 3 8859-3 Danish/Norw. C
0 columns* Latin 4 8859-4 Danish/Norw. D
(0-369) Lat. Ara. 8859-6 Swed./Finnish A
Top Margin Lat. Gre. 8859-7 Swed./Finnish B
0 lines* Lat. Heb. 8859-8 Swed./Finnish C
(0-451) Latin 5 8859-9 Swed./Finnish D
Bottom Margin Turkish2 CP 867 Swiss
0 lines* Pol. Maz. CP 8576 USA
(0-451) Turkish CP 8577 Yugoslavian
Greek CP 8573 United Kingdm A
Italian CP 23 Turkish
Spanish CP 24 Greek
DEC Mult.
Roman 8

167
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

CPI/LPI Select
Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing.
The number of characters per inch can range from 10.0 through 17.1. The
number of lines per inch can range from 3.0 through 8.0.

Font Attributes

Typeface
Choose a typeface from the available options.

Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)

Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
• Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same
width. Each column in the printed text will line up.

• Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.

Bold Print
• Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
• Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.

Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
• Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
• Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

168
 ANSI Emulation

Page Format

Margins
• Left Margin. Defines where the first print column is located. The left
margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the
form.
• Right Margin. Defines where the last print column is located. The right
margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the
form.
• Top Margin. Defines the location of the first print line on the page. The
top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form's
position.
• Bottom Margin. Defines the location of the last print line on the page.
The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of
the form's position.

Form Length
Specifies the form length in lines. The maximum form length in lines depends
on the current LPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form length in inches
multiplied by the current LPI setting. For example, at 6 LPI the maximum form
length is 6 LPI x 24 inches = 144 lines.
Only valid form length values will be accepted. If you select a length that is
larger than the maximum length for the current LPI, the maximum length will
be used. If you need a longer page length, you must first change the LPI.

IMPORTANT If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI, the effective
page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new
LPI.
NOTE: Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length
overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel.

Form Width
Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272. The
maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting; it is
equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI
setting.
Only valid form width values will be accepted. If a width is selected that is
larger than the maximum width for the current CPI, then the maximum width
will be used. If a larger width value is desired, then the CPI value must be
changed first.

169
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Table 12 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a
given Characters Per Inch (CPI) setting.

IMPORTANT If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed, the
effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in
characters divided by the new CPI.

Table 12. Form Width

Maximum Form Width

CPI Setting
(in characters)

10.0 136

12.0 163

13.3 181
15.0 204

16.7 227

17.1 272

Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). No extra line feeds are inserted.
• CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Autowrap
Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width
setting.
• With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the form width.
• With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
• Disable . Discards any data past the form width.

170
 ANSI Emulation

Define LF Code
Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A)
from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer
receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code (hex 0D) into
the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is
required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
• LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra carriage return with each
line feed.
• LF = LF. Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.

Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation. Note that
when 0876 OCR-A or 0877 OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Printer Select
• ON = DC1/OFF = DC3 (factory default). Disables the printer when a DC1
control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control
code is received.
• Disable. Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes.

ESC c Sequence
• Enable (factory default). An ESC c code received from the host resets the
printer parameters to the factory defaults.
• Disable. An ESC c code received from the host is ignored.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected
configuration will be loaded.
• Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded
when the reset command is executed.
• Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is executed.
• Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
• Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.

Received CR
• Observe (factory default). A CR code received from the host is handled
as a carriage return.
• Ignore. A CR code received from the host is ignored.

171
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Received DEL
• Observe (factory default). A DEL code received from the host is handled
as a Delete command.
• Ignore. A DEL code received from the host is ignored.

Private Mode
Determines the default type of character set (Set 1 or Set 2). This can also be
set by ESC sequences ESC [>5h and ESC [>5l. Refer to these descriptions in
the ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual for further details.

Pos. on BC/OvrSz
• Set to top (factory default). The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes
or oversized characters after they are printed. This allows printing on the
same line.
• Set to bottom. The printer will continue printing without backing up.

BC Check Digit
• By host (factory default). The host calculates the barcode check digit and
sends it along with the barcode. The check digit is not verified by the
printer but printed as it was received.
• By printer. The barcode is sent without the check digit, and the printer
calculates and adds it in.

Barcode Darkmode
• Enable (factory default). The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution.
• Disable. The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher
speed.

PUM Default
This is the Unit of Measure (UOM) as it is used within the ANSI emulation.
Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs:
• Decipoints (factory default). A unit of 1/720 inch
• Lines or columns. Uses the current LPI and CPI values.
The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting.

Truncate PI Slew
• Truncate at TOF (factory default). The slew is terminated when the next
Top-of-Form is reached. (This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only.)
• Disable. PI slews will be completed independent of their length.

172
 IGP/PGL Emulation

ETX/ACK
End of Text/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communication to the
printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text
(ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it acknowledges the
ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.
• Disable (factory default)
• Immediate
• Afterprint

IGP/PGL Emulation
The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor
(IGP) for the line matrix family of printers. It is based upon, and is compatible
with, the IGP-100/200/400 board using the PGL. The IGP graphics
processing features are detailed below.

Features
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing
time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-
selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered
when the form is created), be overlaid onto the form (positioned in a specific
location after the form is created), or can be dynamically merged with the
form.
Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of
barcodes is available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state USPS Intelligent
Mail, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/
UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, Datamatrix, and
PDF417. UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add-on data.
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17,
and 20 characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white
characters on a dark background.

173
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.

Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a
specified reference point.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets,
each 96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own
character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also
containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.

Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel

You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by
control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be
offline to enter the configuration structure.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another
level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure
the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements.

IMPORTANT BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see
all of the current settings.

174
 IGP/PGL Submenu

IGP/PGL Submenu

* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)

IGP/PGL

Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Select

Code Code SFCC Range Font

CR = CR* LF = LF* Disable* 7E* 16* Disable* (see page 184)

CR = CR + LF LF = CR + LF Enable 1-FF 15 Enable

Slash 0 Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Forms Power On Ext Execute
Uppercase Prefix Handling IGP/PGL Copy

Disable* 6.0* Disable* Enable* Disable* Enable* Disable*

Enable 8.0 Enable Disable Auto Eject Disable Enable
9.0 Auto TOF
10.0

Barcode Host Form Var Form Var Form Compressed Ignore

Options Length Adjust Type CPI Char

(see page 178) Disable* 00.0 inches* Add Nothing* Disable* Ignore Mode
Enable (00.0 – 03.0 inches) Add; 0 Light Font Disable*
Add; X Dark Font Enable
Select Char
0*
(0-255)

Compatbl. Expanded Scalable True Form Printer PI Print

Mode Font Size Slew Line Quality

None* Scalable* Normal* Enable* Enable* Data Processing*

MVP Block Block Disable Disable High
L150 Alt Block 1 Best
P3000 Alt Block 2
P6000
P9000

Power-on Trunc Dyn Error

S-Mode Data Report

0* Disable* On*
(0 - 5) Enable Debug Mode
Fault
Host
Off

175
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Define CR (Carriage Return) Code

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used
only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer.
• CR = CR (factory default). Does not perform a line feed. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the current line.
• CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next line.

Define LF (Line Feed) Code

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
• LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return.
The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
• LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
• Disable (factory default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until
a CR or CR + LF is received.
• Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.

PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes
that the following data is a PGL command.

PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
• 16 (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
• 15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.

CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
• Disable (factory default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are
not followed by line feeds.
• Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.

176
 IGP/PGL Submenu

Select Font
Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
PGL. Refer to “IGP/PGL Font Set Menu” on page 184. for available
selections.

Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.
• Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
• Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. The
options are:
• 6.0 (factory default)
• 8.0
• 9.0
• 10.0

Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
• Disable (factory default). The printer will print text in upper and
lowercase.
• Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.

Skip Cmd Prefix

This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL
command is received.
• Enable (factory default). The printer ignores all data on the current line
before an IGP command.
• Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP
command.

Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:
• Disable (factory default). No effect.
• Auto Eject. Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out
the last page.
• Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of each form to
the next top of form.

177
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Power On IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer
is powered on.
• Enable (factory default). The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered
on. (The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
• Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)

Ext Execute Copy

• Disable (factory default). Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed
if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is
specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100
compatible.)
• Enable. Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form
Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case, the
exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for the Form
Count. However, incremental data is not incremented since the page that
is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed on a separate
page.

Barcode * = Factory Default

Options
(from page 175)

UPC Optimized I-2/5 AI 00 Select SO User-Def C39

Descenders Ratio Selection Spaces Char Ratio Compatbl.

Always* Disable* Leading Zero* Disable* 14* Enable* Disable*

Never Enable Trailing Space Enable (0-255) Disable Enable
Only with PDF X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD

Barcode Options
The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode
printing.

UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human
readable data is not present in the UPC/EAN barcodes.
• Always (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
• Never. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no
human readable data.
• Only with PDF. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only
when the PDF command is present.

178
 IGP/PGL Submenu

Optimized Ratio
This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including
Code 39 and I-2/5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-X00 printers.
• Disable (factory default). Use standard barcode ratios.
• Enable. Select the alternate barcode ratios.

I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.
Usually, if I-2/5 barcodes have an odd number of digits, a leading zero is
inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00 customization
gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode
instead.
• Leading Zero (factory default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the
printable data field.
• Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the printable data field
and a zero is encoded with the corresponding space in the end of the
barcode.
• X2 DPD. When selected, an I-2/5 barcode with an X2 magnification will
use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for
compatibility issues.
• Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of
the default modulo 10 check digit.

AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
• Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
• Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.

Select SO Char
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place
of SO (Shift Out) as the control code. This allows access for the alternate set
of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes
in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.

User-Def Ratio
• Enable (factory default). User-defined ratios are accepted for barcodes.
• Disable. User-defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used
in its place.

179
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new.
• Disable (factory default) Uses the current way of decoding.
• Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.

Host Form Length

Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command
changes the form length designated in the LP+ menu (see “LinePrinter Plus
Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)” on page 124) when the form is printed
by the EXECUTE command.
• Disable (factory default). The LP+ form length is unaffected by the form
being printed.
• Enable. The LP+ form length changes to match the length of the PGL
form being printed.

Var Form Adjust

(Ranges from 0 - 30). Default is 0. This menu value is tenths of inches. The
value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that
have variable form lengths. Variable length forms are forms that are defined
by using a “;0” in the CREATE statement: ~CREATE;FORM;0. Variable form
lengths are defined by the contents within the form - the form is only as long
as necessary to print the form. Changing this menu value adds additional
lengths to the form (in tenths of inches). Again, this only applies to forms that
use the “;0” variable length forms.

Var Form Type

This menu option applies only to the host command, CREATE;NAME or
CREATE;NAME;DISK. The host command CREATE;NAME followed by ;0, ;X
or a form length number will always override the menu option.
• Add Nothing (factory default). No action.
• Add; 0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed
element. Same as CREATE;NAME;0.
• Add; X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page
length.

Compressed CPI
This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter)
for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character.
• Disable (factory default). The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi
font.
• Light Font. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.
• Dark Font. Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with
the IGP-X00 printers.

180
 IGP/PGL Submenu

Ignore Char
• Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under
the Select Character menu.
• Disable (factory default). The PGL does not ignore any characters.
• Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select
Character menu.
• Select Char
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the
host.

Compatbl. Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP
with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select the “None” option. Selecting
this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.
When replacing an older product operating with an existing application,
especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands, you may need to
select a compatibility mode. In this case, select the printer model number
option that most closely matches the printer being replaced. The Compatibility
Mode options include:
• None (factory default)
• MVP
• L150
• P3000
• P6000
• P9000

Expanded Font
This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select:
• Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded
edges.
• Block. These are block characters compatible with the
IGP-X00 printers.
• Alt Block 1 / Alt Block 2. Reserved block sets used only for compatibility
purposes.

Scalable Size
• Normal (factory default). Controls the size of scalable characters to be
either normal size (as set by the user) or adjusted to match the size of
block fonts.
• Block. Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block
font alternative.

181
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

True Form Slew

This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE
command. Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option
enabled.
• Enable (factory default). Form length is accurate according to the form
length parameter in the CREATE command.
• Disable. Form length is IGP-X00 compatible when using PMODE.

Printer PI Line
This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the
form.
• Enable (factory default). Send the PI instructions to the printer
(LinePrinter Plus) during form slew. This is IGP-X00 compatible.
• Disable. Do not send PI instructions to the printer. LFs are sent instead.

Print Quality
• Data Processing (factory default). The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi
and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and
dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes. This mode should be set if you
want the highest speed.
• High. The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi, but all alphanumerics and
barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode.
• Best. The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode, which
produces a higher resolution, better-looking print image.

Power-on S-Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP
with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select “0,” the default option.
Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this
manual.
Power on S-Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at power-
up. The default is 0 (disabled, no power-on mode). To use this feature, select
a mode from 1 through 5, which puts IGP/PGL in an SMODE state according
to the compatibility mode set. If the compatibility mode set is None, then MVP
is assumed by default.
For more information, see the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.

182
 IGP/PGL Submenu

Trunc Dyn Data

This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the
maximum data length specified in Create Mode.
• Disable (factory default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data
length, an error will report.
• Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data
truncates.

Error Report
Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.
• On (factory default). Form boundary error checking reported. Any
element which falls off the current page is reported as an error.
• Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is
defined in Create Form mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed
along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if
there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.
• Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed and the message “IGP/
PGL ERROR” appears on the printer front panel. The printer then stops
printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the printer can
resume normal operation.
• Host. When an error occurs, the error message is sent back to the host.
• Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they
are beyond the page boundaries.

Select Font
Allows you to choose from various character sets, including IGP/PGL
Standard sets, 256 character multinational sets, and UTF-8 encoded
Unicode™.

183
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

IGP/PGL Font Set Menu

Select Font * = Factory Default

(from page 175)

Active Font Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* 0) ASCII* ASMO 449* Code Page 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets 1) German ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets 2) Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets 3) Danish ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets 4) Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets 5) Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets 6) English Sakr CP714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets 7) Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
UTF-8 8) French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
9) Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
10) Italian Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
11) Turkish Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
12) CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
13) CP 850 Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
14-15) Reserved Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
16-23) Dwn Overlay Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
24-31) User Def. 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets Sets

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

184
 IGP/VGL Emulation

IGP/VGL Emulation
Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP)
software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer. The IGP Code V
emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces
online forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics
processing features are detailed below.

Features
OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all
graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and
processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal,
solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special
alphanumeric print features.
Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with
standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available
barcodes are Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and
C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state
USPS Intelligent Mail, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail,
and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction. A
dark print mode is included for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC
barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90,
rotated 180, or rotated 270 degrees.
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous
range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed
print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 (cpi), permitting up to
170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of
print and shading features, which provides a “customized” appearance for
forms, reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV®, GS-
Mark, UL®, and CSA® symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL,
and you can also define custom symbols.
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing
white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded
background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing
may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a
specified reference point.
Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.
Based on the Multinational Character Set, you can create your own character
sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.

185
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel

You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by
control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be
offline to enter the configuration structure.

IMPORTANT BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see
all of the current settings.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another
level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely.

IGP/VGL Submenu

* = Factory Default

EMULATION
(from page 111)

IGP/VGL

SFCC & LPI Graphics Error Ignore/DB8

Pwrup Options Handling Setup

VGL SFCC 6* (see page 187) Error Msgs Ignore Chars

5E* 7 Enable* Disable*
(11-FF hex) 8 Disable Char 1
Power-up ^X 9 Error Markers Char 2
Disable* 10 Enable* Char 1&2
Enable Disable Ignore Ch#1
Power-up ^F Offpage Errors 0* (0-255)
Disable* Disable* Ignore Ch#2
Enable Enable 0* (0-255)
Power-up ^PY Barcode Errors Data Bit 8
Disable* Enable* Enable*
Enable Disable Disable

Font Set PI Control Prt to

Emulate

(see page 196) Printer PI Disable*

Disable* MVP/MVP 150B
Enable L150
Host PI P3040
Disable* P6000
Enable P9000
Max PI 16
Enable*
Disable

186
 IGP/VGL Submenu

IGP/VGL Graphics Options Submenu

* = Factory Default
Graphics
Options
(from page 186)

Slash 0 Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert Absorb After

Rotated Alpha 1/10 ^PY

Disable* Disable* Disable* Enable* Disable* Absorb Motion*

Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Absorb All
Disable

UPC Rot. Char Ignore Midline PY Print Expanded

Descenders Size Spaces Quality Font

Enable* Adjusted* Disable* Disable* Data Processing* Scalable*

Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable High Block

LP+ Font MSI Check I25 AI 00 Width Limit Absorb After

Digit Selection Spaces ^PN

Disable* Print* I25 Odd Data* Disable* Disable* Disable*

Enable Don’t Print Leading Zero Enable Enable Enable
Check Digit
Convert Alpha
Disable*
Enable

IGP110 Auto FF PDF Size C128 Mode C39 Ignore ^Lxx

Compatbl. at ^PN Comp. Comp Compatbl. Cmd.

Disable* Disable* Disable* Disable* Disable* Disable*

Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

SFCC & Pwrup

This option has several sub-options which define the SFCC and power-up
configuration used with VGL.

VGL SFCC
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value 5E.
Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC.

187
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Power Up ^X
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored
until a ^A command is received.
Power Up ^F
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the VGL
to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below hex 20
sent from the host.
Power Up ^PY
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.

LPI
The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6
inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.

Graphics Options
The following are several options which configure printing output.

Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
• Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
• Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

Ignore Dots
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only
1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.

Append Rotated
• Disable (factory default). Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as
separate elements.
• Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.

188
 IGP/VGL Submenu

Truncate Alpha
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right
side of the form. The options include:
• Enable (factory default)
• Disable

True Vert 1/10

• Disable (factory default). A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as
7/72 of an inch. The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For
example, a one-inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that
have the same value are identical in length.
• Enable. A vertical 1/10 inch parameter is used as 1/10 inch. Rounding
occurs to the nearest 1/72 inch. This can cause vertical moves that have
the same value to differ by ± 1/72 inch.

Absorb After ^PY

• Absorb Motion (factory default). The first paper motion following a ^PY
command is ignored.
• Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host
generated motion terminator is detected.
• Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to
the printer and result in paper motion.

UPC Descenders
• Enable (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
• Disable. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no
human readable data.

Rot. Char Size

• Adjusted (factory default). Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise),
expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character
with the same size parameters.
• Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters are the same size as
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.

Ignore Spaces
• Disable (factory default). Trailing spaces are not deleted from the last
alphanumeric element in a graphics pass.
• Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from the last alphanumeric element
in a graphics pass.

189
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Midline PY (includes ^PN)

• Disable (factory default). The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY,
must be the first three characters of a line.
• Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.

Print Quality
• Data Processing (factory default). ALPHA text and barcodes are printed
in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi. This mode should be set if the highest
speed is desired.
• High. ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at
120 x 72 dpi.

Expanded Font
• Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded
edges.
• Block. These are block characters compatible with IGP-X10 printers.

LP+ Font
• Disable (factory default). The IGP/VGL uses its default half-dot font,
which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP+ at 12,
13, 15 and 17 cpi.
• Enable. The IGP/VGL uses the same font as used by LP+ at all cpi.

MSI Check Digit

• Print (factory default). The check digit is appended at the end of the
printable data field for MSI barcodes.
• Don't Print. The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print.

I25 Selection
• I25 Odd Data (factory default). When an odd number of data is provided,
the default setting, Leading Zero, will add a zero to the beginning of the
bar code data. The setting, Check Digit, will add a check digit to the end
of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data.
• Convert Alpha. Disable is the default. When enabled, each non-digit I25
bar code character will convert to “0.”
NOTE: If you use an Interleaved 2/5 barcode that automatically adds the
check digit (type code k or l, IBARC type code INT2/5CD or INT2/
5CDA), the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is
set.

190
 IGP/VGL Submenu

AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
• Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
• Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.

Width Limit
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. The system will limit the length and width for expanded
characters to a limit shown in Table 13, which displays the maximum
width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0
through 4.0 inches).

Table 13. Width Limit Table

Max. Width Max. Width
Height Param. Height Param.
Allowed Allowed
00 99 21 51
01 99 22 53
02 3 23 56
03 6 24 58
04 8 25 61
05 11 26 63
06 13 27 66
07 16 28 68
08 18 29 71
09 21 30 73
10 23 31 76
11 26 32 78
12 28 33 81
13 31 34 83
14 33 35 86
15 36 36 88
16 38 37 91
17 41 38 93
18 43 39 96
19 46 40 98
20 48

Absorb After ^PN

• Disable (factory default). All line terminators that follow the ^PN
command are sent to the printer and processed.
• Enable. The first motion line terminator that follows the ^PN command is
ignored.

191
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

IGP110 Compatbl.
This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP-10 with respect to
certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as
described in this manual.
• Disable (factory default). The IGP does not emulate the IGP-10 mode.
• Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-10 version.

Auto FF at ^PN
• Disable (factory default). A form feed will not be generated automatically
when the ^PN command is encountered.
• Enable. A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of
the next form when the ^PN command is encountered and when the
current vertical position is not at top of form.

PDF Size Comp.

This option is for compatibility of the font size of the barcode printable data
field on the old build.
• Disable (factory default). Uses the normal font size.
• Enable. Matches the font size of the old build.

C128 Mode Comp

The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch.
• Disable (factory default). Uses auto mode switch.
• Enable. Matches the old build on the auto mode switch.

C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new.
• Disable (disable). Uses the current way of decoding.
• Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.

Ignore ^Lxx Cmd.

• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. The ^Lxx command will always be ignored.

192
 IGP/VGL Submenu

Error Handling
Following are several options which define how errors are reported.

Error Msgs
• Enable (factory default). Command syntax is checked and error
messages printed when command parameters are incorrect.
• Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.

Error Markers
• Enable (factory default). Prints the following error markers for those
elements that print beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an
error other than an off-page error.

Offpage Errors
• Disable (factory default). Does not report errors for elements that start or
end beyond the right edge of the page.
• Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right
edge of the page.

Barcode Errors
• Enable (factory default). An error message will print when invalid barcode
data is encountered.
• Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data; the barcode
will be skipped.
NOTE: When the Barcode Errors option is disabled, the VGL emulation will
try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra
digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum
data length requirements for some barcodes. Not all errors will be
corrected.

Ignore / DB8 Setup

Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8.

Ignore Chars
• Disable (factory default). Character filtering is not enabled.
• Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#1” to
specify character 1.
• Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#2” to
specify character 2.
• Char 1 & 2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore
CH#1” and “Ignore CH#2” to specify values for these characters.

193
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Ignore CH#1
Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values
are from 0 through 255.

Ignore CH#2
Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values
are from 0 through 255.

Data Bit 8
• Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host to
printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF
range can be accessed.
• Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, Data Bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable Data Bit 8, and enable the Host
PI configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).
NOTE: Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as Data Bit 8, Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used,
Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you
cannot access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to
access characters in the hex 80-FF range, Data Bit 8 must be
enabled.

Font Set
The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
VGL. Refer to “IGP/VGL Font Set Menu” on page 196 for available selections.

PI Control

Printer PI
• Disable (factory default). The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI
line disabled.
• Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.

Host PI
• Disable (factory default). The host does not send PI signals.
• Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.

194
 IGP/VGL Submenu

Max PI 16
• Enable (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
• Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will
always move 1 line.

Prt To Emulate
This option allows you to select an earlier model printer/IGP board
combination to emulate. When a printer emulation is selected, the scaling
command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density
as the printer emulation chosen. Five types of printers can be emulated: MVP
or MVP 150B, L150, P3040, P6000, and P9000. Once a printer emulation is
selected, it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer
emulation is selected. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option, which insures the printer behaves as described in this
manual. The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors
of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL
functionality. Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped
with high resolution hammer bank tips (12 mil).

195
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

IGP/VGL Font Set Menu

* = Factory Default

Font Set
(from page 186)

Active Font Standard Arabic Cyrillic European

Set Sets Sets Sets Sets

Standard Sets* 0) ASCII* ASMO 449* Code Page 866* Latin 2 8859-2*
Arabic Sets 1) German ASMO 449+ Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852
Cyrillic Sets 2) Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia
European Sets 3) Danish ASMO 708+ Cyrillic 8859-5 Kamenicky
Greek Sets 4) Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8
Hebrew Sets 5) Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC-437 Slavic
Turkish Sets 6) English Sakr CP 714 7-bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250
Misc. Sets 7) Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865
UTF-8 8) French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860
9) Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win. CP 1251 Latin 1 8859-1
10) Italian Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859-9
11) Turkish Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859-15
12) CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1
13) CP 850 Win. CP 1256 Win. CP 1250
Farsi 1 Win. CP 1252
Farsi 2 Win. CP 1257
1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4

Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc.

Sets Sets Sets Sets

DEC 256 Greek* Hebrew Old* Data Gen. Turk.* Block-set 10cpi*
ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set
Greek 3 Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi
ABY Greek Latin-1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set
ABG Greek Win. CP 1255 PTT Turkish
ELOT 927 Greek IBC Turkish
Greek 851 Bull Turkish
Greek 437 AS400 Turkish
Greek 8859-7 Unisys Turkish
Win. CP 1253 NCR Turkish
Greek 813 EURO PST Turkish
Greek 869 EURO UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri

196
 IPDS Emulation

IPDS Emulation

* Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)

IPDS

Font Size Print Quality Graphics Barcode Barcode Barcode

Quality Quality Speed Size

Select By Host* Select By Host* High* High* High* 4234*

Standard Default Font Select By Host Select By Host Select By Host 67XX
Compressed Low Low Low 64XX
4224

Early Print Graphics Graphic I2/5 Default Code

Comp Scaling Charsize Checksum Page

Off* Rounded* 4234* Standard (1/3)* Internat. Set 5* Internat. Set 1

On Exact 67XX Special (4/9) English/USA/Can Dan/Norw. (ALT)
65XX Austrian/German Fin/Swed (ALT)
Belgian Old Spanish (ALT)
Brazilian Greek Old
Canadian/French Hebrew Old
Danish/Norw. OCR A
Finnish/Swedish OCR B
French Azerty Turkish Old
Italian Cyrillic
Japanese Eng. Baltic Mult
Katakana Estonian
Portuguese OCR B Katakana
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English (UK)
Arabic
Greek
Icelandic
Turkish Latin 5
Latin 2/ROECE
Cyrillic Old
Thai
Hebrew
Farsi
Yugoslavian
Latin 9
Euro US/Can.
Euro Aust/Germ.
Euro Dan/Norw.
Euro Fin/Swed.
Euro Italian
Euro Spanish
Euro UK/Ireland
Euro French
Euro Internat.
Euro Icelandic
Euro Latin 2

197
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

* Factory Default

Code Page Default VPA Check Hexdump Print IPDS

Subset Font Mode Fonts
Thai DRAFT 10* Enable* Disable*
Version 0* DRAFT 12 Disable Enable
Version 1 DRAFT 13
Version 2 DRAFT 15
DRAFT 17
DRAFT 18
DP 10
DP 12
DP 13
DP 15
DP 17
DP 18
NLQ 10
NLQ 12
NLQ 13
NLQ 15
NLQ 17
NLQ 18
OCRA
OCRB
PSM

A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the
IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual (GC31-3879).
Sending a non-IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result
in a hung spool file or writer.

Font Size
This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS.
• Select By Host (factory default). The font ID is only affected by host
commands.
• Standard. The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID.
• Compressed. The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID.

Print Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality.
• Select By Host (factory default). The application decides the print quality.
• Default Font. The default font the printer uses.

198
 IPDS Emulation

Graphics Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics.
• High (factory default). Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch.
• Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the graphics.
• Low. Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch.

Barcode Quality
This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels.
• High (factory default). Label is printed at 144 dots per inch.
• Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
• Low. Label is printed at 72 dots per inch.

Barcode Speed
This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels.
• High (factory default). Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots,
increasing printing speed, but decreasing print quality.
• Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
• Low. Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots, decreasing printing
speed, but increasing print quality.

Barcode Size
This parameter will emulate the barcode sizes of the selected printer model.
• 4234 (factory default). IBM 4234
• 67XX. Decision Data 67XX
• 64XX. IBM 6400 series
• 4224. IBM 4224

Early Print Comp (Complete)

This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller.
• Off (factory default). Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely.
• On. Print Comp is sent immediately. The next page will be created. This
improves the print performance when starting the next page.
NOTE: When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose
data.

199
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Graphics Scaling
This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mapping
Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO
FIT:
• Rounded (factory default). Calculations are rounded up in the desired
output resolution.
• Exact. Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible.

Graphic CharSize
This parameter will emulate the graphic character size of the selected printer
model.
• 4234 (factory default). IBM 4234
• 67XX. Decision Data 67XX

I2/5 Checksum
This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes.
• Standard (1/3) (factory default). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3
and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum.
• Special (4/9). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even
numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum.
NOTE: “Odd” refers to the 1st, 3rd, 5th... character in the barcode, while
“even” refers to the 2nd, 4th, 6th... character in the barcode.

Default Code Page

Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation.

Code Page Subset

When the Thai code page is selected as the default, either from the front
panel or by a host command, you may choose from three different versions.

Default Font
Choose a font quality and size from the available selections. All fonts in the
Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical
resolution (see page 197).

VPA Check
• Enable (factory default). The printer checks for dots that fall outside the
intersection of the logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area,
the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling
Control command setting requires error reporting.
• Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area.

200
 IPDS Emulation

Hexdump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems.

Print IPDS Fonts

This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in
the active IPDS emulation

201
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

PCL - II Emulation

* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)

PCL-II

Primary Char. Second Char. Page Length Max. Line Face CPI Symbol Set
Set Set Rep. Width Delay Delay

ID ID Inches/Page* 13.2 inches* Enable* Disable*

0* - 109 0* - 109 Lines/Page 13.6 inches Disable Enable
Symbol Set Symbol Set
See page 203 See page 203
Pitch Pitch
10.00*, 12.00, 10*, 12, 13.3
13.30, 15.00, 15, 16.67, 20
16.67, 20.00 Density
Density Data Processing*
Data Processing* NLQ
NLQ OCR-A
OCR-A OCR-B
OCR-B High Speed
High Speed

Graphics Perforation Display Line PTX LPI Adjust

Density Skip Functns Terminator Linefeed

60 DPI* Disable* Disable* LF After CR Disable* 6 LPI*

70 DPI Enable Enable Disable* Enable 8 LPI
Enable
CR After LF
Disable*
Enable
CR After FF
Disable*
Enable
CR After VT
Disable
Enable*

Page L./Lines Page L./Inches Config. Print Symbol Set Reset Cmd
Print CFG Ld
11.0 Inches * 11.0 Inches * Current Config*
2.0 – 16.0 Inches 2.0 – 16.0 Inches Factory Config
Disable
Power Up Config

202
 PCL - II Emulation

Primary Secondary
Char. set Char. Set
(from page 202) (from page 202)

Symbol Set Symbol Set

Roman-8[8U]* Math-8[8M] (same as Primary

Turkish-8[8T] PS Math[5M] Character Set)
Arab-8[8V] Greek-7[12N]
Cyrillic[8R] Postnet4[15Y]
PC858 MtLi[13U] Postnet11.25
MC Text[12J] Greek-8[8G]
Roman-9[4U] Hebrew-8[8H]
Latin-9[9N] Katakana-8[8K]
Win3.0Lat-1[9U] DEC 256 Greek
Hebrew Old ELOT 928 Greek
Japan Postnet Greek 3
Katakana Post ABY Greek
ASCII[0U] ABG Greek
Math Sym[0A/0M] ELOT 927 Greek
LineDraw[0B/0L] Greek 437
IS0 Den/Nor[0D] Greek 8859-7
Roman Ext.[0E]
IS0 UK[1E]
IS0 France[0F]
IS0 German[0G]
Hebrew[0H]
Japan ASCII[0K]
Katakana[1K]
Block Char[1L]
OCR-A[0O]
OCR-B[1O]
ISO Swe/Fin[0S]
ISO Spain[1S]
ISO Italian[0I]
ISO Portugu[4S]
Latin-1[0N]
Latin-2[2N]
Latin-5[5N]
Latin-6[6N]
Baltic[19L]
PC8 DanNor[11U]
PC8 Cd437[10U]
PC850 MtLi[12U]
PC851 LtGk[12G]
PC852 Lat2[17U]
PC Turkish[9T]
PC Hebrew[15H]
PC Lat/Ara[10V]
PC Cyrillic[3R]
Win3.1Lat1[19U]
Win3.1Lat-2[9E]
Win3.1Lat-5[5T]

203
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Primary Char. Set

You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character
sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you
can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you
choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect
that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current
character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its
attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set.

Second Char. Set

Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them,
send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out
(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).

Page Length Rep.

• Inches/Page (factory default). All page length calculations are based on
the inches displayed on the panel.
• Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.
The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.
For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically
13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in
Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of
lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer
internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.

Max Line Width

Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (factory default) or 13.6 inches.

Face CPI Delay

Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.
• Enable (factory default). Different font densities can be used on the same
line.
• Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.

Graphics Density
Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (factory default) or 70 DPI.

Perforation Skip
• Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
• Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over
margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.

204
 PCL - II Emulation

Display Functions
• Disable (factory default). Control characters are not printed.
• Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a
useful debugging tool.

Line Terminator
You can define the action of the line. Four options are available: LF after CR,
CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of these options may be
enabled or disabled independent of one another.

PTX Linefeed
• Disable (factory default). Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from
the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text
alignment.
• Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top
of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing
graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter
to Enable to maintain text alignment.

PTX Linefeed Enabled PTX Linefeed Disabled

LINE 1 LINE 1

LINE 2 Linefeed LINE 2

Linefeed
LINE 3 LINE 3

LPI Adjust
This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (factory
default) or 8 LPI.

Page L./Lines
This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi,
or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.
NOTE: If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an
invalid length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value,
the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines).
Similarly, selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return
with 16 lines.

Page L./Inches
This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in
increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.

205
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Config Print
This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected
values.

Symbol Set Print

This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number
prints to the left of the character set sample.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
• Current Config (factory default). If you have preset and presaved
multiple configurations, then the currently selected presaved
configuration is loaded when the reset command is received.
• Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is received.
• Disable. The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and
continues to use the currently loaded configuration.
• Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.

LG Emulation

* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)

LG

Font Vert. Forms Horiz Forms Autowrap CR LF

(see page 207) Bot Frm 66/6 Left Mrg 00.0* No* = CR* = LF*
Top Mrg 0/6 Right Mrg 13.2 Yes = CR + LF = CR + LF
Bot Mrg 66/6

FF Unsolicited Print Mode Plot Mode I-2/5 Guard

Rpt Opt Opt Bars

= FF* No* Enable* Enable* Enable*

= CR + FF Small Disable Disable Disable
Big

206
 LG Emulation

Font

(from page 206)

Style Character Set

DP 10 6* GL Char Set
DP 10 8 U.S. ASCII*
DP 12 6 DEC Finnish
DP 12 8 French
DP 15 6 DEC Fr. Can.
DP 15 8 German
DP 15 10 Italian
HS 10 6 JIS Roman
CORESPON 5 6 DEC Nor./Dan.
CORESPON 5 8 Spanish
CORESPON 6 6 DEC Swedish
CORESPON 6 8 DEC Great Brit.
CORESPON 10 6 ISO Nor./Dan.
CORESPON 10 8 DEC Dutch
CORESPON 12 6 DEC Swiss
CORESPON 12 8 DEC Portuguese
CORESPON 15 6 VT100 Graphics
CORESPON 15 8 DEC Suppl.
CORESPON 15 10 DEC Technical
OCR A ISO Katakana
OCR B 7-Bit Hebrew
COMPRESS 6 6 7-Bit Turkish
COMPRESS 6 8 Greek Suppl.
COMPRESS 8 6 Hebrew Suppl.
COMPRESS 8 8 Turkish Suppl.
COMPRESS 13 6 GR Char Set
COMPRESS 13 8 DEC Suppl.*
COMPRESS 13 10 DEC Technical
COMPRESS 16 6 VT100 Graphics
COMPRESS 16 8 ISO Katakana
COMPRESS 16 10 ISO Latin 1
DP 5 6 ISO Latin 2
DP 5 8 ISO Latin 5
DP 6 6 ISO Latin 9
DP 6 8 ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.

207
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Font
Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation, as follows:
• Style. This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a
characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) setting, in the format Type
cpi lpi. The default setting is DP 10 6 (Data Processing, 10 cpi, 6 lpi). The
print quality types you may choose from are as follows:
DP = Data Processing (standard quality)
CORESPON = Correspondence (near letter quality)
COMPRESS = Compressed (vertically compressed for printing
long graphs and charts)
OCR A & OCR B = Optical Character Recognition, sets A
and B
HS = High Speed (Draft quality for high speed printing)
• Character Set. This option allows you to select a character set. The
character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets, which
include the U.S. ASCII set and several foreign language and special
character sets.

Vert Forms
• Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the
forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch),
ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press
the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top
margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is
selected.
• Top Mrg 6/[Link] option sets the top margin for the forms. You must
specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198
lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and
bottom margins do not cross each other.
• Bot Mrg 66/6. This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must
specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to
198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0,
so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.

208
 LG Emulation

Horiz Forms
• Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1
inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value,
left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The
margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not
cross each other.
• Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify
the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The
default value is 13.2. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left
arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins
will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross
each other.

Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
• No (factory default). Any print data received past the forms width setting
is discarded.
• Yes. An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is
received past the forms width setting.

CR
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
• = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
• = CR + LF. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a
Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the
data stream. (Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line
Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return.)

LF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
• = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The
next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
• = CR + LF. Each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an
additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This
feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host
computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.

209
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

FF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
• = FF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The
next print position will be the current print position of the next form.
• = CR + FF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next form.

Unsolicited Rpt
This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to
the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred.
• No (factory default). Disables all unsolicited status reports from the
printer.
• Small. Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended
status report to the host.
• Big. Enables extended, unsolicited status reports and sends an extended
status report to the host.

Print Mode Opt

When enabled, this option affects the SPI, SHS, and DECSHORP
commands. The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and
print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation. For SHS and
DECSHORP, the character size will change with the selected pitch. In
addition, SGR attributes such as bold, crossed-out, and italics, will be done in
print mode with greater efficiency.
• Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
• Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with
older LG printer products.

Plot Mode Opt

When enabled, this option will plot with greater efficiency, particularly with
respect to the Postnet barcode. Postnet is printed in the same density as the
current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible.
• Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
• Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with
older LG printer products.

I-2/5 Guard Bars

• Enable (factory default). Horizontal guard bars are printed above and
below each Interleaved 2/5 bar code. This option only applies to
Interleaved 2/5 bar codes.
• Disable. Interleaved 2/5 bar codes are printed normally, with no guard
bars.

210
 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation

OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation

EMULATION * = Factory Default

1
Values for standard printers.
(from page 79) 2 Values for HD printers.

Postscript/PDF

Resolution Paper Size Paper Size Clip Page Move to TOF Gray Adjust
Fault

120x144 DPI* 1 Custom Ignore* Enable* Disable 0*

90x96 DPI 1 Width Fault Disable At End of Job -10 to 10
Length At End of Page*
180x180 DPI* 2
US Fanfold*
180x90 DPI 2
Letter
90x180 DPI 2
120x120 DPI 2 Legal
Executive
90x90 DPI 2
A3
A4
A5
A6
10x14 Inch
12x12 Inch
13.6x12 Inch
Tabloid 11x17in
JIS B5
US Folio
No. 10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
C6 Envelope
ISO B5

Postscript/PDF Interpreter
The Postscript/PDF data is handled by Ghostscript by Artifex, an interpreter
compatible with the following:
• Portable Document Format (“PDF”) 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 as
defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual, distributed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PostScript (TM) Language Level 3, as defined in the PostScript Language
Reference Third Edition (ISBN 0-201-37922-8), published by Addison-
Wesley in mid-1999.

211
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Ghostscript includes a set of 35 scalable outline fonts in PostScript Type 1

format, compatible in appearance and metrics with the fonts commonly
distributed under the following names:
• Bookman (demi, demi italic, light, light italic)
• Courier ((plain, oblique, bold, bold oblique)
• Avant Garde (book, book oblique, demi, demi oblique)
• Helvetica (plain, oblique, bold, bld oblique narrow, narrow oblique, narrow
bold, narrow bold oblique)
• Palatino (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
• New Century Schoolbook (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
• Times (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
• Symbol
• Zapf Chancery (medium italic)
• Zapf Dingbats
The Ghostscript version used in the P8000 is 8.71.

Resolution
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used
when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print
resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard
products:
• 120x144 DPI (factory default)
• 90x96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD products:
• 180x180 DPI (factory default)
• 180x90 DPI
• 90x180 DPI
• 120x120 DPI
• 90x90 DPI

212
 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation
Postscript/PDF Interpreter

Paper Size
This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. This parameter
should be set according to the dimensions of the physical paper installed in
the printer. This parameter will be used to determine the TOF and is expected
to change when new media is installed. Available options include:
• Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
• Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch
increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
• Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three
length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1
inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6
to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8
to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of
the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,
select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu
must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”
menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not
exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing
that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration
printout will also show the length menu used.
• See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.

Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

US Fanfold 13.6 x 11 in

Letter 8.5 x 11 in
Legal 8.5 x 14 in

Executive 7.3 x 10.5 in

A3 11.7 x 16.5 in
A4 8.3 x 11 2/3 in

A5 5.8 x 8.3 in

A6 4.1 x 5.8 in

10x14 Inch 10 x 14 in

213
Chapter 4 EMULATION Menu

Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

12x12 Inch 12 x 12 in
13.6x12 Inch 13.6 x 12 in

Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in

JIS B5 7.2 x 10.1 in

US Folio 8.5 x 13 in

No. 10 Envelope 4.1 x 9.5 in

DL Envelope 4.3 x 8.7 in

C5 Envelope 6.4 x 9 in
C6 Envelope 4.5 x 6.4 in

ISO B5 6.9 x 9.8 in

NOTE: When host jobs have page sizes that do not match the Paper Size
parameter, the printer will behave based on the Paper Size Fault, Clip
Page, and Move to TOF parameters.

Paper Size Fault

If a page is sent to the printer with dimensions that do not match the printer,
then the following will happen based on the Paper Size Fault menu selected.
• Ignore (factory default). The page will print and the paper size length will
be ignored. However, the width will be clipped according to the front panel
width setting.
• Fault. The printer enters a fault state and goes offline. The user will need
to either clear the fault and continue, or load new media and change the
Paper Size menu selection. Once the printer is back online, printing will
resume.

Clip Page
This menu defines the action when a page is sent to the printer with a length
that is longer than the selected paper size length.
• Enable (factory default). The page will be clipped at the paper size length.
In cases where the sent page is longer than the paper size length, the
“Move to TOF” menu setting has no effect since the page is clipped at the
TOF position.
• Disable. The page will not be clipped and printing continues on the next
page. The action taken by the printer when printing of the page completes
is determined by the Move to TOF menu.
NOTE: Page clipping at paper size width is always enabled to protect against
printing on the platen.

214
 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation
Postscript/PDF Interpreter

Move to TOF
When the page length given does not match the printer, the printer driver will
have to determine how the TOF is kept relative to each page printed. The
following menu options are available through the front panel and the driver:
• Disable. Only when the FF key is pressed.
• At End of Job. After the Current Job.
• At End of Page (factory default). After each Page Printed.

Gray Adjust
This menu adjusts the darkness of the gray elements on the page by
gradually reducing or increasing the amount of dots that are placed in the
halftone patterns. Pure white and black colors are not affected by setting.
The menu ranges from -10 to +10. The default value is 0.

-10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
All Default All
White Black

215
Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL Menu

PRINTER CONTROL Menu

* Factory Default
PRINTER 1
Not available in LG or PCL-II
CONTROL 2
Available for Pedestal printers only.
(from page 73, 3 Not available when Postscript/PDF is active.
74, 75, 75, 76, 4
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
77, 78, 79) 5
Availability based on Firmware type.

ZTP Ribbon End Open Platen Bar Code Tear Bar View
SETTINGS 4 Point @BOF Quality 3 Dist. 2 Function

ZTP Function Darker +6 Disable* Dark* 7.15 inches* Disable*

ZTP TearDistance Darker +5 Enable Draft (4.5 – 15.5) Enable
ZTP Data Time Darker +4
ZTP Wait Time Darker +3
ZTP Platen Open Darker +2
Darker +1
Normal*
Lighter -1
Lighter -2
Lighter -3
Lighter -4
Lighter -5
Lighter -6
Lighter -7
Lighter -8
Lighter -9
Lighter -10

Unidirectional Display Panel Accented

Language Display Char 1

Disable* English* Ribbon Life* Standard*

Enable German Configuration Tall
French IP Address
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese 1
Simp. Chinese 5
Trad. Chinese 5
Korean 5

216
 PRINTER CONTROL
Postscript/PDF Menu
Interpreter

ZTP SETTINGS
Refer to the “ZTP SETTINGS” menu section in Appendix D, page 351. This
menu only appears for Zero Tear Pedestal printers.

Ribbon End Point

This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon
as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a
darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting
is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. The range of
values are as follows:
• Normal (factory default)
• Darker +1 through Darker +6
• Lighter -1 through Lighter -10
NOTE: This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will
automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the
new end point.

Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)

Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through
the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen
when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,
you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between
perforations.

Bar Code Quality

Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations, except IPDS.
(See “IPDS Emulation” on page 197 to set the bar code quality for IPDS.)
• Dark (factory default). Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72.
• Draft. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72.

Tear Bar Dist. (Distance)

Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position. For printers using
the top paper exit, the default (7.15 inches) is used. You can specify 4.5 to
15.5 inches in .01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and
form design.

217
Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL Menu

View Function
• Disable (factory default for pedestal and tabletop printers). The View key
functionality is Eject only. When the View key is pressed the paper is
ejected based on the value of the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When
the key is pressed again the top of the next available form moves to the
print station. This movement can be either forward or backward
depending on the currently set form length.
• Enable (factory default for cabinet printers). Enables the View Function in
addition to the Eject. When the key is pressed for a short period of time
(less than 1/2 second) the functionality is View. The paper moves from the
print station to the tractor area for viewing. When the key is pressed again
the paper moves back to the print station. When the key is pressed for a
longer period of time (more than 1/2 second) the functionality is Eject.
When the View key is pressed the paper is ejected based on the value of
the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When the key is pressed again the
top of the next available form is moved to the print station. This movement
can be either forward or backward depending on the currently set form
length.
NOTE: Default setting is Enable for Indian language printers.

Unidirectional
The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By
setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only
(unidirectional).
• Disable (factory default). The printer will print all data in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher
printing speed.
• Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle
sweep (unidirectional printing). Although enabling this feature reduces
print speed, it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces
cleaner, sharper barcodes and text.

Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Simp. Chinese,
Trad. Chinese, or Korean. The factory default is English.
NOTE: Simp. Chinese, Trad. Chinese, and/or Korean are not available on all
firmware versions.

Panel Display
This menu allows the user to customize the type of information that will
display on the panel LCD when the printer is in online mode.
• Ribbon Life (factory default). The LCD displays the ribbon life for the
current cartridge installed.
• Configuration. The LCD displays the configuration that was last loaded.

218
 PRINTER CONTROL
Postscript/PDF Menu
Interpreter

• IP Address. The LCD displays the printer IP Address for networked

printers.

Accented Char
Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall. See Figure 24
for an example. Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer
to back up during printing.

Standard Tall

Figure 24. Accented Characters

219
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

ADVANCED USER Menu

* = Factory Default
1
If installed
ADVANCED 2
Not available in PCL-II
USER 3 Not available in LG or PCL-II
(from page 73, 4
Available for OpenPrint products only.
74, 75, 76, 77, 5
For 1000 LPM models only.
78, and 79) 6 For H-Series printers only.
7
For cabinet models, the default is 15 minutes.

SURE SCAN 4 PTX_SETUP Hex Dump Power-up Downloaded PMD Fault

Option 2 Mode State Fonts 3

See page 222. Setup Parse Disable* Online* Char Operations Enable*
Enable* Enable Offline Delete frm Flash Disable
Ignore Load from Flash
Disable Save to Flash
Setup SFCC Delete from RAM
21h* Ld Char at Pwrup
(1-FF hex) Disable*
Enable
Set Operations
Delete frm Flash
Load from Flash
Save to Flash
Delete from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Download 6
Save to Flash
Delete DL Font.

Power Auto Auto Main File SD File Set

Stacker 1 Elevator 1 Locking System System 1 Sharing 3

Enable* Enable* Disable* Overwrite Files Overwrite Files Disable*

Disable Disable Enable Enable* Enable* Enable
Disable Disable
View File List View SD Files
Delete Files Delete SD Files
Flash Avail. SD Flash Avail.
Flash Reclaimable Copy From SD
Copy to SD 1 Print File List
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List

Shuttle Slow Paper Alarm Power Saver Pwr Save Cancel

Timeout Slew Time 7 Control Key

5 Seconds* Disable* On* Instant Enable* Disable

1-60 Seconds Enable Cont. Beep 5 seconds Disable Enable*
Off 10 seconds
15 seconds *
30 seconds
1 minute – 60 minutes

220
 ADVANCED USER
Postscript/PDF Menu
Interpreter

* = Factory Default
1
If installed
ADVANCED 2
Not available in PCL-II
USER 3 Not available in LG or PCL-II
(continued from 4
Available for OpenPrint products only.
page 220) 5
For 1000 LPM models only.
6 For H-Series printers only.

Rcv. Status Ret. Status Set Lock Job Sel/ Print RBN Low
Port Port Key Typeface 6 Hist. Log 6 Warn @

Automatic* Automatic* Job-Select On* Under 2%*

Serial Disable Typeface On Under 5%
E-NET Data Port Under 10%
Serial Under 20%
E-NET Stat Port Under 30%
USB
IEEE 1284

RBN Low RBN End Print Disp.

Action Action Energy 5 Intensity

Warn & Continue* Ignore RBN End* Standard* 2*

Warn & Pause Stop At RBN End PowerPrint 0-20

221
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

SURE SCAN Submenu

NOTE: Available for OpenPrint products only. For OpenPrint P8000
Standard Postscript/PDF and OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
firmware, the SURE SCAN menu is under the Advanced User menu
(see page 220).

* = Factory Default
1
Available for OpenPrint products only.
1, 2 2
SURE SCAN Available when Postscript/PDF is selected as the Active Emulation
(from page 79) on OpenPrint P8000 products.
3 Display menu only.

Optimize Alignment Hor. Quiet Ver. Erase Quiet Zone Update

Barcode Zone Zone Fault PDF

Yes* Left 0.20 Inch* 0.00 Inch* Enable* Embedded Only*

Test Center* (0.00 to 0.99 inch) (0.00 to 0.99 inch) Disable Always
No Right

Barcodes On Bcodes
Page Optimized 3

Auto* xxxxxx 2
1, 2,...,20

Optimize Barcode
Defines whether the barcode optimization feature is active.
• Yes (factory default). Activates the barcode optimization feature.
• No. Deactivates the barcode optimization feature.
• Test. Boxes will print around all barcodes that are detected and replaced.
This provides a simple method to confirm that the software correctly
detects and replaces all the barcodes on any given form.

222
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Alignment
Defines how the optimized replacement barcode will be positioned with
regard to the original barcode position if no obstacles exist to this placement.
It defines the first attempted position of the replacement barcode. If the first
attempted position causes a replacement barcode to interfere with any other
form elements (text, graphics, or dots), the replacement barcode
automatically adjusts away from these interfering elements until requested
horizontal quiet zones are observed. Selections for this menu are as follows:
• Left. The first attempted position of the leftmost bar of the replacement
barcode will be the same position as the leftmost bar of the original
barcode. For instance, if the replacement barcode is smaller than the
original barcode, it will be placed as follows:

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the

replacement barcode will begin at the left edge of the original barcode
and expand beyond the right edge.

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

223
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots) immediately to the right of the
original barcode can force this first attempted placement to be modified.
The replacement barcode will shift left to avoid obstacles on the right
provided that there are also no obstacles on the left.

Replacement Barcode

Here is
an
Quiet Zone obstacle
Distance (text)
(picket)

Original Barcode

• Center (factory default). The first attempted position of the center bar of
the replacement barcode will be the same position as the center bar of
the original barcode.
If the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode, it will be
replaced as follows:
Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

If the replacement barcode is longer than the original barcode, it will still
be centered, but it will extend beyond the end of the original barcode on
both the left and the right.

224
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

If form elements interfere with this placement on the right or the left, the
barcode will automatically adjust away from these obstacles. Form
obstacles may force a center-aligned barcode to look left or right aligned.
For instance, in the below picture, a center-aligned barcode has text 0.2
inches away from the right edge of the original barcode. With a horizontal
quiet zone of 0.2 inches, the resulting replacement barcode position is
exactly the same regardless of whether center, right, or left alignment is
chosen. Regardless of the first attempted position, the barcode will need
to shift to the left until the horizontal quiet zone can be observed.

Replacement Barcode

Here is
an
obstacle
Quiet Zone (text)
Distance
(picket)

Original Barcode

225
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

• Right. The first attempted position of the rightmost bar of the replacement
barcode will be the same position as the rightmost bar of the original
barcode.
For instance, if the replacement barcode is shorter than the original
barcode it will be placed as follows:

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the

replacement barcode will end at the right edge of the original barcode and
extend past the left edge. Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots)
immediately to the left of the original barcode, however, can force this first
attempted placement to be modified. The replacement barcode will shift
right to avoid obstacles on the left provided that there are also no
obstacles on the right.

226
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Hor. Quiet Zone

This menu defines the quiet zones (empty areas) width before and after the
start/stop codes regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. When
positioning the barcode, the quiet zone is taken into account when detecting
collisions with other elements (dots) on the form. If one of the horizontal quiet
zones is violated, the barcode will automatically shift to the left or right (for
picket fence orientation) or up or down (for ladder orientation) to remove the
quiet zone violation.
The width of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch
increments. The default is 0.20 inches. This feature ensures that the
replacement barcodes will be properly scanned.

Barcodes are
automatically adjusted
away from text (or other
Quiet Zone obstacles on the form)
distance until the Hor. Quiet
(picket) Zone distance is met.

Quiet Zone
distance
(ladder)

227
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

Ver. Erase Zone

This menu defines the area above and below the bars that will be erased,
regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. It is used when the barcode
has extraneous data beyond the bars that need to be deleted as it is being
replaced.
The height of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch
increments. The default is 0 inches (no empty space). This feature can be
used to remove special attributes remainders of the original barcode such as
a guard bar or line that borders the top and bottom of the bars. It can also be
used to erase the original PDF if the user wants to force all PDFs to be
replaced (see Update PDF on page 229). The PDF occupies more than 1/6 of
an inch.

Vertical Erase Distance

Vertical Erase Distance

Erase
Area
(picket)

Vertical Erase Distance

Erase
Area
(ladder)

Quiet Zone Fault

This menu defines whether a fault must be reported on the front panel LCD if
the BCDOPT feature cannot print the replacement barcode without violating
the quiet zone as defined in the “Hor. Quiet Zone” menu, where the width of
the replacement barcode plus quiet zones is too large to fit the available white
space on the page.
• Enable (factory default). If this fault occurs, reduce the quiet zone to see
if the barcode fits.
• Disable. Quiet zone violations are not reported, but adjacent page
elements could be drawn too close to replacement barcodes and possibly
overlap.

228
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Update PDF
There are two distinct cases with barcode PDFs. In the first case, the PDF is
partially embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the
PDF. In the second case, the PDF is printed entirely above or below the
barcode and is not disturbed by the barcode replacement.
Whenever the PDF is embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars
also erases the PDF, the embedded PDF will be automatically detected and
replaced. An area surrounding the barcode will be erased to remove the
portions of the former PDF that extended beyond the bounds of the original
barcode. The erase area is shown in the figure below. Since embedded PDFs
are automatically replaced, the Update PDF menu option has no effect on this
type of PDF.
Erase
Erase
Area
Area
1/6””
1/6 1/6 ”

1/6 ”

When the PDF is printed above or below the barcode, the behavior will
depend on the Update PDF menu setting.
• Embedded Only (factory default). Embedded PDFs will not be replaced.
This allows the user to keep the present PDF data and its font, etc.
• Always. PDFs will always reprint. For instance, since the original PDF will
not be centered with respect to the replaced barcode, the user may want
to always replace the PDF. When set to Always, an extra 1/6” is erased to
remove the original PDF. If the original PDF is not fully erased, it is up to
the user to increase the Ver. Erase Zone setting such that the original
PDF will be completely erased prior to the replacement being printed.

Erase
Area

1/6 ”

229
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

Barcodes on Page
This setting defines the number of barcodes that must be detected on the
form. If the value is set to “Auto” (factory default), no particular number of
barcodes are required to be detected. If the value is set to a number between
1 to 20, then the number of barcodes set is required to be detected on each
form. If the printer detects fewer barcodes than the value set, the fault “x/y
BARCODES / Not Found” is declared. x represents the number of barcodes
not found, and y represents the Barcodes on Page value. Printing will not
continue until the user clears this fault.

Bcodes Optimized
This is a display menu that continuously counts the number of barcodes that
have been optimized since power-up. This statistic only resets to zero when
the printer is powered off. This menu can be used as a diagnostic to check the
number of barcodes optimized over a period of time or over a batch file.

PTX_SETUP Option
Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command
and functions.
• Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command.
• Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character
you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command. Valid hex
values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the
“!” character.

Hex Dump Mode

A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems. The options include:
• Disable (factory default)
• Enable
Figure 48 on page 287. shows a hex dump sample.

Power-Up State
• Online (factory default). The printer powers up in the online state.
• Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.

230
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Downloaded Fonts
Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the
current character set with a different character in the same font.
The Downloaded Fonts menu applies to both LP+ Bitmaps and IGP Block
downloaded characters. For example, performing a Delete from Flash option
deletes both Bitmap and Block downloaded characters from flash memory.
• Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a
character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character
from RAM.
• Ld Char at Pwrup. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at
power up.
• Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a
character set from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a
character set from RAM.
• Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set
at power up.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
• DBCS Download. Allows you to save and delete downloadable DBCS
characters from flash.
• Save to Flash. Saves the downloaded characters from the DRAM to
FLASH memory. These characters can be automatically reloaded when
the printer powers on. The saved file name is “dbcsdwn”. The characters
need to be in the DRAM prior to saving into FLASH memory by using any
download commands.
• Delete DL. Font. Deletes the “dbcsdwn” file. The downloaded
characters will no longer reside in FLASH memory on subsequent power-
ups.

PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault

• Enable (factory default). In the event of a paper jam, an audible alarm
beeps, “CLEAR PAPER JAM” appears on the message display, and the
printer stops printing.
• Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.

CAUTION Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam
occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print,
possibly causing damage to the printer.

Power Stacker
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker
(provided this option is installed).

231
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

Auto Elevator
This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed.
The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises
the stacker as the printed paper stack grows. If the printer has been printing
for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in
the paper stack, the stacker raises itself 1/4 inch automatically.
• Enable (factory default). The automatic elevator on the power stacker
operates normally.
• Disable. The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes
and is entirely dependent on the sensor. Disable is used with extremely
high-quality print jobs that take a long time to print.

Auto Locking
• Disable (factory default). The ENTER key must be locked manually.
• Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after
the last front panel key press.

Main File System

The Main File System refers to the flash resident on the P8000 controller.
• Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent flash files from being overwritten
by disabling the overwrite function.
• View File List. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press
the ENTER key to go into the submenu. Then press the UP or DOWN
keys to view the different file names and size.
• Delete Files. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press
the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to delete. Pressing the
ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control panel.
• Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into the main file system.
• Flash Reclaimable. The amount of flash marked deleted, but cannot be
used until the Optimize&Reboot operation is performed.
• Copy To SD. If the SD card is inserted, the section will allow the user to
copy selected files from the main file system to the SD card (root
directory).
• Optimize&Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files within
the main file system. After pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot.
NOTE: When the Optimize&Reboot option is executed, the message,
“Optimizing Flash Files” does not display before printer rebooting
takes place.
• Print File List. Prints a summary of the flash files stored in flash memory
and several statistics on Main File System usage.

IMPORTANT Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either
back online or offline.

232
 SURE SCAN Submenu

SD File System
The SD File System menu appears if an SD card is inserted in the printer
before power-up. The SD File System applies only the SD card’s root
directory.

IMPORTANT If you remove or insert the SD card after the printer is powered on, an
error will occur.
• Overwrite Files. Prevents SD files from being overwritten by disabling
the overwrite function.
• View SD Files. Displays the list of files on the SD card (root directory).
Press the ENTER key to go into the submenu, then press the UP or
DOWN keys to view the different SD file names and size.
• Delete SD Files. Displays the list of SD files on the SD card (root
directory). Press the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to
delete. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control
panel.
• SD Flash Avail. The amount of SD memory available for the user to save
or download files into the SD card.
• Copy From SD. Copies selected files from the SD card (root directory) to
the Main File System.
• Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored on the SD card (root
directory) and several statistics on the SD File System usage.

Set Sharing
This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP+
protocol and the active IGP emulation.
Changing characters sets in LP+ causes the active IGP to change to the
same character set if the selected set exists in IGP. If the active IGP has no
access to the selected set, no changes are made. Selecting a new character
set in the active IGP causes the LP+ to change to the same character set if
the selected character set exists in the active LP+ protocol. Not all sets are
shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets. As a
result, selecting a set in the Standard group of LP+ or IGP emulation may or
may not cause the other emulation to have the same set.
NOTE: The Set Sharing front panel option has no effect on the LP+ build.
The option only applies to the builds with IGP.
This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.

Shuttle Timeout
The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received. If
your host is slow, setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer
from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts.

233
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

Slow Paper Slew

• Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at
maximum speed.
• Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that
certain forms will stack neatly.

Alarm
• On (factory default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault
occurs, such as a paper jam.
• Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
• Off. No audible alarm will sound.

Power Saver Time

The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When Instant is chosen, the
printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle
properly. The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle
timeout value which can be set in the menu.
NOTE: Power Saver Mode will not be shown on the control panel even
though the function still exists. Sending a print job to the printer will
turn off Power Saver mode.

Pwr Save Control

Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode.
• Enable (factory default). Allows you to enable the Power Save (Energy
Star) mode.
• Disable. Allows you to disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode.

Cancel Key
• Disable
• Enable (factory default). The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data
in the print buffer without printing any of the data.

Rcv. Status Port

This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status
command.
• Automatic (factory default). When selected, the status command is sent
to the printer with the print data through the active host interface.
• Serial. When selected, the status command is sent to the printer through
the serial interface regardless of the active host interface.

234
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Ret. Status Port

This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS
for PGL) to send the status data back to the Host.
The options are Automatic (factory default), Serial, USB, E-NET Stat Port,
IEEE 1284, Disable, and E-NET Data Port.

Set Lock Key

Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are
pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose
different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any
group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER
key or any key combinations which are already used for another function.
There is no limit to how many keys you can select.
To set the new lock key, follow these steps:
1. Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads
“Set Lock Key” (follow the menu structure on page 220).
2. Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3. Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key. Make
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key
again.” If the selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key
selection.” Return to step 2 and start over.
5. Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the new lock key
combination is entered again correctly, the display will read, “Lock key
has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the display will read
“Verification failed.” Start over at step 2.
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the ONLINE
key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered
off and back on.

Job Sel/Typeface
NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
This option allows the user to change the printer’s active configuration or
typeface in Offline mode.
• Job-Select On (factory default). Allows the user to change the printer’s
active configuration.
• Typeface On. Allows the user to change the printer’s typeface.

Print Hist. Log

NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
Checks the status of user downloaded font files in the build.

235
Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu

RBN Low Warn @

This option allows the user to select the Ribbon Life value at which point the
printer will declare a ribbon low condition and display the "RIBBON UNDER
XX% / Change RBN Soon" warning message. The default is Under 2%. See
“RBN Low Action” below for details of how the printer behaves once a ribbon
low condition is reached.
The values are Under 2% (factory default), Under 5%, Under 10%, Under
20%, and Under 30%.

RBN Low Action

This menu determines how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is
reached.
• Warn & Continue (factory default). Once a ribbon low condition is
reached the printer beeps and displays the "RIBBON UNDER XX% /
Change RBN Soon" warning message. Printing will continue without
interruption. The warning message can be cleared by pressing the
ONLINE/Clear button, however the message will persist again in two
minutes. This action will continue until a ribbon out (ribbon life reaches
0%) condition occurs.
• Warn & Pause. This setting is similar to the Warn & Continue selection
with one exception. When a ribbon low condition is reached the printer will
still display the "RIBBON UNDER XX%/Change RBN Soon" warning
message, however the printer will stop printing. This is meant to get the
user’s attention. To resume printing the user must press the ONLINE/
Clear key.
NOTE: Printing will only stop on the first occurrence of a ribbon low condition.
Once the user clears the warning message, subsequent warnings will
display the warning message but printing will continue.

RBN End Action

This menu allows the user to override the normal ribbon low warning and
ribbon out conditions.
• Stop At RBN End (factory default). When this factory default option is
selected, the printer displays a warning message when a ribbon low
condition is reached and display a ribbon out fault when ribbon life
reaches 0%.
• Ignore RBN End. When this menu option is selected, it overrides the
ribbon low and ribbon out conditions, i.e. no warning or fault messages is
displayed and printing continues even after ribbon life reaches 0%.
However, once the ribbon life reaches an excess wear condition as
indicated by the fault message "EXCESS RBN WEAR / Install New RBN",
printing will stop and the user must install a new ribbon before printing
can resume.
NOTE: The excess ribbon wear is set below the "Lighter -10" Ribbon End
Point setting.

236
 SURE SCAN Submenu

Print Energy (1000 lpm only)

This menu allows the user to optimize energy or impact of the hammers when
printing single or multipart forms.
• Standard (factory default). When this factory default option is selected,
the printing energy is optimized for normal jobs.
• PowerPrint. When this option is enabled, printing is optimized for
multi-part forms.

Disp. Intensity
This menu controls the intensity of the LCD display. The range is 0-20 and the
default setting is 2.

237
Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Menu

DIAGNOSTICS Menu

* = Factory Default
1 If Ethernet adapter is present
DIAGNOSTICS 2
Not available in PCL-II or LG
3
Not available in LG
(from page 73, 4 If a Feature File exists.
74, 75, 76, 77, 5
Values for OpenPrint P8000 HD printers.
78 and 79.) 6
If the network is enabled.

Printer Tests Test Phase Paper Out System Print

Width Value Dots Memory Statistics

Shift Recycle* Full Width* 50* 40 dots* 128 Megabytes On: x.x Hrs.
All E’s 80 col. 1-2000 (4-76) Print: x.x Hrs
E’s + TOF Print Strokes:
76 dots *, 5
All H’s xxxxxx
(40 - 112) 5
All Underlines Print Lines:
All Black xxxxxx
Shuttle Slow 11 inch Pages:
Shuttle Fast xxx
Shuttle Only Power on Pages
Phase Printer xxx
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log 3
Clear Error Log 3
Adapter Test1
Ethernet Test 6
Acoustics 2
Demo
Dice 5
Prnt Ribbon Log
Checker
Weld Patch Log
Novram Err Log

Software Feature Shuttle Auto Printer

Build File 4 Type Dump Mgmt

SW P/N + Ver P/N of File xxxx Disable* See page 242.

Enable

238
 DIAGNOSTICS
SURE Menu
SCAN Submenu

Printer Tests
These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer.
NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests.
They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual.
• Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or
malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical
compression.
• All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's which identifies missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/
dark character variations.
• E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page
top-of-form, which identifies paper motion or feeding problems.
• All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.
• All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank
misalignment.
• All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid
black band.
• Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at low speed.
• Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at fast speed.
• Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.
• Phase Printer. Checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set in the
factory. Run the test and check the quality. (The phase value prints on the
left margin.) If the print looks too wavy, change the Phase Value
parameter while the test is running. While the phase printer test runs,
press the DOWN key. To change the value, press the PREV or NEXT key
until the desired value displays and then press ENTER.
• Paperout Adj.. Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting, which
determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out
condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
• Burnin Test. Reserved for factory use.
• Print Error Log. Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults
(ribbon stall, voltage faults) are stored in the error log.
• Clear Error Log. Clears entries in the error log.
• Ethernet Test. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet (if
present).
• Acoustics. A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics.
• Demo. Demonstration of various print attributes.
• Dice 5. Pattern used to measure print density.
• Prnt Ribbon Log. Prints log of cartridge installed in the printer.

239
Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Menu

• Checker. For factory use. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead
elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
• Weld Patch Log. Prints log times for ribbon starts, welds, and ribbon
stops.
• Novram Err Log. Prints detailed information about the most recent
Novram related failure that has occurred. It is useful when the front panel
reports “BAD NVM” or “ILL NVM” error types. Contact the Customer
Solutions Center and provide this information if such an error occurs.

Test Width
Set this parameter to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.

Phase Value
During the Phasing Test, this value changes until printing is phased.
The range is between 1-2000.

Paper Out Dots

CAUTION Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter.
This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation;
you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper
out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.

System Memory
Displays the amount of RAM installed.

Print Statistics
You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive
maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do
not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to
zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
• On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The
range is 0 to 30,000 hours.
• Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.
The range is 0 to 30,000 hours.
• Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes
the printer has printed during normal printer operation. The range is 0 to
2,147,483,647 shuttle strokes.
• Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The
range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print lines.
• 11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.
The range in print pages is 0 to 2,147,483,647 total inches of paper
movement divided by 11.
• Poweron Pages. The number of pages the printer has printed since
power-up.

240
 DIAGNOSTICS
SURE Menu
SCAN Submenu

Software Build
Displays the part number and version of the printer firmware.

Feature File
Displays the part number of the file if one has been downloaded to the printer.

Shuttle Type
Displays the type of shuttle installed, i.e. 2000s, 1500, 1000, 500, or high
definition.

Auto Dump
• Disable (factory default).
• Enable. When a printer get ‘E03x’ type of message on the operator panel,
a dump file will be automatically created and store in flash as file
“[Link]” or “[Link]” in the printer file system. This file can
be uploaded to the host using the PrintNet Enterprise Suite application.
Upon receipt of this file, it should be sent to Printronix Customer Support
for review and evaluation.

Printer Mgmt
Refer to the Printer Mgmt menu on page 242.

241
Chapter 4 Printer Mgmt Menu

Printer Mgmt Menu

Printer Mgmt

(from page 238) * = Factory Default

1
Only available if PNE Port is set to Ethernet.

PNE Port Mgmt Protocol PNE Port PNE Port Status Port Mgmt Port
Number 1 Timeout 1 Numb Number

Ethernet* UCP 3001* 100 Seconds* 3002* 3007*

USB PXML* 1025 - 65535 1-255 Seconds 1025 - 65535 1025 - 65535
Disable
Serial

PNE Port
This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to, via
Ethernet or USB. The factory default is Ethernet. If the network is not enabled,
the default is Disable.

Mgmt Protocol
Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port,
only one can be active at a time. This menu selects the active Management
Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The factory default is PXML.

PNE Port Number

This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PNE to connect
through. The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.

PNE Port Timeout

If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period, the
PNE session closes. The factory default is 100 seconds. The range is from 1
to 255 seconds.

Status Port Numb

This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status.
The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.

Mgmt Port Number

This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to
connect through. The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1025 to
65535.

242
 5 Interfaces

Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time (see “Auto
Switching Submenu” on page 94).

IMPORTANT To comply with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulatory

requirements all electrical signal interface cables connected to this
printer must be of a minimal quality level, be of the correct length, and
be properly installed.
The RS-232 port and parallel port interface cables must meet the
following specifications:
• The cable design must be double shielded with a copper braid over
an aluminum mylar foil and not just a conductive foil spiral wrapped
around a drain wire.
• The shield must terminate coaxially (360 degrees) to a metal
connector housing and not be terminated by just a simple wire lead.
• The cable length, including connectors, must be 3 meters or less.
• The cable connector anchor screws must be securely seated into
the printer receptor hardware.
For reference purposes only, two specific Centronics parallel port
cables that have been tested and found to comply with these
requirements are Belkin® part number F2A046-10 and Primelogic® part
number PLU 2823224. Other electrically equivalent cables are
acceptable.
This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.

Standard Host Interfaces:

• High Speed Serial Port (RS-232)
• USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus

243
Chapter 5 Overview

Optional Host Interfaces:

• Centronics Parallel
• IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional
• Ethernet 10/100BaseT
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel
interfaces.

Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection

Serial Port 5 4 3 2 1

(RS-232)
9 8 7 6

USB 2.0 Debug Port

Ethernet
10/100 BaseT

Figure 25. Cabinet Model Interface Connectors

Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection

Serial Port (RS-232)

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6
184951a

USB 2.0
Ethernet
10/100 BaseT
Debug Port

Figure 26. Pedestal Model Interface Connectors

244
RS-232 Serial Interface
NOTE: The RS-232 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with
the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA-232-E and
EIA-422-B.
The RS-232 serial interface enables the printer to operate with bit serial
devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data
transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates
of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 baud
rates are available.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232.

Table 15. Standard 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 lpm Models
RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

Receive Data (RD) 3 Transmit Status & Control 2 Chassis Ground 1

Data (TD)

Clear To Send (CTS) 5 Request To Send (RTS) 4 Signal Ground 7

Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 20

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 8

Table 16. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

Receive Data (RD) 2 Transmit Status & Control 3 Chassis/Signal Ground 5

Data (TD)

Clear To Send (CTS) 8 Request To Send (RTS) 7

Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 1

245
Chapter 5 USB

Receive Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.

Transmit Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status
and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.

USB
Menus
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) port is part of Auto Switching and is active
when the Host Interface menu is set to Auto Switching. It can also be selected
as the only Host Interface under the Host Interface menu by selecting USB.
A top level USB Port menu with two submenus is also available:
• Buffer Size in K. The input buffer size used by the USB port. The range
is from 1 to 16. The default is 16.
• Timeout. The Hotport Timeout value used to determine when the port is
inactive. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.

246
Centronics Parallel Interface

Table 17. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17

Return 20 Return 28

DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30

Return 21 Return 28

DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14

Return 22 Return 29

DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34,35,

Return 23 Return 28 36

DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 +5 Volts 18

Return 24 Return 29

DATA LINE 6 7
Return 25

DATA LINE 7 8
Return 26

DATA LINE 8 9
Return 27

DATA STROBE 1
Return 19

PAPER INSTRUCTION 15
Return 29

PRIME 31
Return 30

The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 15 feet (5 meters).

247
Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface

Centronics Parallel Interface Signals

Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the
host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8
allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or
disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu (see
page 98).
Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that
clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or
function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for
data transfer and the ONLINE key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is
in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive
data.
Prime. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a
warm start (printer is reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same
timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault. A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault.

248
 Compatibility Mode

IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface

The 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by
negotiation between the printer and the host.

Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 18).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data
lines.
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide
bidirectional communication.

Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines. (Half a
byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over the
lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.

Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.

249
Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface

Signals
Table 18 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on
the 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.

Table 18. 1284 Signals

Type of Mode
Pin Source of Data
Compatible Nibble Byte

1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host/Clk

2 Host/Printer Data 1 (LSB)

3 Host/Printer Data 2

4 Host/Printer Data 3

5 Host/Printer Data 4

6 Host/Printer Data 5

7 Host/Printer Data 6

8 Host/Printer Data 7

9 Host/Printer Data 8 (MSB)

10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk

11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy

12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq

13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag

14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck

15 Not Defined

16 Logic Grid

17 Chassis Grid

18 Printer Peripheral Logic High

19 Signal Ground (nStrobe)

20 Signal Ground (Data 1)

21 Signal Ground (Data 2)

22 Signal Ground (Data 3)

23 Signal Ground (Data 4)

24 Signal Ground (Data 5)

25 Signal Ground (Data 6)

250
 Signals

Table 18. 1284 Signals (continued)

Type of Mode
Pin Source of Data
Compatible Nibble Byte

26 Signal Ground (Data 7)

27 Signal Ground (Data 8)

28 Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)

29 Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)

30 Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)

31 Host nInit

32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail

33 Not Defined

34 Not Defined

35 Not Defined

36 Host nSelectIn 1284 Active 1284 Active

NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.
When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble mode, signal is set
high. If Byte mode, signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and
bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrup. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is on line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility mode idle phase.

251
Chapter 5 Ethernet

nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the

printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit —Resets init interface from the host.

Ethernet
Refer to the Integrated Network Interface User’s Manual for detailed
information on the ethernet interface.

252
 6 Reprogramming the
Security Key

Reprogramming the Security Key

The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a
Software Program Exchange (SPX) module. The SPX is an intelligent module
that plugs into the debug port on the back of the P8000. The SPX is used only
once; it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a
security key. This allows the end user or a service technician to enable
features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install
a new security key on the controller board.
The SPX is used at power-up only and is not left in the printer during normal
operation. Because it is a single-use disposable item the user is not required
to return it to the vendor or manufacturer.

How to Program the Security Key

1. Power off the printer.
2. On cabinet models, open the rear door. On pedestal models, refer to
Figure 27 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer.
3. Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown.

253
Chapter 6 Reprogramming the Security Key

A
Debug Port

SPX
184567a

Figure 27. Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port

4. Power on the printer. The printer will begin its boot-up sequence.
5. When the printer detects a valid SPX, the control panel displays:
“NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER”
NOTE: If an error message displays, find the message in the Message List in
Chapter 8 and follow the troubleshooting instructions.
6. Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence. The
display will read:
“PROGRAMMING. PLEASE WAIT.”
7. When the security key is reprogrammed, the display will read:
“UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX
Downld code if needed”
8. Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer.
9. Press the ENTER key. The printer will reboot itself and you may resume
normal printing.
10. You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature.
11. You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features
that have been added or enabled.

254
 7 Downloading Firmware

There is 256 MB of FLASH memory on the controller board. The printer

firmware which includes printer control languages (the “emulations”), the
engine control, and printer operating system software are loaded into FLASH
memory at the factory, but there are occasions when you may have to load
this software:
• Firmware upgrade to a newer level
• Changing to a different firmware (emulation) type
• Replacing a controller or reloading firmware if FLASH becomes corrupt.
Different firmware types may be included on a CD-ROM for printer upgrades.
The target firmware type should be copied to a computer’s hard disk. From
there, you can employ one of the various download methods presented in this
section. Downloading firmware can be accomplished through any host IO
installed on the printer, but may not be valid for all methods.
NOTE: The target firmware must be consistent with the options present in the
controller Security Key. Otherwise, the firmware download will be
prevented.
With exception to the manual two-key and manual three-key power-
up sequences, downloading new firmware does not require the user
to put the printer into any special mode. Rather, most downloading
methods are employed when the printer is ONLINE and ready to
receive data. This makes the download procedure easy.
FLASH is used to store the firmware, but it also contains a file system that
holds System and User Flash Files. User Flash Files consist of downloaded
fonts, logos, forms, setup files, feature files, CST files, and files that are
specific to the user’s setup or application. These files are either preserved or
deleted based on the download method used as shown in Table 19 on
page 256.

IMPORTANT Regardless of download method, any saved configurations will be

erased. Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have
printed or saved configurations on your host computer so they can be
restored after the download process is complete.

255
Chapter 7 Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)

Table 19. Firmware Download Methods

User FLASH
Firmware Download Method File Type(s)
Files

Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs the network option [Link] Preserved
installed, a browser, and know the IP address.

Windows Driver (any host IO). When the Windows Driver [Link] Preserved
is installed, downloading firmware can be done easily
through the About/Help tab.

Automatic download (any host IO). Using the [Link] Preserved

[Link], firmware can be downloaded from a
Windows Command Prompt without having to manually put
the printer into download mode.

Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key [Link] Preserved
(ADVANCE+CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer [Link]
into download mode. Firmware can be loaded through any
host IO port.

Manual three-key download (USB or Parallel). This [Link] Deleted

three-key power-up sequence should be used in situations [Link]
in which a new controller is installed, the program in FLASH
is corrupt, or a different firmware type will be installed.
Firmware must be loaded via USB or parallel (if installed).

PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the For a detailed description, refer
PrintNet Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This to the PrintNet Ethernet User's
is the most versatile and powerful method to upgrade Manual.
printers but requires your computer can run Java™
programs.

Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)

Using firmware with an .exe extension [Link] is convenient.
However, firmware with the .exe extension may not be available in all
situations. Download methods described in Table 19 which require the .prg
extension, [Link], is required (e.g., Windows Drivers and Web
Page).
The [Link] file can be extracted from the [Link] file by
executing the command in a Windows Command Prompt session:
FILENAME<Enter>
This will extract the [Link] file in the same directory where
[Link] was executed. For example, executing [Link] in the
directory C:\download will generate a file C:\download\[Link].

IMPORTANT Be sure to copy the [Link] file to your computer’s local drive
before executing commands in the Windows Command Prompt.

256
Web Page Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware with the .prg extension
[Link].
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the
Ethernet cable is connected.
2. Get the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the
menus).
3. Enter the printer’s IP address in your browser (e.g., [Link]
4. When prompted for a user name and password, enter “root” for user
name and click OK.
5. Click “System” in the Configuration box.

Figure 28. System Configuration Upgrade

6. Click the “Upgrade” button.

257
Chapter 7 Web Page Download

7. Browse to the directory or enter [Link] in the “File to upload”

field and click “Upgrade”. A Warning message opens.

Figure 29. Uploading Firmware File for Upgrade

8. Click “Ok” to continue. After a few minutes, you are prompted to reboot.
9. Click “Yes”.

Figure 30. Confirm Reboot

10. Wait until the printer is finished upgrading firmware.

Figure 31. Waiting for Firmware Upgrade Completion

11. When the Web Page is redirected, the download process in complete.

258
Windows Driver Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form [Link].
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in the ONLINE mode and that
desired host IO cables are connected.
2. Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the
[Link] website.
3. Once the Windows Driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer
driver and select Properties.
4. Click the About/Help tab to access the software download option.
5. Click the Firmware Update button as in Figure 32.

Figure 32. Updating Firmware

6. Enter the full path and location to the printer software.
For example, c:\download\[Link] where c:\download is the
directory where [Link] resides.
7. Click OK to send the software to the printer. To abort this operation, click
Cancel.
8. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.

259
Chapter 7 Automatic Download (.exe)

Automatic Download (.exe)

NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form [Link].
The firmware can be downloaded without requiring the user to
manually put the printer into download mode.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the
applicable host IO cables are connected.
2. Navigate to the directory where the target firmware resides. If the target
firmware is on the CD, insert the printer emulation software CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
NOTE: The target firmware must be in the format [Link] where the
FILENAME is a six digit number with the .exe extension
(e.g., [Link]).

IMPORTANT For USB connections, the Windows Driver must be installed.

3. Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the [Link]
products/[Link] website. During the installation, make sure to share
the printer when prompted and record the “Share name”.

Figure 33. Selecting to Share the Printer

260
IMPORTANT For USB connections, the printer must have a “Share name”
established.
4. The “Share name” will be needed when executing the [Link]
command. This should be accomplished during installation, but can be
verified at any time. Select the driver, right-click the mouse button and
select “Printer Properties”. Click the “Sharing” tab, make sure the “Share
this printer” box is checkmarked, and enter the “Share name”.

Figure 34. Setting Printer Properties Sharing Options

5. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
6. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).

261
Chapter 7 Manual Two-Key Download Sequence

7. Execute [Link] as follows:

Connection Type Enter Command

Parallel FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>

Serial mode COM1:9600,N,8,1 <Enter>

mode LPT1=COM1 <Enter>
FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>

USB FILENAME –a –pbSharedName <Enter>

where SharedName of the printer is the ‘Share
name’ entered during installation.

Ethernet FILENAME -n [Link] <Enter>

where [Link] represents the IP address.

IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.

Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
8. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.

Manual Two-Key Download Sequence

NOTE: This download method can be completed with firmware in the form of
[Link] or [Link].
The following steps prepare the printer for download. When the printer is in
the download mode, any host IO can be used to download the firmware.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3. Press and hold down the ADVANCE and CANCEL keys on the printer’s
control panel.
4. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5. After five seconds, release the front panel keys.
The printer must power-up so this may take to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” displays on the top line of the LCD before
proceeding.
6. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
7. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).

262
 8. Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
• “Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)” on page 264
• “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 264
• “Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 270
• “Sending Firmware via Serial” on page 271

Manual Three-Key Download Sequence

NOTE: If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if
flash memory is corrupt, or you want to delete all Flash User Files,
you must download software using the manual three-key download
method. This can be completed with firmware in the form
[Link] or [Link]. When the printer is in the
download mode, only USB or parallel can be used to download the
firmware.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3. USB Download:
Press and hold down the ADVANCE, CANCEL, and DOWN control panel
keys.
Parallel Download:
Press and hold down the TOF, CONFIG, and UP control panel keys.
NOTE: If the parallel option is not installed, the printer reverts to a USB
download.
4. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5. After five seconds, release the control panel keys.
6. The printer must power-up so this may take up to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“DOWNLOAD MODE USB” displays on the top line of the LCD before
proceeding.
7. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
8. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
9. Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
• “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 264
• “Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 270

263
Chapter 7 Sending Firmware in Download Mode

Sending Firmware in Download Mode

This section describes how to send the firmware data to the printer using the
desired host IO.
NOTE: The three-key download sequence only allows download through
USB or Parallel.
Although the program file [Link] is used in the examples, any file
with a Printronix header can be substituted in this process to download flash
files.

Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)

NOTE: You will need the IP Address of the printer.
1. Enter the following to start the LPR program:
lpr -S [Link] -P d1prn [Link]
where [Link] is the IP Address of the printer.

IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.

Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.

Sending Firmware via USB

This section explains how to download firmware through USB by remapping
LPT1 to the USB port. This can be completed with firmware in the form
[Link] or [Link].
If the PC or laptop you are using is connected to a network or the Microsoft
Loopback Adapter is installed, then proceed as shown. If not, you must first
complete the section “Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter” on page 265.
1. Remap the LPT1 port to USB by entering the following commands at the
command prompt:
NET USE LPT1\\Comp_Name\Shared_Name/Persistent:YES <Enter>
where
Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\Computer
Name tab
Shared_Name is the printer’s shared name found in the printer’s Properties\
Sharing tab.
2. To check status of connection type, enter the following commands at the
command prompt:
Net View \\Comp_Name <Enter>
where Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\
Computer Name tab.
Now the computer system is ready to send the firmware through USB.
3. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).

264
 Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter

4. Copy the file to the printer by entering these commands at the command
prompt:
copy /b [Link] lpt1: <Enter>
where [Link] is the target firmware
or
FILENAME –pb <Enter>
where [Link] is the target firmware.

IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.

Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
5. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
6. To unmap LPT1 from USB, enter the following in the command prompt:
NET USE LPT1 /DELETE<Enter>

Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter

Use this section if USB is required for the download when the laptop or PC is
not network connected. If your laptop or PC is already network connected, go
to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 264.
1. For Windows XP:
a. Go to the “Start” menu

b. Select “Control Panel”

c. Open the “Add Hardware Wizard”

For Windows 7:
a. Go to the “Start” menu

b. Select “Control Panel”

c. Open the “Device Manager”

265
Chapter 7 Sending Firmware in Download Mode

d. Start the “Add legacy hardware” process from the “Action” menu as
shown Figure 35.

Figure 35. Adding Legacy Hardware

2. Click “Next” in the initial “Welcome to the Add Hardware Wizard” screen.
The second screen will ask if you have already connected the hardware
to your computer.
3. Select “Yes,...hardware” and then click “Next”.

Figure 36. Hardware Connection Options

266
 Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter

4. Select “Add a new hardware device” (typically at the bottom of the

installed hardware list) and then click “Next”.

Figure 37. Adding a New Hardware Device

5. When asked how you would like to have the hardware installed, select the
“Advanced” option that allows you to select the hardware from a list. Then
click “Next”.

Figure 38. Selecting the Advanced Installation Method

267
Chapter 7 Sending Firmware in Download Mode

6. Select “Network adaptor”, then click “Next”.

Figure 39. Selecting Network Adapter Hardware

7. Select “Microsoft Loopback Adapter”, then click “Next”.

Figure 40. Selecting Microsoft Loopback Adapter as the Network Adapter Type

268
 Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter

8. Click “Next” to start installation.

Figure 41. Starting the Installation

9. After installation is complete, click “Finish” to close the wizard.

Figure 42. Complete Hardware Installation

269
Chapter 7 Sending Firmware in Download Mode

10. To verify installation, go back to the Control Panel and select “System” for
WinXP. Under the “Hardware” tab, select “Device Manager”.
For Windows 7, select “Device Manager” directly from Control Panel.
11. Select the “Network Adaptors” and expand the selection if necessary. You
should see “Microsoft Loopback Adaptor” listed. Leave all default
settings.

Figure 43. Utilizing the Device Manager to Verify Installation

12. Upon verification, go to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 264.

Sending Firmware via Parallel

This download method can be completed with firmware in the form
[Link] or [Link].
NOTE: The parallel option must be installed.
1. Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
copy /b [Link] lpt1: <Enter>
where [Link] is the target firmware
or
FILENAME –pb <Enter>
where [Link] is the target firmware

IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.

Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.

270
 Sending Firmware via Serial

Sending Firmware via Serial

Downloading firmware using serial RS-232 is not recommended due to the
size of the firmware and significant wait time required to complete the
process. Downloading through serial requires firmware in the form
[Link] only.
1. Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P <Enter>
copy /b [Link] com1 <Enter>
where [Link] is the target firmware.
NOTE: Some systems can only use the 9600 baud rate. The baud rate
information entered in the above commands must match the Baud
Rate setting saved in the Power-Up Config.

IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.

Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.

271
Chapter 7 Downloading Files to the Main File System

Downloading Files to the Main File System

User Files can be downloaded into the Main File System (onboard PCB
Flash) in a various ways as discussed in this section. This section does not
cover specific methods used by the emulations but rather general ways of
downloading files as shown in Table 20. Font download is discussed in a later
section.

Table 20. File Download Methods

File Download Method File Preparation

Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs to know the IP address and None required.
have a browser.

PTX_SETUP (any host IO). User can employ PTX_SETUP commands Binary (raw) data of the file is
around the file data to store the file into the Main File System. embedded within
PTX_SETUP commands.

Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key (ADVANCE + Run [Link] to add the
CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer into download mode. proper header to the file
Files can then be downloaded.

PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the PrintNet For a detailed description,
Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This is the most versatile refer to the PrintNet Ethernet
and powerful method to download files but requires your computer can User's Manual.
run Java™ programs.

NOTE: Depending on the file download method, the file itself may need to be
modified so that when it is downloaded to the printer, the printer
stores the file with the correct Main File System name and file type.

Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus

Files with the one of the filename extensions below (upper or lower case) are
considered system files and are not shown in the View File List or Delete Files
menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the extensions shown in
Table 21.

Table 21. Filename Extensions Not Shown In Menus

Extensions

*.bin *.inf *.ras

*.cpg *.lfi *.rfv

*.eng *.map *.sec

*.fon *.pat

*.gz *.qsm

272
 Sending Firmware via Serial

File Properties Not Shown in Menus

Files with one of the properties listed below (case sensitive) are considered
system files and are not shown in the View File List within the Delete Files
menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the one of the properties
shown in Table 22.

Table 22. File Properties Not Shown In Menus

Properties

Prot NetC NGif

Rmap Rfnt Rmnu

Rprg Eprg VERS

ASIC FPGA UMCA

Rval XHEX RULE

CRft Rver Rsec

SORT

Web Page Download

1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and the Ethernet
cable is connected.
2. Obtain the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the
menus).
3. Enter the IP address of the printer in your browser
(e.g., [Link]
4. Enter “root” for the user name when prompted, and click OK.
5. Click “Printer” in the Configuration box. The following webpage will
display. Click “File Management” to download the file.

273
Chapter 7 Web Page Download

Figure 44. Downloading Files using the File Management Webpage

6. Click “Browse” to navigate the directory and find the download file, then
click “Download File”.

Figure 45. Navigating to Download a File

274
 Sending Firmware via Serial

A notification displays indicating that the web page will refresh upon download
completion.

Figure 46. File Download Notification

PTX_SETUP Download
Use PTX_SETUP to load files into the Main File System. Refer to the
PTX_SETUP Chapter in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for
details.
Example loading a font named [Link]:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;“[Link]”
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data.
NOTE: DO NOT add LF/FF to the end of the binary data.
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””
PTX_END

Manual Two-Key Download

1. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2. Navigate to the directory with the target file (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy [Link] from your Starter Kit CD to the directory with the target
file.
4. Convert the file to a downloadable format using the following command at
the command prompt:
cnvt2fls file_name1 file_name2 file_name3 A FONT <Enter>
where
• file_name1 is the name of the file to be converted into the downloadable
format.
• file_name2 is the name of the file of the output file that will be downloaded
into the printer.

275
Chapter 7 Downloading Files to the SD Card

• file_name3 is the name of the file within the Main File System.
NOTE: The FONT parameter should only be used with fonts; otherwise, omit
this parameter
Example:
cnvt2fls [Link] [Link] [Link] A FONT <Enter>
This example creates the file “[Link]” that will place “[Link]” into the
Main File System.
5. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 262.
6. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 264. Substitute file_name2 in place of the firmware [Link].
The process is complete when the file successfully loads into flash memory
and the printer resets.
7. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded, go to the ADVANCED
USER menu, in the Main File System submenu. One of the files displayed
should include file_name3.

Downloading Files to the SD Card

SD files can be utilized by the printer and certain emulations such as PGL.
Since the SD file format is an industry standard, downloading files and fonts to
the SD card does not require special facilities within the printer. This allows
the user to copy files from their PC or laptop to the SD card as well as copy
printer files on the SD card to their PC or laptop.
NOTE: The printer will only locate files stored on the root directory of the SD
card. The name of the file within the SD card root directory is the
name shown in the SD File System submenu.
Alternatively, users can copy files from the Main File System to the SD card
by using the “Copy to SD” selection within the Main File System menu. Users
can also copy files from the SD card to the Main File System by using the
“Copy from SD” selection within the SD File System menu.
PGL forms, fonts, and logos can all be read from and stored onto SD cards as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.

IMPORTANT The SD card must be installed at the time of power-up and cannot be
removed until the printer is powered off.

276
 Downloading TrueType Fonts

Using TrueType Fonts

TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels. You
can download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into your
printer. The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as
[Link] and [Link].
The following sections discuss how to:
• download TrueType fonts (page 277)
• select and print downloaded TrueType fonts (page 279)
• use TrueType fonts to print DBCS using UTF-8 (page 279).

IMPORTANT Line Matrix printers use bitmap fonts for smaller characters (less than or
equal to 2x2). Since TrueType fonts are scalable fonts, use these fonts
for sizes greater than 2x2.

Downloading TrueType Fonts

You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following
methods:
• PTX_SETUP (page 275)
• Web Page (page 273)
• PGL Emulation (see below)
• Adding a Font Header/Manual Two-Key Download (page 278)
• Labeling Applications (page 279)
Once a TrueType font is downloaded, it is stored in the Main File System or
SD File System as a resident font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the
downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes it. The user can
find a list of all printer resident fonts within the Main File System or SD File
System submenus under ADVANCED USER. User downloaded fonts can be
deleted from these same submenus. If within the Main File System, the user
is recommended to perform an Optimize & Reboot function.

PGL Emulation
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL
command to the font and then sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL
FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName TrueType font name, e.g. [Link]
FontSize TrueType font size, e.g. file size for [Link]
Location The download location. By default, “DISK” represents the Main
File System (Flash), while “EMC” designates the SD card. The
PGL menu “Storage Select” can be changed to force “DISK” to
store fonts and other PGL elements to the SD card.

277
Chapter 7 Using TrueType Fonts

Example:
~FONTLOAD;[Link];60548;DISK
(Insert binary data of [Link] here.)
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate printer I/O port
while the printer is online, similar to other print files.
Example:
copy/b [Link] lpt1 or LPT1

Adding a Header/Manual Two-Key Download

To download a TrueType font to the printer through the manual two-key
download mode, first add a header to the font, then place the printer in
Download mode and download the font. A TrueType font can be converted to
a downloadable format by appending a header to the font file using the
[Link] utility and a batch file as described in this section.

Header for Main File System

1. Start a Command prompt window.
2. Copy (or unzip) [Link] and [Link] from your Starter Kit CD to
your working directory (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy the target TrueType font (.ttf) file to your working directory.
4. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
5. Convert the TrueType font file .ttf (e.g., [Link]) to a downloadable format
.dwn with the following command:

addtthdr filename <Enter>

where filename is the font name without an extension

(e.g., addtthdr arial).
This creates the file [Link].
6. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 262.
7. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 264. Substitute the file *.dwn (e.g., [Link]) in place of the
firmware [Link].
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash
memory and the printer resets itself.
8. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the ADVANCED
USER -> Main File System submenu. One of the files shown should
include the original true type font name (e.g., [Link]).

278
 Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts

Header for SD Card

As discussed in “Downloading Files to the SD Card” on page 276, the process
to copy TrueType fonts to the SD card can be employed from a PC or laptop
by copying the target font file (*.ttf) onto the SD card root directory. The SD
card can then be placed in the printer and used accordingly.

Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications,
such as Codesoft, Loftware, and Bartender. Contact the appropriate company
for more details.

Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts

After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, you
can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the command as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.

To Print ASCII Characters

You can print characters from your font using the currently selected character
set. You can also select a new character set using the ISET command.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME [Link]
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1

To Print All Characters

You can print all of the characters in your font using UTF-8. You must have a
UTF-8 datastream to print.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;’UTF8’
FONT;NAME [Link]
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$UTF-8 data$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1

279
Chapter 7 Demo Facility

Demo Facility
To exercise the function of a Printronix printer in an environment where there
is no host computer system available, you may need to execute a demo test
file from the menu system. When executed, the demo test file will run through
the emulations as if the host computer sent the file. Once completed, it will run
the file again until terminated.
This section describes how to download, configure, execute, and terminate
the demo. Demo files are treated as other User Flash Files and therefore are
preserved across downloads by default.

Downloading a Demo File

1. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2. Navigate to the directory with the target demo file (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy (or unzip) [Link] from your Starter Kit CD to the directory
with the target file.
4. Convert the file to a downloadable format with the following command at
the command prompt:

demo2fls file_name <Enter>

where file_name is the name of the file to be converted into the

downloadable format.

The output file for download replaces the file_name extension with “.fls”.
Example: demo2fls [Link] <Enter>
This creates the file “[Link]” that will place “[Link]” into the Main File
System when downloaded.
5. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 262.
6. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 264. Substitute the file *.fls (e.g., [Link]) in place of the firmware
[Link].
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash
memory and the printer resets itself.
7. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the
DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. One of the printer tests shown
should include file_name.

Configuring the Printer to Run a Demo File

This facility does not attempt to identify which emulation a particular demo file
is designed for. The user must configure the printer for the appropriate
emulation before invoking the demo. The demo will inherit all menu
configuration parameters when executed. The user is responsible to properly
configure the forms size, typeface, orientation, etc. This facility will not restore
any configuration settings when the demo file is finished printing.

280
 Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts

Starting a Demo File

The demo file is initiated by selecting its Flash File name and pressing
ENTER within the DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. This causes the
printer to go online and print the demo file. Once the demo file starts, it will
repeat automatically until the demo file sequence is stopped.

IMPORTANT DO NOT run a demo file if the printer is in the middle of another test or
host job. This will cause unexpected results. Similarly, do not send host
jobs when running demo tests.

Pausing a Demo File

Pause the demo by placing the printer OFFLINE (press the ONLINE button).
To resume printing, go back ONLINE.

Stopping a Demo File

Stop the demo by executing a soft reset on the printer (press the LEFT and
RIGHT keys simultaneously). This will resume normal operation.

Deleting a Demo File

Delete demo files similar to any other file in the Main File System. Once
deleted, the file will no longer appear as a selection in the Printer Tests
submenu.

281
Chapter 7 Demo Facility

282
 8 Troubleshooting

Cleaning Requirements
Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation,
whichever occurs first. If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for
heavy duty printing, clean it more often.

WARNING Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.

Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen.
Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.
Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.
Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.

Exterior Cleaning
Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent
soap. (Dishwashing liquid works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or
chemical solvents. Clean the windows with plain water or mild window
cleaner. Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning
solution directly onto the printer.

283
Chapter 8 Cleaning Requirements

Interior Cleaning
Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printer. This is
normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be periodically removed to avoid
degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the
platen and ribbon path.

Ribbon

Ribbon
Cartridge

Tab (2) Ribbon

Tension Knob
Tractor (2)

Blue Tractor
Lock (2) Splined Shaft

Hammer Bank
Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Paper Support (2)
Vertical
Tab Slot (2) Position Knob

184555b

Platen Lever
Ribbon Cartridge Platen Stop
Interface Air Shroud
Assembly

Figure 47. Interior Printer Components

284
 Interior Cleaning

To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps.

1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.
2. Open the printer cover.
3. Fully raise the platen lever.
4. Unload the paper.
5. Remove the ribbon cartridge.
6. Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path.
7. Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover
assembly, and base casting with a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush
(such as a toothbrush). Vacuum up the residue.

CAUTION Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to
avoid damage. To avoid corrosion damage, use only alcohol when
cleaning the printer mechanical elements. Solutions used to clean
mechanical elements must contain no water.
8. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.
9. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or
ribbon lint.
10. Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened
with anhydrous alcohol. (The platen is the thick silver bar behind the
hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated.)

CAUTION When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the
hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the
hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle
assembly.
11. Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower
cabinet.
12. Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not
wet) with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution. Dry the
lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean, lint-free cloth.
13. Install the ribbon and load paper.

285
Chapter 8 Diagnosing Problems

Diagnosing Problems
This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal
printer operation.

Bar Code Verification

The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that
the bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality
procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are
being printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will
increase overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes,
and achieve high first-time read rates. A high first-time read rate is an
increasingly important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually
entered data is not acceptable as a backup function. Verification also
minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or
unaccountable bar codes.

286
 Printing a Hex Dump

Printing a Hex Dump

A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to
its hexadecimal equivalent, listing all ASCII character data received from the
host computer with their corresponding two-digit hexadecimal codes. Hex
dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems.
Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters
are indicated by a period (.).
Figure 48 shows an example of a hex dump.

Figure 48. Hex Dump Sample

287
Chapter 8 Diagnosing Problems

The CD contains a utility called [Link]. This utility can be run from a
DOS window to convert an input file into a hexadecimal equivalent. The
output from this utility can then be used to compare what is received when
printing a hex dump.
Usage: hexcode <input file> <output file>
Sample output:
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288
 Most Frequent Problems and
Printing Solutions
a Hex Dump

Most Frequent Problems and Solutions

Problem Corrective Action

Poor print quality • Adjust the forms thickness lever setting. Print quality
• dark print can be affected if it is too loose or too tight.

• light print
• Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too
• light print on half of the page loose or too tight.
• missing dots or characters • Make sure the ribbon threads between the
• smeared print hammerbank cover and ribbon mask, as shown on the
ribbon path diagram on the pedestal models. Turn the
• wavy vertical lines ribbon cartridge knob clockwise to ensure that the
ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
• Be sure to use an approved ribbon.

Torn or damaged forms • Reset the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.
• Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
right tractor. Too high a paper tension can cause
tearing of the tractor feed holes.
• Check the paper slot for foreign material.
• For thick, multipart forms, set the OPEN PLATEN @
BOF to enable. Refer to the Printer Control Menu in
the User’s Manual.

Loss of forms position • Set the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.

Lost dots (incompletely formed • Lower the forms thickness lever.

characters)
• Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
Horizontally or vertically right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too
misaligned character positions loose or too tight.
Erratic character height • Clear the paper path of any obstructions.
Vertically misaligned print • If problems persists, contact a service representative.

289
Chapter 8 Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors

Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors

If the printer displays LCD error messages such as ‘E03E DSI CXIWX”, “BAD
NVM”, or “ILL NVM”, reboot the printer (turn power on and off) and continue. If
the problem persists, then invoke a diagnostic option that will capture the
failure dump in a flash file that can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise
Suite and sent to Printronix Customer Support Center for analysis
(see Appendix D, page 371).
This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the
information. If you choose to perform this diagnostic perform the following
procedure:
1. Within the DIAGNOSTICS section, set the Auto Dump menu to Enable.
2. When the failure happens, reboot the printer and wait for it to power up
again.
3. Within the ADVANCED USER section, go to the Main File System
submenu and then to View File List.
4. Verify that files ‘autodmp1’ or ‘autodmp2’ are present in the file list.
5. If present, use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host
computer.
6. Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files
along with the printer’s configuration printout. Refer to the PrintNet
Enterprise Suite User’s Manual on how to accomplish these tasks.

Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in alphabetical order in Table 23. These
error messages are used in ASCII products.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
• Operator correctable
• Field service required
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 23.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CANCEL key to clear the error
message and status indicator and resume printing. If the fault message
reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and
procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the
procedures described there must be performed only by your
authorized service representative.

290
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention

If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized
service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CANCEL key. If the message
disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If
the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

12 VOLT FAILED* No The power supply 12 volt Contact your authorized

output has failed. service representative.1

B12 ERROR: PROGRAM Yes The printer does not see There is no program in printer
MISSING* a program in flash memory. Download printer
memory. firmware again.

B13 ERROR: NOT No Attempting to download a Cycle power to see if the

COMPATIBLE* program that is not message clears, if not, contact
compatible with the your authorized service
printer. representative.1

B20 STATUS :00% No Status message No action is required.

DOWNLOAD MODE informing the operator
that software is being
downloaded. Percentage
figure indicates
approximate amount
loaded into the printer.

B21 STATUS: PRINTER No Status message No action is required.

RESET informing the operator
that the printer is
undergoing a system
reset.

B22 ERROR: No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the
DECOMPRESS SIZE* passed boot initialization message clears, if not, contact
tests. your authorized service
representative.1

B23 ERROR: No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the
DECOMPRESS CKSUM* passed boot initialization message clears, if not, contact
tests. your authorized service
representative.1

291
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

B30 STATUS: N/A Status message: the No action is required.

INITIALIZING... printer is running its
initialization routines after
startup and successful
memory tests.

B50 STATUS: No Saved version of Panel Reload released Firmware.

PANEL CODE BAD Code is corrupt.

B51 STATUS: XX% No Status message: printer No action required.

LOADING... boot-up routines are
loading printer system
software into flash
memory and SDRAM.

Bxx ERROR: NO No No Downloader was Reload released Firmware.

DOWNLOADER FOUND found while downloading
a file.

BAD NVM CALL 1 Yes Printer firmware code 1. Cycle power. Run the
BAD NVM CALL 2 error with the Novram print job again. If the
BAD NVM CALL 3 module that stores message appears, load
BAD NVM CALL 4 configurations and the latest emulation
BAD NVM CALL A statistics. software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
record the exact display
message, follow the
instructions on page 290,
“Diagnostics for EXX,
BAD NVM, or ILL NVM
Errors”, and contact your
authorized service
representative.1

x/y BARCODES / Yes Printer detects fewer Press the ONLINE key.
Not Found barcodes than the set
value for "Barcodes on
Page" menu option. x
represents the number of
barcodes not found, and
y represents the
"Barcodes on Page"
value.

292
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

BUFFER OVERRUN Yes The print buffer has Verify that the printer matches
overflowed on a serial the host serial interface
interface. The printed configuration settings for Data
output may contain Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
random * (asterisk) Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
characters. Make a Terminal Ready, and Request
configuration printout. to Send. Set printer serial
interface parameters to match
those of the host.

CARTRIDGE AT Yes Integrated Print Install a new cartridge.

END POINT Management System
Change Cart software has determined
that the cartridge ribbon
is out of ink.

CLEAR PAPER JAM Yes No paper motion. Clear jam and reload paper. If
this message recurs, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

CLEARING PROGRAM No Status message: No action is required.

FROM FLASH emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The
old program is now being
deleted from flash
memory.

CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open. Close the platen lever.

COIL HOT ERR 1 No One or more hammer Contact your authorized

COIL HOT ERR 2 coils are overheating. service representative.1

COIL TEMP FAIL Yes The coil temperature was Allow printer to cool
never set or the attempt completely, then set coil
to set it did not result in temperature. If message
correct numbers. continues to display, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

CARTRIDGE CONNECTION No The hardware cannot 1. Make sure the ribbon

ERROR communicate properly cartridge is seated
See User Manual with the cartridge. properly.
2. Remove and replace the
ribbon cartridge if
necessary.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative.1

293
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

CARTRIDGE Yes An incompatible ribbon Install a cartridge designed for

INCOMPATIBLE cartridge was installed in this printer.
Use correct cart the printer.

CARTRIDGE MISSING Yes The ribbon cartridge is 1. Make sure a ribbon

Install new cart missing or installed cartridge is installed in the
Press ONLINE improperly. printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated
properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1

CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED Yes The ribbon cartridge is 1. Make sure a ribbon
Re-install Cart not properly positioned. cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated
properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1

CARTRIDGE/REGION Yes The incorrect cartridge Install Region X ribbon

X MISMATCH type is being used for the cartridge in the printer.
Use Correct Cart printer. “X” indicates the NOTE: Specify the region of
region of the printer. the printer when
ordering ribbons.

CARTRIDGE/ SHUTTLE Yes This message displays Install Standard Life Cartridge.
MISMATCH when an Extended Life
Use Correct Cart Cartridge is mounted on
a 500 lpm printer.

CARTRIDGE/ Yes The incorrect cartridge Install the correct ribbon

TIPSIZE MISMATCH type is being used for the cartridge type in the printer.
Use Correct Cart printer.

CATASTROPHIC ERROR No Fatal error in printer. Contact your authorized

customer service
representative.1

294
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

D50 STATUS No Status message: The No action is required.

UPGRADING PANEL printer is upgrading the
panel, where %XX
represents the
percentage completed.

D51 STATUS No Status message: The No action is required.

PROGRAMMING DONE printer is loading
firmware, where %XX
represents the
percentage completed.

DIAGNOSTIC PASSED No Status message: the No action is required.

printer passed its
memory and hardware
initialization tests.

DO NOT POWER OFF No Status message: The No action is required, but do

printer is performing an not power off the printer until
operation that must be the operation is complete.
completed before you
can cycle power.

DP FIFO Busy* Yes There is a timing problem 1. Cycle power. Run the
in the Engine Controller print job again. If the
firmware. message appears,
download the emulation
software again.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

295
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

E00 EXE @ ADDR0 Yes An illegal or unsupported 1. Cycle Power. Run the
E01A TYPE 0x40 instruction was attempted print job again. If the
E01B TYPE 0x60 in the application message appears, load
E02 MACHINE CHK program. the latest emulation
E03A DSI HASH L software.
E03B DSI HASH S 2. Cycle power. Run the
E03C DSI BAT PL print job again. If the
E03D DSI BAT PS message appears again,
E03E DSI CXIWX record the exact display
E03F DSI CXOWX message, follow the
E03G DSI ECXIWX instructions on page 290,
E03H DSI ECXOWX and contact your
E04A ISI NO TRA authorized service
E04B ISI DIRECT representative.1
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
E12 SYSTEM CALL
E13 TRACE INT
E16 ITRANS MISS
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT O BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT

See User Manual

296
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

E-Net Test Unavailable Yes The ethernet did not Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
initialize correctly. Ready” to display, then retry
operation. If it still fails, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

ERROR OCCURRED Yes An interim message that Wait. When the asterisk (*)
FLUSHING QUEUES* displays while the printer stops rotating, a different fault
discards host data it message will appear:
cannot use because a troubleshoot the final
fault condition exists. message.
While this message
displays, the asterisk (*)
rotates.

ERROR NOR FLASHED No Problem programming Contact your authorized

WAS Boot Code. service representative.1
NOT CLEARED

ERROR: DC PROGRAM Yes The printer cannot find Download the program again.
NOT VALID the data controller If the message appears,
program or the validation contact your authorized
checksum is corrupt. service representative.1

ERROR: LOCKED No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Contact your authorized

SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n is the serial number of service representative.1
n the printer’s security key.
The SPX serial number
does not match the
printer’s serial number
and cannot be used with
the printer.

ERROR: NVRAM FAILURE No The non-volatile SRAM Contact your authorized

on the controller board service representative.1
has failed.

ERROR: PROGRAM NOT Yes The printer is not Use the correct emulation
COMPATIBLE compatible with the software options(s) for this
downloaded program. printer model.

ERROR: PROGRAM NOT Yes The printer does not see There is no program in printer
VALID a program in flash memory. Download the
memory. emulation.

ERROR: SECURITY KEY No The security key is not Contact your authorized
NOT DETECTED present or failed. service representative.1

ERROR: WRONG No The printer received the Contact your authorized

CHECKSUM complete program but the service representative.1
checksum did not match.
The data may have been
corrupted during
downloading.

297
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

ERROR: WRONG OEM No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized
debug port is not service representative.1
intended for this model
printer or this OEM.

ERROR: WRONG PRINTER No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized
TYPE debug port is not service representative.1
intended for this model
printer or this OEM.

ETHERNET DETECTED N/A Status message No action is required.

indicating that the
Network Interface Card
has established
connection.

ETHERNET INITIALIZING No Status message: the No action is required.

internal Network Interface
Card is processing the
boot procedure. (May
occur with older versions
of microcode.)

EXCEPTION ERROR No An EXCEPTION Contact your authorized

INTERRUPT has service representative.1
occurred.

EXCESS RIBBON WEAR Yes Status message that Install a new ribbon.
Install New RBN displays when ribbon
reaches end of life,
whether the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled or not.

EXHAUST FAN FLT Yes Sensor cannot detect Power off the printer and
(Cabinet model only) current in fan circuit. remove the paper path (see
Maintenance Manual). Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

298
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

FIRMWARE ERROR* No Application software tried Contact your authorized

to perform an illegal service representative.1
printer function or
damaged memory
detected on the controller
board.

FLASH: CHECK RETURN No Printer encountered an Contact your authorized

error while trying to service representative.1
program Flash memory.

FLASH: WAS NOT No Printer encountered an Contact your authorized

CLEARED error while trying to service representative.1
program Flash memory.

FLASH: WRITE ERROR # 2 No Printer encountered an Contact your authorized

error while trying to service representative.1
program Flash memory.

FM HEADER ERROR* No Frame Header Error. Contact your system

Application software has administrator.
violated header
parameters.

FRAMING ERROR Yes The printed output may Make a configuration printout.
contain random ! Set printer serial interface
(exclamation point) parameters to match host
characters. configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
Terminal Ready, and Request
to Send.

GENERATING XX% No NAND FLASH is being No action is required.

NAND FLASH TABLE read and system tables
are being initialized.

H00: PCI SLOT ? No The controller board is Contact your authorized

See User Manual not communicating with a service representative.1
PCI card. This could
indicate a bad PCI card,
poor connection, or
problem in the PCI bus.

H01: PCI J12 No The controller board is Contact your authorized

See User Manual not communicating with service representative.1
the PCI card in PCI slot
J12. This could indicate a
bad PCI card, poor
connection, or problem in
the PCI bus.

299
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

<Online, etc...> No Status message: The No action is required. If the

Half Speed Mode controller samples the message appears often,
operating temperature of contact your authorized
key components of the service representative.1
print mechanism. When
higher than normal
temperatures are sensed,
the print speed is
automatically reduced by
50% and the message
sent the LCD. When the
components cool down,
the print speed returns to
100% and the message
clears.

HAMMER COIL BAD* No Hammer coil # failed Contact your authorized

#, #, #, ...etc current test at power up. service representative.1

HAMMER DRIVER No Driver Circuit Bad. The Contact your authorized

CIRCUIT BAD* hammer coil count test service representative.1
failed.

HAMMERBANK NOT No Hammer Bank Not Contact your authorized

INSTALLED* Installed. Self-test service representative.1
routines do not detect
hammer coils at printer
start-up.

HMR BANK FAN FLT Yes Sensor cannot detect Check that fan cable is
current in fan circuit. connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

ILL EXT BUS ACC* No Illegal External Bus Contact your authorized
Access. Firmware error service representative.1
on the controller board.

300
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

ILL NVM VALUE 5 Yes Illegal value was stored 1. Cycle power. Run the
ILL NVM VALUE 6 into the Novram module. print job again. If the
ILL NVM VALUE 7 message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
record the exact display
message, follow the
instructions on page 290,
“Diagnostics for EXX,
BAD NVM, or ILL NVM
Errors”, and contact your
authorized service
representative.1

ILLGL OPR ACCSS* No Illegal Operand Contact your authorized

Accessed. Firmware service representative.1
error on controller board.

INITIALIZING... Yes This message indicates No action is required.

the printer is beginning its
initialization process.

INTAKE FAN CHECK Yes Sensor cannot detect Cycle power. If the message
current in fan circuit. appears, press CLEAR. If the
message does not clear,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

INTERRUPT UNUSED No The controller board Cycle power. If this message

VECTOR 00 receives an interrupt it occurred once and never
does not understand. The again, you can ignore it. If the
problem can be created message reappears or
by electrical noise, by a appears consistently, contact
software problem, or by a your authorized service
hardware problem. representative.1

LO DRV. SHORT * No Lower Driver Short. Contact your authorized

Circuit(s) on the hammer service representative.1
bank or in the hammer
bank power cable
shorted to ground.

LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of paper. Load paper and press
CLEAR.

301
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

LOADING PROGRAM No Status message: the new No action is required.

FROM PORT XX% emulation program is
loading into printer RAM.
XX% indicates how much
of the program has
loaded.

LOADING PROGRAM INTO No The printer has deleted No action is required.

FLASH the previous program
from flash memory and is
loading the new program
into flash memory.

NEW SPX DETECTED No The printer detects an Contact your authorized

PRESS ENTER SPX installed at the service representative.1
debug port and the SPX
is valid for the printer.

NON VOLATILE MEMORY No Large emulations reduce Contact your authorized

FAILED the amount of space service representative.1
available for saving
configurations, which
means that sometimes
fewer than eight
configurations can be
saved.

ONLINE N/A Printer state message: No action is required.

printer is online and in
communication with host.

PANEL No Panel Code has a bad Reload released firmware.

BAD CHECKSUM Checksum.

PAP BAD TABLE* No Paper Bad Table. The Contact your authorized
paper feed process on service representative.1
the controller board has a
corrupted table.

PAP FD DRVR CIR* No Paper Feed Driver Contact your authorized

See Manual Circuit. The paper feed service representative.1
driver circuit on the
controller board is
drawing too much
current.

PAP FIFO OVERFL* No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized
Overflow. Firmware error service representative.1
on controller board.

PAP FIFO UNDRFL* No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized
Underflow. Firmware service representative.1
error on controller board.

302
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

PAP ILLGL ST* No Paper Illegal State. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PAP INVLD CMD* No Paper Invalid Command. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PAP INVLD PARM* No Paper Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PAPER REQUESTED Yes A paper size mismatch is Check the paper size setting
Install A4 detected. and if necessary, load new
media and change the paper
size menu option.

PARITY ERROR Yes The printed output may Check your printer serial
contain a random ? interface parameter settings; if
(question mark) necessary, adjust them so that
characters. they match the settings of the
attached host.

PLAT INV CMD* No Platen Invalid Command. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PLAT INV PARM* No Platen Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PLAT INV STATE* No Platen Invalid State. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PLEASE WAIT... N/A Status message: the No action is required.

RESET IN PROGRESS printer finished loading
the program into flash
memory and is
automatically resetting
itself.

POWER SUPPLY HOT Yes Power supply sensors Check printer environment. If
report high temperatures. hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized
service representative if this
occurs frequently.1

PRINTER HOT Yes This message indicates Check printer environment. If

internal temperatures of hot or dusty, relocate printer.
80° Celsius or higher Contact your authorized
(176° Fahrenheit). service representative if this
occurs frequently.1

303
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

PRINTER UNDER REMOTE No Status message: The No action is required.

CONTROL printer is under the
control of PrintNet
Enterprise (PNE) remote
management software.

PROCESSOR HALTED No Real-time System Contact your authorized

EC_FAULT_RTSYS2 Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PROTECTED INSTR* No Protected Instruction. Contact your authorized

Firmware error on service representative.1
controller board.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
CHECK ERROR Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected:
Type Check, Limit Check,
Range Check, or No
Current Point Defined.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
DICTIONARY ERROR Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected:
Dictionary Full, Dictionary
Stack Overflow, or
Dictionary Stack
Underflow.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
INVALID ACCESS Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected:
Invalid Access, Invalid
Font, or Invalid Exit.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
I/O ERROR Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected: I/O
Error, Invalid File Access,
Undefined File, Interrupt,
or Time Out.

304
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
JOB ABORTED Postscript/PDF failed to will continue with the next job.
process a job, e.g. an
unsupported command or
a large job which requires
more DRAM to process.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
STACK ERROR Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected:
Stack Overflow, Stack
Underflow, Exec Stack
Overflow, or Invalid
Restore.

PS/PDF ERROR: Yes Fault displayed when Check the Postscript/PDF job
SYNTAX ERROR Postscript/PDF failed to for syntax (Postscript) errors.
process a job. One or Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
more of the following will continue with the next job.
errors were detected:
Syntax Error, Unmatched
Mark, Undefined,
Undefined Results, or
Unknown Error.

PWR SUPP VOLT * No Power Supply Voltage. Replace power supply board.
The power supply has
failed.

REMOVE USED SPX No Status message: An SPX Contact your authorized

THEN PRESS ENTER is depleted because it service representative.1
has successfully
reprogrammed the
security key on the
controller board.

RESTORING BOOT CODE No Normal download No action is required.

initialization message.

RIB INVLD CMD* Yes Ribbon Invalid Cycle power. Run the print job
See User Manual Command. Firmware again. If the message
error on the controller appears, download the
board. emulation software again. If
the message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

RIBBON STALL Yes The controller board does Check the ribbon path for
not detect ribbon jams. Turn the Ribbon Tension
movement. Knob clockwise a few
rotations. If necessary, install
a new ribbon.

305
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

RIBBON UNDER 2% Yes Status message Install a new ribbon.

Change RBN Soon indicating the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled and
ribbon ink level is 2%.

SD CARD ERROR Yes The printer has been Power down, reseat card, and
Remove SD Card powered up with a card in power up again. If error
the SD slot, but the card persists, power down, remove
is not functioning card, and try another card.
properly. The card could
be a compact flash card
or a non-supported card.

SD FILE EXISTS Yes A write operation to the Enable overwriting of files on

Enable Overwrite SD has failed because the SD using the overwrite
the file already exists on files menu.
the SD card and the
overwriting of existing
files is disabled.

SD FILESYS FULL Yes The SD file system is Delete files on the SD card to
Delete Files completely full. make space.

SD FILESYS FULL Yes A write operation to the Delete files on the SD card to
File Too Big SD has failed because make space.
the file is too big to fit in
the remaining space on
the SD card.

SD FILESYS WRITE Yes A write operation to the Ensure that the S

Check SD SD has failed for an D card is inserted correctly
unknown reason. and that the SD card is a
supported SDHC card.

SD INSERTED Yes The SD card has been Turn off the printer and insert
Reboot Printer inserted after the printer the SD card only when the
was already powered up. printer is not powered on.

SD NOT FOUND Yes A write operation to the Ensure that an SD card is

Insert SD Card SD could not be inserted correctly and that the
Pwr Off Printer performed because the SD card is a supported SDHC
SD card was not card.
detected.

SD READING Yes The SD card is currently Wait until reading completes.

Do not Remove reading files.

SD REMOVED Yes The SD card has been Turn off the printer and
Reboot Printer removed after the printer remove the SD card only
was already powered up. when the printer is off.

306
 Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

SD WRITE FAIL Yes A write operation to the Ensure that the write protect
WRITE PROTECTED SD has failed because tab on the SD card is not
Check SD Card the SD card is write active. If the write protect tab
protected. is not active, use another SD
card.

SD WRITING Yes The SD card is currently Wait until the write or erase
Do not Remove writing or erasing files. operation completes.

SDSC CARD Yes The printer has been Power down, remove SD card,
NOT SUPPORTED powered up with an and insert an SDHC card in
Remove SD Card SDSC card, and SDSC the printer.
cards (< 4 GB) are not
supported.

SECURITY VIOLATION* No Security code of PAL on Contact your authorized

controller board does not service representative.1
match code of firmware
on the controller board.

SECURITY KEY NOT No The security key is not Contact your authorized
DETECTED present or has failed. service representative.1

SF ERROR No Structured Field Error. Not a printer problem. Have

Application software has the system administrator
violated structured data correct applications data or
field parameters. configuration.

SHUT DRVR CIR* No The shuttle driver circuit Contact your authorized
See User Manual on the controller board is service representative.1
drawing too much
current.

SHUTL INV CMD* No Shuttle Invalid Contact your authorized

Command. Firmware service representative.1
error on controller board.

SHUTL INV PARM* No Shuttle Invalid Contact your authorized

Parameter. Firmware service representative.1
error on controller board.

SHUTL OVR SPEED* No The shuttle is oscillating Contact your authorized

too rapidly. service representative.1

SHUTTLE JAM Yes No shuttle movement or Check for obstruction to

shuttle moving at the shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or
wrong speed. platen lever closed too tightly.
If fault source is not apparent,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

307
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

SHUTTLE STALL Yes The shuttle is not moving. Set the platen lever to match
the thickness of paper, but not
too tightly. Check and adjust
the platen gap. Inspect the
ribbon mask for deformation
that snags and interferes with
shuttle movement. If fault
source is not apparent,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

SHUTTLE TYPE NOT No The shuttle type was not Contact your authorized
SUPPORTED* detected at power-up or service representative.1
the shuttle installed in the
printer is not supported
by the firmware.

SOFTWARE ERROR* No Application software tried Contact your authorized

CYCLE POWER to perform illegal printer service representative.1
function, or damaged
logic circuits found on
controller board.

SPX FOUND, ERROR: No The controller board does Contact your authorized
KEY NOT DETECTED not have a security key. service representative.1

SPX NOT NEEDED No The user has attempted Contact your authorized
OPTIONS ENABLED to use the SPX to turn on service representative.1
printer options that are
already enabled.

STACKER FAULT Yes Stacker is not functioning Check for obstructions in the
correctly. stacker area. If fault persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

STACKER FULL Yes Status message: the Unload the stacker. If fault
power paper stacker is persists, contact your
full of paper. authorized service
representative.1

STACKER JAM Yes This message is 1. Open the cabinet rear door
triggered if there is paper and check for obstructions
inside the throat of the preventing elevator
stacker elevator, but the movement. Remove any
elevator is not moving. obstructions.
2. Run the print job again. If
the message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1

308
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 23. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

TCB CORRUPTED* No Task Control Block Contact your authorized

Corrupted. Firmware service representative.1
error on controller board.

TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message reported Refer to the Printronix P8000
by the Printer Manager Maintenance Manual.
when ethernet interface
option is installed. The
network address given in
the printer properties was
reached, but the printer
port is busy.

UP DRV. SHORT* No Upper Driver Short. Cycle power to see if the

Hammer driver circuits on message clears, if not, contact
the boards shorted to your authorized service
ground. representative.1

UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX No Status message: An SPX Remove SPX and download
Downld code if needed has successfully code if needed.
upgraded the
security key on the
controller board.

WELD NOT DETECT No The cartridge weld was Contact your authorized
See User Manual not detected. service representative.1

WELD SNSR ERROR No The cartridge sensor 1. Make sure your cartridge
See User Manual could not be calibrated. is properly seated.
2. Contact your authorized
service representative. 1

WELD SNSR MISSING Yes The incorrect cartridge 1. Make sure the correct
See User Manual type is being used for the ribbon cartridge type is
printer. installed.
2. Make sure the cartridge is
properly seated.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative. 1

XXXX No Running power on No action is required.

CHECKING PATTERN memory test.

XXXX No Memory in bank xxx has Contact your authorized

MEMORY FAILURE failed. Power on memory service representative.1
test.

XXXX No Running power on No action is required.

WRITING PATTERN memory test.
1
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then
power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message
still displays, then contact your authorized service representative.

309
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 24. Many of the error messages for
H-Series have a numerical prefix to help the user find the description within
this manual.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
• Operator correctable
• Field service required
For the operator correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 24.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CLEAR key to clear the error
message and status indicator, and resume printing. If the fault message
reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and
procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the
procedures described there must be performed only by your
authorized service representative.

Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention

If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized
service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message
disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If
the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.

310
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

000:SHUTTLE TYPE No The shuttle type was not Contact your authorized service
NOT SUPPORTED* detected at power-up or the representative.1
shuttle installed in the printer
is not supported by the
firmware.

104:POWER SUPPLY Yes Power supply sensors report Check printer environment. If hot
HOT high temperatures. or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service
representative if this occurs
frequently.1

105:PRINTER HOT Yes This message indicates Check printer environment. If hot
internal temperatures of 80° or dusty, relocate printer.
Celsius or higher (176° Contact your authorized service
Fahrenheit). representative if this occurs
frequently.1

401:BUFFER Yes The print buffer has Verify that the printer matches
OVERRUN overflowed on a serial the host serial interface
interface. The printed output configuration settings for Data
may contain random * Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
(asterisk) characters. Make Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
a configuration printout. Ready, and Request to Send.
Set printer serial interface
parameters to match those of
the host.

402:CLEAR PAPER Yes No paper motion. Clear jam and reload paper. If
JAM this message recurs, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

403:CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open. Close the platen lever.

409:FRAMING ERROR Yes The printed output may Make a configuration printout.
contain random ! Set printer serial interface
(exclamation point) parameters to match host
characters. configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to Send.

410:LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of paper. Load paper and press CLEAR.

411:PARITY ERROR Yes The printed output may Check your printer serial
contain a random ? interface parameter settings; if
(question mark) characters. necessary, adjust them so that
they match the settings of the
attached host.

311
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

414:RIBBON STALL Yes The controller board does Check the ribbon path for jams.
not detect ribbon movement. Turn the Ribbon Tension Knob
clockwise a few rotations. If
necessary, install a new ribbon.

415:SHUTTLE JAM Yes No shuttle movement or Check for obstruction to shuttle,

shuttle moving at the wrong a twisted ribbon, or platen lever
speed. closed too tightly. If fault source
is not apparent, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

416:STACKER FULL Yes Status message: the power Unload the stacker. If fault
paper stacker is full of paper. persists, contact your authorized
service representative.1

417:STACKER JAM Yes This message is triggered if 1. Open the cabinet rear door
there is paper inside the and check for obstructions
throat of the stacker preventing elevator
elevator, but the elevator is movement. Remove any
not moving. obstructions.
2. Run the print job again. If
the message appears
again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

418:RBN INK LOW Yes Status message indicating Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Change RBN Soon the Integrated Print
Management System is
enabled and ribbon ink level
is 2%.

419:RBN INK OUT* Yes Integrated Print Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install New RBN Management System
software has determined
that the ribbon is out of ink.

420:EXC RBN WEAR Yes Status message that Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install New RBN displays when ribbon
reaches end of life, whether
the Integrated Print
Management System is
enabled or not.

423:OLD RIBBON Yes The sensor detects a ribbon Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install New RBN that was previously declared
to be at the end of its service
life.

425:UNKNOWN RBN2 Yes The sensor detects a bar Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install New RBN code, but the region code
does not match the printer.

312
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

427:CRTG MISSING Yes The ribbon cartridge is 1. Make sure a ribbon

Install new cart missing or installed cartridge is installed in the
Press ONLINE improperly. printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1

428:CRTG COMM ER No The hardware cannot 1. Make sure the ribbon

See User Manual communicate properly with cartridge is seated properly.
the cartridge. 2. Remove and replace the
ribbon cartridge if
necessary.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative.1

432:CRT NOT SET Yes The ribbon cartridge is not 1. Make sure a ribbon
correctly positioned. cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1

435:NO WELD No The cartridge weld was not Contact your authorized service
See User Manual detected. representative.1

437:REG MISSING Yes The incorrect cartridge type Install region X ribbon cartridge
Use Correct RBN is being used for the printer. in the printer.
NOTE: Specify the region of
the printer when
ordering ribbons.

438:TIP MISMATCH Yes The incorrect cartridge type Install the correct ribbon
Use Correct RBN is being used for the printer. cartridge type in the printer.

439:SHTL MISMATCH Yes This message displays when Install Standard Life Ribbon.
Use Correct RBN an Extended Life Ribbon is
mounted on a 500 lpm
printer.

445:SD INSERTED Yes The SD card has been Turn off the printer and insert the
Reboot Printer inserted after the printer was SD card only when the printer is
already powered up. not powered on.

313
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

446:SD REMOVED Yes The SD card has been Turn off the printer and remove
Reboot Printer removed after the printer the SD card only when the
was already powered up. printer is off.

447:SD FL EXIST Yes A write operation to the SD Enable overwriting of files on the
Enable Overwrite has failed because the file SD using the overwrite files
already exists on the SD menu.
card and the overwriting of
existing files is disabled.

448:SD WRT. FAIL Yes A write operation to the SD Ensure that the write protect tab
WRITE PROTECTED has failed because the SD on the SD card is not active. If
Check SD Card card is write protected. the write protect tab is not active,
use another SD card.

449:SD FILE WRITE Yes A write operation to the SD Ensure that the SD card is
Check SD has failed for an unknown inserted correctly and that the
reason. SD card is a supported SDHC
card.

450:SD FILE FULL Yes A write operation to the SD Delete files on the SD card to
File Too Big has failed because the file is make space.
too big to fit in the remaining
space on the SD card.

451:SD NOT FOUND Yes A write operation to the SD Ensure that an SD card is
Insert SD Card could not be performed inserted correctly and that the
Pwr Off Printer because the SD card was SD card is a supported SDHC
not detected. card.

452:SD FILE FULL Yes The SD file system is Delete files on the SD card to
Delete Files completely full. make space.

453:SD READING Yes The SD card is currently Wait until reading completes.
Do not Remove reading files.

454:SD WRITING Yes The SD card is currently Wait until the write or erase
Do not Remove writing or erasing files. operation completes.

607:CTL VOLT FAIL* No Controller Voltage Failure. Contact your authorized service
15 V failure on the controller representative.1
board.

608:DRIVER CIRCUIT No Driver Circuit Bad. The Contact your authorized service
BAD hammer coil count test representative.1
failed.

314
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

609:EXHAUST FAN Yes Sensor cannot detect current Power off the printer and remove
CHECK in fan circuit. the paper path (see
(Cabinet model only) Maintenance Manual). Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

613: HAM. COIL BAD No Hammer coil # failed current Contact your authorized service
#, #, #, ...etc test at power up. representative.1

614:HAMMER BANK* No Hammer Bank Not Installed. Contact your authorized service
NOT INSTALLED Self-test routines do not representative.1
detect hammer coils at
printer start-up.

615:HAMMER FAN Yes Sensor cannot detect current Check that fan cable is
CHECK in fan circuit. connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your authorized
service representative.1

617:LOWER DRIVER No Lower Driver Short. Contact your authorized service

SHORT* Circuit(s) on the hammer representative.1
bank or in the hammer bank
power cable shorted to
ground.

619:PAPER FEED No Paper Feed Driver Circuit. Contact your authorized service
DRIVER CIRCUIT* The paper feed driver circuit representative.1
See Manual on the controller board is
drawing too much current.

620:POWER VOLT No Power Supply Voltage. The Replace power supply board.
CHECK* power supply has failed.

622:SHUTTLE No The shuttle driver circuit on Contact your authorized service

DRIVER CRCUIT* the controller board is representative.1
drawing too much current.

315
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

623:STACKER FAULT Yes Stacker is not functioning Check for obstructions in the
correctly. stacker area. If fault persists,
contact your authorized service
representative.1

624:UPPER DRIVER No Upper Driver Short. Hammer Cycle power to see if the
SHORT* driver circuits on the boards message clears, if not, contact
shorted to ground. your authorized service
representative.1

702:FIRMWARE No Application software tried to Contact your authorized service

ERROR* perform an illegal printer representative.1
function or damaged
memory detected on the
controller board.

703:ILLEGAL No Illegal External Bus Access. Contact your authorized service

EXTERNAL BUS ACC* Firmware error on the representative.1
controller board.

704:ILLEGAL No Illegal Instruction Accessed. Contact your authorized service

INSTRUCTION ACC* Firmware error on the representative.1
controller board.

705:ILLEGAL No Illegal Operand Accessed. Contact your authorized service

OPERAND ACCESS* Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

706:PAP BAD TABLE* No Paper Bad Table. The paper Contact your authorized service
feed process on the representative.1
controller board has a
corrupted table.

708:PAPER FIFO No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized service
OVERFLOW* Overflow. Firmware error on representative.1
controller board.

709:PAPER FIFO No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized service
UNDERFLOW* Underflow. Firmware error representative.1
on controller board.

710:PAP ILLGL ST* No Paper Illegal State. Firmware Contact your authorized service
error on controller board. representative.1

712:PAP INVLD CMD* No Paper Invalid Command. Contact your authorized service
Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

713:PAP INVLD No Paper Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized service

PARM* Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

316
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

717:PLAT INV CMD* No Platen Invalid Command. Contact your authorized service
Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

718:PLAT INV PARM* No Platen Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized service
Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

719:PLAT INV STATE* No Platen Invalid State. Contact your authorized service
Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

720:PROTECTED No Protected Instruction. Contact your authorized service

INSTRUCTION* Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

721:RIB INVLD CMD* Yes Ribbon Invalid Command. Cycle power. Run the print job
See User Manual Firmware error on the again. If the message appears,
controller board. download the emulation
software again. If the message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

723:SHUTL INV CMD* No Shuttle Invalid Command. Contact your authorized service
Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

724 SHUTL INV No Shuttle Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized service
PARM* Firmware error on controller representative.1
board.

725:SHUTL OVER No The shuttle is oscillating too Contact your authorized service
SPEED* rapidly. representative.1

727:SOFTWARE No Application software tried to Contact your authorized service

ERROR* perform illegal printer representative.1
function, or damaged logic
circuits found on controller
board.

730:TCB No Task Control Block Contact your authorized service

CORRUPTED* Corrupted. Firmware error representative.1
on controller board.

733 DP FIFO Busy* Yes There is a timing problem in 1. Cycle power. Run the print
the Engine Controller job again. If the message
firmware. reappears, download the
emulation software again.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
reappears, contact your
authorized service
representative. 1

317
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

B12 ERROR: Yes The printer does not see a There is no program in printer
PROGRAM MISSING* program in flash memory. memory. Download printer
firmware again.

B13 ERROR: NOT No Attempting to download a Cycle power to see if the

COMPATIBLE* program that is not message clears, if not, contact
compatible with the printer. your authorized service
representative.1

B20 STATUS :00% No Status message informing No action is required.

DOWNLOAD MODE the operator that software is
being downloaded.
Percentage figure indicates
approximate amount loaded
into the printer.

B21 STATUS: No Status message informing No action is required.

PRINTER RESET the operator that the printer
is undergoing a system
reset.

B22 ERROR: No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the
DECOMPRESS SIZE* passed boot initialization message clears, if not, contact
tests. your authorized service
representative.1

B23 ERROR: No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the
DECOMPRESS passed boot initialization message clears, if not, contact
CKSUM* tests. your authorized service
representative.1

B30 STATUS: N/A Status message: the printer No action is required.

INITIALIZING... is running its initialization
routines after startup and
successful memory tests.

B50 STATUS: No Saved version of Panel Reload released Firmware.

PANEL CODE BAD Code is corrupt.

B51 STATUS: XX% No Status message: printer No action required.

LOADING... boot-up routines are loading
printer system software into
flash memory and SDRAM.

318
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

BAD NVM CALL 1 Yes Printer firmware code error 1. Cycle power. Run the print
BAD NVM CALL 2 with the Novram module that job again. If the message
BAD NVM CALL 3 stores configurations and appears, load the latest
BAD NVM CALL 4 statistics. emulation software.
BAD NVM CALL A 2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears again, record the
exact display message and
follow the instructions on
page 290, “Diagnostics for
EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
NVM Errors”, and contact
your authorized service
representative.1

Bxx ERROR: NO No No Downloader was found Reload released Firmware.

DOWNLOADER while downloading a file.
FOUND

CATASTROPHIC No Fatal error in printer. Contact your authorized

ERROR customer service
representative.1

CLEARING No Status message: emulation No action is required.

PROGRAM FROM software successfully loaded
FLASH into printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The old
program is now being
deleted from flash memory.

D50 Status No Status message: The printer No action is required.

UPGRADING PANEL is upgrading the panel,
where %XX represents the
percentage completed.

D51 Status %XX No Status message: The printer No action is required.

Programming... is loading firmware, where
%XX represents the
percentage completed.

DIAGNOSTIC No Status message: the printer No action is required.

PASSED passed its memory and
hardware initialization tests.

DO NOT POWER OFF No Status message: The printer No action is required, but do not
is performing an operation power off the printer until the
that must be completed operation is complete.
before you can cycle power.

319
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

E00 EXE @ ADDR0 Yes An illegal or unsupported 1. Cycle power. Run the print
E01A TYPE 0x40 instruction was attempted in job again. If the message
E01B TYPE 0x60 the application program. appears, load the latest
E02 MACHINE CHK emulation software.
E03A DSI HASH L 2. Cycle power. Run the print
E03B DSI HASH S job again. If the message
E03C DSI BAT PL appears again, record the
E03D DSI BAT PS exact display message,
E03E DSI CXIWX follow the instructions on
E03F DSI CXOWX page 290, “Diagnostics for
E03G DSI ECXIWX EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
E03H DSI ECXOWX NVM Errors”, and contact
E04A ISI NO TRA your authorized service
E04B ISI DIRECT representative.1
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED 3. Power off the printer.
E07 ILLEGAL INS Provide this fault message
E08 FLOATINGPNT and the messages you
E12 SYSTEM CALL recorded from the exception
E13 TRACE INT menu to your next higher
E16 ITRANS MISS support facility.
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT 0 BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT

See User Manual

320
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

E-Net Test Unavailable Yes The ethernet PCBA did not Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
initialize correctly. Ready” to display, then retry
operation. If it still fails, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

ERROR NOR No Problem programming Boot Contact your authorized service

FLASHED WAS Code. representative.1
NOT CLEARED

ERROR: DC Yes The printer cannot find the Download the program again. If
PROGRAM NOT data controller program or the message appears, contact
VALID the validation checksum is your authorized service
corrupt. representative.1

ERROR: LOCKED No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn is Contact your authorized service

SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn the serial number of the representative.1
nnnnnn printer’s security key. The
SPX serial number does not
match the printer’s serial
number and cannot be used
with the printer.

ERROR: NVRAM No The non-volatile SRAM on Contact your authorized service

FAILURE the controller board has representative.1
failed.

ERROR: PROGRAM Yes The printer is not compatible Use the correct emulation
NOT COMPATIBLE with the downloaded software options(s) for this
program. printer model.

ERROR: PROGRAM Yes The printer does not see a There is no program in printer
NOT VALID program in flash memory. memory. Download the
emulation.

ERROR: SECURITY No The security key is not Contact your authorized service
KEY NOT DETECTED present or failed. representative.1

ERROR: WRONG No The printer received the Contact your authorized service
CHECKSUM complete program but the representative.1
checksum did not match.
The data may have been
corrupted during
downloading.

ERROR: WRONG No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized service
OEM debug port is not intended representative.1
for this model printer or this
OEM.

ERROR: WRONG No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized service
PRINTER TYPE debug port is not intended representative.1
for this model printer or this
OEM.

321
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

ETHERNET N/A Status message indicating No action is required.

DETECTED that the Network Interface
Card has established
connection.

ETHERNET No Status message: the internal No action is required.

INITIALIZING Network Interface Card is
processing the boot
procedure. (May occur with
older versions of microcode.)

EXCEPTION ERROR No An EXCEPTION Contact your authorized service

INTERRUPT has occurred. representative.1

FLASH: CHECK No Printer encountered an error Contact your authorized service

RETURN while trying to program Flash representative.1
memory.

FLASH: WAS NOT No Printer encountered an error Contact your authorized service
CLEARED while trying to program Flash representative.1
memory.

FLASH: WRITE No Printer encountered an error Contact your authorized service

ERROR # 2 while trying to program Flash representative.1
memory.

GENERATING XX% No NAND FLASH is being read No action is required.

NAND FLASH TABLE and system tables are being
initialized.

H00: PCI SLOT ? No The controller board is not Contact your authorized service
See User Manual communicating with a PCI representative.1
card. This could indicate a
bad PCI card, poor
connection, or problem in
the PCI bus.

H01: PCI J12 No The controller board is not Contact your authorized service
See User Manual communicating with the PCI representative.1
card in PCI slot J12. This
could indicate a bad PCI
card, poor connection, or
problem in the PCI bus.

322
 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical
Printing a HexPrefix)
Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

<Online, etc...> No Status message: The No action is required. If the

Half Speed Mode controller samples the message appears often, contact
operating temperature of key your authorized service
components of the print representative.1
mechanism. When higher
than normal temperatures
are sensed, the print speed
is automatically reduced by
50% and the message sent
the LCD. When the
components cool down, the
print speed returns to 100%
and the message clears.

ILL NVM VALUE 5 Yes Illegal value was stored into 1. Cycle power. Run the print
ILL NVM VALUE 6 the Novram module. job again. If the message
ILL NVM VALUE 7 appears, load the latest
emulation software.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears again, record the
exact display message,
follow the instructions on
page 290, “Diagnostics for
EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
NVM Errors”, and contact
your authorized service
representative.1

INITIALIZING... Yes This message indicates the No action is required.

printer is beginning its
initialization process.

INTAKE FAN CHECK Yes Sensors cannot detect Cycle power. If the message
current in fan circuit. appears, press CLEAR. If the
message does not clear, contact
your authorized service
representative.1

INTERRUPT UNUSED No The controller board Cycle power. If this message

VECTOR 00 receives an interrupt it does occurred once and never again,
not understand. The problem you can ignore it. If the message
can be created by electrical reappears or appears
noise, by a software consistently, contact your
problem, or by a hardware authorized service
problem. representative.1

LOADING PROGRAM No Status message: the new No action is required.

FROM PORT XX% emulation program is loading
into printer RAM. XX%
indicates how much of the
program has loaded.

323
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

LOADING PROGRAM No The printer has deleted the No action is required.

INTO FLASH previous program from flash
memory and is loading the
new program into flash
memory.

NEW SPX DETECTED No The printer detects an SPX Contact your authorized service
PRESS ENTER installed at the debug port representative.1
and the SPX is valid for the
printer.

NON VOLATILE No Large emulations reduce the Contact your authorized service
MEMORY FAILED amount of space available representative.1
for saving configurations,
which means that
sometimes fewer than eight
configurations can be saved.

ONLINE N/A Printer state message: No action is required.

printer is online and in
communication with host.

PANEL No Panel Code has a bad Reload released firmware.

BAD CHECKSUM Checksum.

PARAMETER ERROR* No Illegal parameter value Contact your authorized service

received in command code representative.1
over a TN emulation.

PLAT DRVR CIR No Platen driver circuit Contact your authorized service
malfunction. representative.1

PLEASE WAIT... N/A Status message: the printer No action is required.

RESET IN finished loading the program
PROGRESS into flash memory and is
automatically resetting itself.

PRINTER UNDER No Status message: The printer No action is required.

REMOTE CONTROL is under the control of
PrintNet Enterprise (PNE)
remote management
software.

PROCESSOR No Real-time System Firmware Contact your authorized service

HALTED error on controller board. representative.1
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2

REMOVE USED SPX No Status message: An SPX is Contact your authorized service
THEN PRESS ENTER depleted because it has representative.1
successfully reprogrammed
the security key on the
controller board.

RESTORING BOOT No Normal download No action is required.

CODE initialization message.

324
 Printing a Hex Dump

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

SCS COMMAND No In the TN emulation, the Contact your system

ERROR* printer received undefined administrator.
control character (hex 40).

SD CARD ERROR Yes The printer has been Power down, reseat card, and
Remove SD Card powered up with a card in power up again. If error persists,
the SD slot, but the card is power down, remove card, and
not functioning properly. The try another card.
card could be a compact
flash card or a non-
supported card.

SDSC CARD Yes The printer has been Power down, remove SD card,
NOT SUPPORTED powered up with an SDSC and insert an SDHC card in the
Remove SD Card card, and SDSC cards (< 4 printer.
GB) are not supported.

SECURITY No Security code of PAL on Contact your authorized service

VIOLATION* controller board does not representative.1
match code of firmware on
the controller board.

SECURITY KEY NOT No The security key is not Contact your authorized service
DETECTED present or has failed. representative.1

SF ERROR No Structured Field Error. Not a printer problem. Have the

Application software has system administrator correct
violated structured data field applications data or
parameters. configuration.

SHUTTLE STALL Yes The shuttle is not moving. Set the platen lever to match the
thickness of paper, but not too
tightly. Check and adjust the
platen gap. Inspect the ribbon
mask for deformation that snags
and interferes with shuttle
movement. If fault source is not
apparent, contact your
authorized service
representative.1

SPX FOUND, ERROR: No The controller board does Contact your authorized service
KEY NOT DETECTED not have a security key. representative.1

SPX NOT NEEDED No The user has attempted to Contact your authorized service
OPTIONS ENABLED use the SPX to turn on representative.1
printer options that are
already enabled.

SYS R/T ERROR No Software issue. Contact your authorized service

representative.1

325
Chapter 8 Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)

Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)

Can User
Displayed Message Explanation Solution
Correct?

TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message reported by Refer to the Printronix P8000
the Printer Manager when Maintenance Manual.
ethernet interface option is
installed. The network
address given in the printer
properties was reached, but
the printer port is busy.
1
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then
power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message still
displays, then contact your authorized service representative.

326
 A Printer Specifications

Ribbon Cartridge Specifications

ASCII

North America, Asia Pacific

Europe,
Latin America (excludes India and
P/N Middle East,
(excludes China and Brazil
& Africa
Brazil), Canada India)

Extended Life, 1 Pack -101 -102 -103 -104

Extended Life, 4 Pack -401 -402 -403 -104

Standard Life, 1 Pack -101 -102 -103 -104

HD and H-Series

North America, Asia Pacific

Europe,
Latin America (excludes India and
P/N Middle East,
(excludes China and Brazil
& Africa
Brazil), Canada India)

Extended Life, 1 Pack -101 -102 -103 -104

Extended Life, 4 Pack -401 -402 -403 -404

Standard Life, 1 Pack N/A N/A -103 -104

Standard Life, 4 Pack -403 -404

327
Appendix A Paper Specifications

Paper Specifications

Type: Edge-perforated, fan-fold, 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm)

wide, 2 to 12 inches (5.08 to 30.48 cm) long.

SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches

(12.7 to 30.48 cm) long and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide with-
out the paper tent or 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper
tent installed.

Thickness: Single-part: 15 to 100 pound (56 to 163 g/m2) stock;

Multi-part: 1- to 6-part forms
Sheet Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) maximum

Drive: Adjustable tractors (6-pin engagement)

Labels

On Backing: One-part continuous perforated fanfold back form. Labels must be placed at
least 1/6 inch (0.42 cm) from the fan-fold perforation. Backing adhesive must not
be squeezed out during printing.

Sheet Size: 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, including the two standard perforated
tractor feed strips. A maximum sheet length of 16 inches (40.64 cm) between
top and bottom perforations.
NOTE: A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model. Power Paper
Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.48 cm) long.
Thickness: Not to exceed 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) (including backing sheet)

328
 Printer Weight HD
andand
Dimensions
H-Series

Printer Weight and Dimensions

Cabinet Type Dimensions Weight

Height Width Depth Unpacked Packaged

(inches) (inches) (inches) (pounds) (pounds)

Tabletop (with riser) 18.25 25.75 19.48 100 124

Cabinet 42.5 27 29 200 260

NOTE: For cabinet models

with a power stacker, the
weight increases by 21 lbs.
and the depth increases by
4.75 inches for a deeper
rear door.

Open Pedestal 35 24.5 27 115 153

Enclosed Pedestal 36 25.75 19.5 140 185

Environmental Characteristics

Temperature:

Operating: 50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters)

50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C) up to 6560 feet (2000 meters)

Storage: -40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C)

Relative Humidity

Operating: 15% to 80% (noncondensing)

Storage: 15% to 90% (noncondensing)

329
Appendix A Acoustic Noise Level

Acoustic Noise Level

Table 25. Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296

Printer Models Printing Standby

Tabletop 65 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm) 50 dB

70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm))

Cabinet 50 dB (ASCII 500 lpm/1000 lpm) 48 dB

52 dB (300 lpm, 1500 lpm)
55 dB (600 lpm, 800 lpm, 2000 lpm)

Pedestal 62 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm) 50 dB

65 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)

Enclosed Pedestal 58 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm) 48 dB

60 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)

Zero Tear 66 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm) 50 dB

70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)

Energy Star
The printers described in this User’s Manual comply with the requirements of
the ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency.

330
 Input Voltage (ASCII Models)

Electrical Characteristics
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)

Printer Voltage Freq Amps Watts BTU/Hr

Configuration
Type (+/-10%) (+/-10%) (Max) (Typical) (Typical)

Tabletop P8005 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Tabletop P8010 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Cabinet P8205 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Cabinet P8210 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Cabinet P8215 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Cabinet P8220 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Pedestal P8005 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal P8010 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Enclosed P8005 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal

Enclosed P8010 AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal

Zero Tear P8005ZT AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal

Zero Tear P8010ZT AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal

The above values are calculated while printing 136 column, all upper case
high speed “E’s”. The stand-by (Energy Saver mode) wattage is 5W
(17 BTU/Hr) for all models.

331
Appendix A Interfaces

Input Voltage (H-Series Models)

Printer Voltage Freq Amps Watts BTU/Hr

Model
Type (+/-10%) (+/-10%) (Max) (Typical) (Typical)

Tabletop P8003H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Tabletop P8006H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Tabletop P8000HD AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Cabinet P8203H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1622

Cabinet P8206H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Cabinet P8208H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Cabinet P8200HD AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Pedestal P8003H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 2053

Pedestal P8006H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 2053

Enclosed P8003H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1093

Pedestal

Enclosed P8006H AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Pedestal

Zero Tear P8003HZT AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 5A 320W 1622

Pedestal

Zero Tear P8006HZT AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Pedestal

Zero Tear P8000HDZT AC 100-240V 50/60 Hz 9A 475W 1622

Pedestal

Interfaces

Type: Standard: USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus

RS-232 serial

Optional: IEEE 1284 Parallel

Centronics Parallel
Ethernet 10/100Base-T

Logic Levels: TTL/EIA®-232E/EIA-422B

Transfer Rates: Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface.

Up to 115.2K baud on RS-232 serial interface.

332
 PrintingModels)
Input Voltage (H-Series Speed

Printing Speed
The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute (lpm) and is a
function of the selected font and the vertical dot density. Printing speed is
independent of the number of characters configured in the character set
repertoire. Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or
emphasized printing, superscripts, subscripts, or elongated attributes will
decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes. The
exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific
print job, but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining
which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes.
The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a
single line. This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing
different fonts on a print line. Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed
also affects throughput.

333
Appendix A Printing Speed

334
B ASCII Character Set

B7 B6 0 0
B5 1
BITS
B4 B3B2 B1
KEY 33 OCTAL equivalent
1 0 1 1 ESC 27 DECIMAL equivalent
1B HEX equivalent
ASCII Character Name
B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
B5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
BITS
COLUMN
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 20 40 60 100 120 140 160
0 SP 0 @ P p
00 0 0 0 NUL DLE 16 32 48 64 80 96 112
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
1 21 41 61 101 121 141 161
1 SOH 1 DC1 17 ! 33 1 49 A 65 Q 81 a 97 q 113
00 0 1
1 (XON) 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 22 42 62 102 122 142 162
00 1 0 2 STX 2 DC2 18 " 34 2 50 B 66 R 82 b 98 r 114
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72
3 23 43 63 103 123 143 163
00 1 1 3 ETX 3 DC3 19 35 51 67 83 99 115
# 3 C S c s
3 (XOFF) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73
4 24 44 64 104 124 144 164
01 0 0 4 EOT 4 DC4 20 $ 36 4 52 D 68 T 84 d 100 t 116
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74
5 25 45 65 105 125 145 165
01 0 1 5 ENQ 5 NAK 21 % 37 5 53 E 69 U 85 e 101 u 117
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
6 26 46 66 106 126 146 166
01 1 0 6 ACK 6 SYN 22 & 38 6 54 F 70 V 86 f 102 v 118
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76
7 27 47 67 107 127 147 167
01 1 1 7 BEL 7 ETB 23 ' 39 7 55 G 71 W 87 g 103 w 119
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77
10 30 50 70 110 130 150 170
10 0 0 8 BS 8 CAN 24 ( 40 8 56 H 72 X 88 h 104 x 120
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78
11 31 51 71 111 131 151 171
10 0 1 9 HT 9 EM 25 ) 41 9 57 I 73 Y 89 i 105 y 121
9 19 29 39 49 59 69 79
12 32 52 72 112 132 152 172
10 1 0 10 LF 10 SUB 26 42 : 58 J 74 Z 90 j 106 z 122
*
0A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A
13 33 53 73 113 133 153 173
10 1 1 11 VT 11 ESC 27 + 43 ; 59 K 75 [ 91 k 107 { 123
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B
14 34 54 74 114 134 154 174
11 0 0 12 FF 12 FS 28 44 < 60 L 76 \ 92 l 108 | 124
0C 1C , 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C
15 35 55 75 115 135 155 175
11 0 1 13 CR 13 GS 29 - 45 = 61 M 77 ] 93 m 109 } 125
0D 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D
16 36 56 76 116 136 156 176
11 1 0 14 SO 14 RS 30 . 46 > 62 N 78 ^ 94 n 110 ~ 126
0E 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E
17 37 57 77 117 137 157 177
11 1 1 15 SI 15 US 31 / 47 ? 63 O 79 _ 95 o 111 DEL 127
0F 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F

335
Appendix B ASCII Character Set

336
 C SureStak™ Power Stacker

Introduction
The SureStak Power Stacker is a factory-installed option that augments the
paper feed system of cabinet model printers. It is designed to work with forms
5 to 12 inches long (12.7 to 30.5 cm) and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without
the paper tent installed or up to 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper tent
installed. (See Figure 49.) Using longer or shorter paper can cause error
messages and unpredictable operation of the stacker.
Because most of the stacker assembly is inside the cabinet, you must remove
the stacker from the printer to service it or replace most of its components.

Stacker Operation
The power stacker mechanically directs the paper from the printer to the
paper stack. It is mounted in the rear of the cabinet and has its own control
panel. Its main components are shown in Figure 49.

Paper Throat

Rear Control
Panel

Elevator
Disable Switch Pinch Rollers
Elevator Lift
Handle
184109a

Paper Length
Indicator

Paper Tent
Bearing Bracket

Figure 49. Power Stacker Component Locations

337
Appendix C Stacker Operation

Setting Up the Power Stacker

1. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
2. If necessary, press the ONLINE key on the front panel or rear control
panel to take the printer offline. (Figure 50.)
3. Press the ELEVATOR UP key and wait for the elevator assembly to
reach the top of its travel. (Figure 50.)

F
/OF
ON
E
LIN
ON

ON LINE

PAPER ADVANCE

ELEVATOR UP
184108a

ELEVATOR DOWN

Figure 50. The Rear Control Panel

338
 Stacker Operation

4. If the paper you will use is not wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) pull out
the paper tray and install the wireform paper tent. (Figure 51.) If the paper
is wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) leave the paper tent out of the printer.

Paper Tent

Paper Tray

184120a

Note the positions of

alignment tab and the
paper fence.

Figure 51. The Paper Tent

339
Appendix C Stacker Operation

5. Push or pull the paddle shaft toward the front or the rear of the printer to
set the desired paper length. Align the indicator notch on the bearing
bracket with the paper length indicator. The power stacker can handle
paper or forms from 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.5 cm) long. (Figure 52.)

Paddle Shaft

Paper Length Indicator

A
184114a

Bearing Bracket

Figure 52. The Paper Length Indicator

340
 Stacker Operation

Loading and Starting the Power Stacker

1. Press the PAPER ADVANCE key and hand feed the paper down into the
paper throat of the stacker. Continue to advance the paper until it reaches
the paper tent (if installed) and feed three to five extra sheets into the
stacker. Make sure the paper passes through the paper throat of the
stacker. (Figure 53.)
2. Stack the extra pages on top of the wire paper tent (if installed), making
sure the paper bends with the natural fold. (Figure 53.)
3. Press the ONLINE key to put the printer in the online state. The stacker
elevator will return to the correct position for printing.
4. Check that the paper is still centered between the sides of the paper tent
(if installed).
5. Close the cabinet rear door.
6. If necessary, set Top Of Form.

ON LINE

PAPER
ADVANCE

A
184044a

Figure 53. Stacking Paper on the Wire Paper Tent

341
Appendix C Stacker Operation

342
 D Zero Tear Pedestal Printer

Overview
The P8000 Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP) printer can print a form and present it
for tear off without losing a form between print jobs. The printer automatically
presents the current print line to the tear bar when it finishes printing and no
data are being sent to the printer. When it receives more data from the host
computer, the printer pulls the form down to the print station and resumes
printing.
The ZTP printer is available as follows:
• ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
• H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
• OpenPrint HD models.

343
Appendix D Operation

Operation
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides

A
Outer Paper Center Paper
Guide Leaf (2) Guide Leaf

184568a

184569a
Front Paper
A Guide Leaf (3)

Note: Paper guides

located underneath.
Paper Guide
Knob (3)

Figure 54. Adjusting the Paper Guides

NOTE: This operation is typically done during initial setup. Before beginning
the procedure, ensure that the paper guides are not damaged.
1. Remove the left paper guide knob and the left, front paper guide leaf.
(See Figure 54.)
2. Remove the right paper guide knob and the right, front paper guide leaf.
3. Remove the center paper guide knob and the center, front paper guide
leaf.

344
 Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides

Center Paper
Guide Leaf
.5 '' .5''
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Paper

Tractor (2)

183485b
Outboard Mount Center Mount
Block (2) Block

Figure 55. Adjusting Paper Guide Leaves

4. Slide the left outboard mount block so that the left outer paper guide leaf
is .5 inches from the left tractor. (See Figure 55).
5. Slide the right outboard mount block so that the right outer paper guide
leaf is .5 inches from the right tractor.
6. Slide the center mount block so that the center paper guide leaf is
centered between the left and right outer paper guide leaves.
7. Install the paper guide knobs and front paper guide leaves.
(See Figure 54.)

345
Appendix D Operation

Load Paper

Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2) Center Paper
Guide Leaf
Tractor Door

Front Paper
Guide Leaf (3)

Paper Paper
A
A
184570a

Edge
of
Paper Out Paper
Sensor Box

Label

Paper Supply
Box
183487b

Figure 56. Loading Paper onto the Printer

1. Align the paper supply box with the label on the left side of the floor.
(See Figure 56 on page 346.)
2. Unlock and open the tractor doors and slide the paper from below,
through the black paper out sensor slot on the left side, and up between
all front and rear paper guides.
3. Load the paper on the left tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.
4. Load the paper onto the right tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.

346
 Load Paper

Paper

Tractor (2)

Tractor
Lock (2)

184572a
Figure 57. Adjusting the Horizontal Paper Tension
5. Adjust the paper web tightness by sliding the right tractor to remove slack
or to adjust for various paper widths. (See Figure 57.)
6. Lock the tractors in position by pressing down on the tractor locks.

Paper

Tear Bar
184573a

Figure 58. Paper Exiting the Top of the Printer

347
Appendix D Operation

Position the Paper Out Sensor

183490c

At least 2 inches
Sensor Knob

Paper Out Sensor

Paper

Figure 59. The Paper Out Sensor

The paper out sensor indicates when the printer runs out of paper. (The
sensor does not work with black backed forms.) Unlike the standard pedestal
printer, the ZT printer requires you to load the paper through the paper out
sensor slot (Figure 56 and Figure 59). Correct positioning of the paper out
sensor ensures that the last form the printer prints will be properly presented
to the tear bar. To position the paper out sensor, do the following:
1. Position the paper properly at the tear bar (page 350).
2. Loosen the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knob
counterclockwise.
3. Position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between
the bottom of the aluminum extrusion bar and the top of the paper out
sensor.

IMPORTANT For optimal performance, 2 inches is recommended for 11 inch forms.

For shorter forms, position the paper out sensor so that there are at
least 2 inches between a perforation and the top of the paper out sensor.
4. Tighten the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knobs clockwise.
5. Press ONLINE. When the first print job is sent to the printer, the paper is
drawn into the printer, the top of form aligns with the print station, and the
print job begins.

348
 Set the Tear Bar Distance

Set the Tear Bar Distance

To set the tear bar distance, do the following steps:
1. Make sure the printer is offline.
2. Press ENTER key to enter Menu mode.
3. Press the right arrow  until the PRINTER CONTROL icon is highlighted.
4. Press ENTER to go into PRINTER CONTROL.
5. Press the down arrow  until “ZTP SETTINGS” is highlighted.
6. Press ENTER to go into the “ZTP SETTINGS” submenu.
7. Press the down arrow  until “ZTP TearDistance” is highlighted.
8. Press the left arrow  or right arrow  to decrease or increase the tear
bar distance in increments of 1/144th of an inch.
9. Press ENTER to select the desired value. An asterisk appears next the
selected value and a scale prints to indicate the tear bar distance in
relation to the tear bar. For correct tear bar distance, the zero should align
with the tear bar. See Figure 60.
NOTE: The Tear Distance value must be changed to print the scale.

+50

Physical TearBar
0 Position

-50

Correct
TearBar
Distance

Print Station

Figure 60. Correct Tear Bar Distance

NOTE: When a new ZTP Tear Bar Dist value is selected, the printer will lose
the current print position until you reset the top of form to
automatically save the new value.
10. Reset the top of form using the procedure on page 350.

349
Appendix D Operation

Set the Top of Form

Paper

Tear Bar

Form Advance
Knob

184574a

Figure 61. Setting The Tear Off Position

The ZT printer uses the tear bar as the reference point for setting the tear off
position. To set the position of the forms perforation to the tear bar, use the
SET TOF button as follows:
1. Make sure the paper guides are adjusted correctly and the paper is
properly loaded.
2. Press the TOF button on the control panel. The printer LCD will display
“Align at TearBar/Then Press TOF”.
3. Use the form advance knob to move the top of the form to the tear off bar.
4. Position the perforation so it aligns with the tear off bar.
NOTE: This is easily done by advancing one complete sheet above the tear
off bar and folding it over at the perforation.
5. Position the fold exactly at the tear bar.
6. Tear the sheet off to ensure proper positioning.
NOTE: If you do not want to lose a form, position the top of the form at the
tear bar. Run a finger along the back of the form along the tear bar to
ensure the perforation is presented at the tear off point.
7. Press the TOF button again. The printer LCD will display “Top Of Form
Set/Press ONLINE”. The printer will then be brought OFFLINE and the
top of form will be set.
NOTE: Unlike the non-ZTP models, the paper will not move.
8. Press the ONLINE key to bring the printer online.

350
 Set the Top of Form

ZTP SETTINGS Menu

The ZTP SETTINGS menu includes the ability to enable and disable features
unique to the Zero Tear printer (ZTP), set the tear bar distance, set the auto
present data time, and set the auto present wait time. This section defines
these options.

ZTP * = Factory Default

SETTINGS 1 1
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)

ZTP ZTP ZTP ZTP ZTP

Data Time Wait Time TearDistance Platen Open Function

.5 Sec* 2 Sec* 1060/144 Inch* Enable* Enable*

1.0 - 15.0 Sec 3 - 10 Sec Disable Disable
1 Sec

ZTP Data Time

This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires
before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The
values range from .5 to 15 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.

ZTP Wait Time

This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear
bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to
print the next form. The adjustable values range from 1 to 10 seconds in
increments of 1 second. The default value is 2 seconds.

ZTP TearDistance
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear
bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The left and right arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the
current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print
position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new
value.

ZTP Platen Open

This option allows the user to have the platen open whenever forms are
reversed. Enabled is the default, used for most papers and labels. The feature
can be disabled as required by some multi-part forms.

351
Appendix D Performance Limitations

ZTP Function
This option enables or disables all unique ZTP functions. The default is
Enable.
NOTE: When the ZTP Function is enabled, the VIEW key is disabled and
Slow Paper Slew is enabled.

Performance Limitations
Forms Type
The paper feed tractors on the ZT printer push the paper up through the print
station instead of pulling it through, as in the standard pedestal printer. This
limits the variety of forms the ZT printer can use. If the forms do not fall within
the range specified in Table 26, dot compression and line separation may
occur. The user should match the media to the application to ensure
acceptable print quality. Also, because paper is pushed from below the print
station, the last form in the tractors may not print fully or may not be presented
to the printer exit for retrieval.
All paper used in the ZT printer requires standard half inch spaced tractor
feed holes. Cut sheet and continuous friction fed paper is not supported. The
forms specified in Table 26 can have no more than one form per page
horizontally.

Table 26. Forms Type

Width
Description Length
(edge to edge)

One to three part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded, 3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
edge-perforated paper forms
One to four part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded, 3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
edge-perforated paper forms
One to four part, continuous, carbonless, 3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
fan-folded, edge-perforated paper forms
One to six part, continuous, carbonless, fan-folded, edge- 3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
perforated paper forms
Forms with a paper weight of 20 to 100 pounds and a maxi- 3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
mum thickness of 0.025 inches
Forms with a paper weight of 18 to 100 pounds and a maxi- 3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
mum thickness of 0.025 inches
Forms with all approved types of interleaf edge attachment 3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
except those using metallic or other hard devices

NOTE: If you use forms outside these limits, the print quality may not be
optimum, the printer may lose top-of-form, or the frequency of paper
jams will increase.

352
 Set the Top of Form

Paper Jams
Printer jams can occur if you tear off the form incorrectly. If you experience
two or more paper jams per box of forms, follow these guidelines to help
reduce jams:
• Position the lower paper guides properly
• Align the paper web tightness properly
• Position the form perforation against the tear bar
• Time the tear, while the paper is not moving
• Direct the tear force toward the user and across the tear bar, not upward.

To Clear Paper Jams

1. Raise the platen lever to open the platen.
2. Open the left and right tractor doors.
3. Pull the paper upward through the top of the printer.
NOTE: DO NOT pull the paper downwards from the bottom. This could cause
the paper guides to bend.
4. Reload the paper (see page 346).

353
Appendix D Performance Limitations

354
 E Quick Change Memory
Cartridge (QCMC)

Overview
The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved
configurations, and custom files quickly through the printer’s control panel
with a user friendly interface. No external host or files are needed to transfer
this information to the QCMC. A “snapshot image” is saved of the printer’s
firmware, configuration settings, and custom files. The saved image can be
copied to any number of printers using the same QCMC so that the printers
will be identically configured (assumes same printer hardware and options are
present).
The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in
place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address when the cartridge is left
installed in a printer. This allows a mission critical printer to be exchanged
quickly with a spare printer that will be identically configured, including the
network MAC address.
The following are examples of how the QCMC may make printer management
more convenient:
• A site has 10 printers to install that should all be configured identically.
Rather than inputting the information through the control panel
individually to each printer, insert the QCMC into the first printer, capture
the changes, then easily share the image with the other nine printers.
• A site is adding additional printers and wants them configured the same
as the printers already installed, but is unsure what changes were
originally made. By using the QCMC to capture the exact image of the
older printers, no custom settings will be missed.
• A printer is set up on a network that is configured to only allow recognized
MAC addresses to access the network. If the printer with the QCMC
installed needs repair and must be removed from the network, the MAC
that resides on the QCMC can be easily transferred to the replacement
printer, along with all the configuration information and any other files
stored as the “snapshot image” on the QCMC, making the replacement
printer an exact duplicate for the downed printer. By using the MAC
address that resides on the QCMC, the replacement printer can be
installed without notifying the network administrator, thereby simplifying
the exchange.

355
Appendix E Installing the QCMC

Installing the QCMC

CAUTION You must power off the printer before you install or remove the QCMC,
or you may damage the QCMC and the printer. If you remove the QCMC
after powering on the printer with the QCMC installed, the fault message
“SD REMOVED Reboot Printer” will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the QCMC. You must cycle power.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Insert the SD card into the QCMC slot on the back of the printer.

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6

QCMC Slot

Figure 62. QCMC Slot on Back of Cabinet Model

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6
184951a

QCMC Slot

Figure 63. QCMC Slot on Back of Pedestal

356
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
NOTE: The MAC address residing on the QCMC will be used in place of the
MAC assigned to the printer’s own network card whenever the QCMC
is installed. If you do not want to identify the printer with this MAC
address, make sure the QCMC is removed from the printer before
attaching the printer to the network.
When the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC at power-up, a
check of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved
flash image available. If no printer flash image exists on the QCMC, the
software will then check to see if there are any saved configurations in the
printer’s NVRAM memory. If the QCMC is blank (no flash image) and saved
configurations are detected in the printer’s NVRAM then you will be prompted
with a message on the front panel to save the printer’s configuration to the
QCMC.

QMC DETECTED
Save to QCMC?
Continue Press <ENTER>
Skip Press <CANCEL>

NOTE: This screen will appear every time at power-up until the printer’s flash
is saved to the QCMC.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not save any information to the QCMC. On subsequent power-ups the
Save message on page 357 will display again.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online, but instead
will copy the printer’s entire flash image to the QCMC, creating a snapshot of
the printer’s memory.
Below is a list of items that will be saved to the QCMC:
• Printer Program File (software)
• Custom configurations (1–8)
• Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
• All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
• Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
• Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to
the printer.
While the printer is saving its QCMC settings to the EMC, the following
message will display. Do not interrupt the process.

357
Appendix E Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC

DO NOT PWR OFF

Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%

Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer
will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will
then reboot into normal operation.

Save Complete
Printer Will Now
Reboot...

If there is not enough space on the SD to save the entire flash image, you will
be prompted with the following message.

NOT ENOUGH
SPACE ON SD
Delete SD File

This is a fatal error and requires user intervention. Cycle power on the printer,
when prompted to save the QCMC select <CANCEL> to skip. The printer will
boot online and allow access to the EMC file menus located under the Printer
Control menu. Delete unnecessary SD files then try the QCMC Save
operation again.

358
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
Always power off the printer before removing or inserting the QCMC. Place
the QCMC into the second printer’s memory slot. Upon power up, the printer
software detects the presence of a QCMC and a check of the QCMC will be
performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image from this
QCMC on the printer. If no, the following message will display:

QCMC DETECTED
Copy to Printer?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>

NOTE: This message will appear every time at power-up until the QCMC
settings are copied to the printer.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not copy any information to the printer. On subsequent power-ups the
Copy message above will display again if the QCMC remains installed in the
printer.
NOTE: If the QCMC remains installed in the printer, the MAC address
onboard will be used in place of the resident MAC address to the
printer’s LAN/WAN interface card.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online immediately,
but will copy the contents of the QCMC to the printer’s flash, creating a clone
of the original printer. Before the copy process is allowed to continue, checks
of the printer configuration will be made. If either of the checks fail, a message
will display on the front panel (in the hierarchy shown on page 359) and the
printer will not copy any settings.

INVALID SD

Power Off Printer

Remove Cartridge

This means that the QCMC is not compatible with the printer’s software. A
software upgrade is required, or a different configured QCMC will be needed.

359
Appendix E Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer

A QCMC validation check will be performed to ensure the data stored on the
SD is not corrupted. If the test fails the following fault message will display.

QCMC DATA ERROR

ON SD
Delete & Resave
QCMC Data

This means that the data on the QCMC was not saved properly, and must be
deleted then resaved. Follow the instructions for deleting files, then repeat the
copying process.
If all the checks pass, then the printer will copy the files from the QCMC to the
target printer.

DO NOT PWR OFF

Copying QCMC To
Printer...
XX%

Upon successful completion, the printer will display the following message on
the front panel and reboot into normal operation.

Copy Complete

360
 F PTX_SETUP Commands

Overview
The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the
printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or
sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing debug
statements to downloading complete printer configurations.
This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands available to line matrix
printers.

The PTX_SETUP Commands

The PTX_SETUP commands were originally designed for the disk-based
laser and thermal printers with IGPs. However, line matrix printers can still
benefit from general functionalities provided by the PTX_SETUP commands.
Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1. PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an
IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In
a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP commands will be processed
by the base emulation.
2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are
now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and
FILE_IO are synonymous.
3. The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP
commands are in upper case characters only.
4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces
and tabs. This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier
readability.
5. The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new
line character.
6. Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The
offending command will be the first line of printed text.
7. Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a
single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single
semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for
multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.

361
Appendix F The PTX_SETUP Commands

General Commands
The original PTX_SETUP commands were implemented on the disk-based
legacy laser printers; however, many commands are general and are also
supported on line matrix printers. This section describes the existing
commands which work across all platforms, and provides a general
description of how commands are formed.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get
missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP
commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed
them within jobs.
PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:
(SFCC)PTX_SETUP
Command–Sub Command;Value
PTX_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the
exclamation mark (!, hex 21), and you wanted to load configuration number 4
and capture all incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the
following command:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN
PTX_END
Table 27 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations
and gives a brief description of the command. This section documents the
existence of PTX_SETUP commands which work across all platforms. The
following sections document commands which are specific to line matrix.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the
front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to
correct the error.

362
 General Commands

Table 27. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0-8. The PTX_SETUP

will load configuration Cfg. If
configuration Cfg was not previously
saved, the operator panel will
display an error message and the
current configuration will be kept.

SAVE Cfg Cfg must be 1-8. This command will

save the current configuration as
configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the
range of 1-8, the command is
ignored.

SETMENU Value;Menu_tag Menu_tag is the name of the menu

as defined in the menu file. Value is
the value to which the menu is to be
set.

POWERUP Cfg Sets the power-up configuration to

Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.
Cfg can be any value from 0-8,
where 0 is the factory default.

PRINT Cfg Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be

a number 1-8, or one of four pre-
defined configurations. The four
non-numeric configurations are
requested using the first character
for the CURRENT, FACTORY,
POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).

DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg.

Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.

UPLOAD Port;Cfg This command uploads the

configuration stored in location Cfg
to the port specified by Port. Port
must either be 1284 or SERIAL. Cfg
may be 1-8 or ALL.

DOWNLOAD Cfg This command saves the

configuration data that follows as
configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8
or END.

363
Appendix F The PTX_SETUP Commands

Table 27. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG OVERLAY Cfg This command overlays the

configuration data that follows on
existing configuration Cfg. Cfg must
be 1-8 (or END). If Cfg does not
exist then command is treated the
same as DOWNLOAD.

RESET Reboots the printer.

GET_NAMES “Port” This command uploads the names

of the configurations to the port
specified by Port. Port must either
be “1284” or “SERIAL”.

SET_NAME Cfg This command downloads a name

for the configuration specified by
Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8.

CLEAR_NAMES This command resets all of the

configuration names to their default
values.

MPI_SELECT MPI This command selects the active

Management Protocol Interface
(MPI). Currently there are two
selections “UCP” and “PXML”.

PNE_PORT Port This command selects the port that

the PNE will use to communicate to
the printer.
The valid ports are:
• DISABLE
• ETHERNET
• USB
NOTE: If ETHERNET is selected
but not enabled, the
selection will revert to
DISABLE.

364
 General Commands

Table 27. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

CONFIG PANEL LOCK This command locks the operator

out of the printer’s configuration
menu.

UNLOCK This command unlocks the printer’s

configuration menu and allows the
operator access to the menus. By
default, the menu is unlocked.

PNE_PORT_NUM Port Number This command sets the Port

Number the PNE uses to
communicate to the printer if the
PNE Port was set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.

PXML_PORT_NUM Port Number This command sets the Port

Number the PXML and UCP will use
to communicate to the printer if the
PXML Port is set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.

LP MODE n/a Protocol Protocol must be 0-4. This

command resets the software
protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050

365
Appendix F The PTX_SETUP Commands

Table 27. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

FILE_IO CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file

(DISK_IO) named Filename. Receipt of a
FILE_IO–CAPTURE command
without the Filename parameter will
force the file data to be written to
flash, and will end the file capture.

DRIVE Letter This command is parsed for

backwards compatibility. However,
since the flash file system is a single
device, the drive letter will be
ignored.

PROPS File;Prop The PROPS command will set the

file properties of a given file. The file
properties are a four letter, case
sensitive file descriptor. The
properties field can be used to
ensure that a file is used for its
intended purpose. Once properties
have been associated with a file,
they cannot be changed.

DEL Filename The DEL command will mark a file

as deleted. The space the file
occupied will be freed the next time
the printer is powered up.

366
 General Commands

Table 27. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

FILE_IO RUNFILE File;Prop The RUNFILE command will open

(DISK_IO) the file named File for printing. After
the PTX_END command is
processed, the contents of File will
get printed before any more data is
read from the host. If the Prop field
is present, RUNFILE will verify that
Prop matches the saved file
properties. Any mismatch will cause
the command to be ignored.

UPLOAD File;Port Reads the file named File out of the

flash file system and sends it to a
host computer via the Port I/O port.
Port is either 1284 (for reverse
nibble or byte mode transfer using
the parallel port), or SERIAL.
NOTE: if the Ethernet option is
installed, 1284 is used to upload
across the network.

MAXSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.

OPTIMIZE (none) Causes the printer to optimize the

Flash File System. The printer
automatically reboots during this
process.

PTX_END (none) (none) Exits the PTX_SETUP.

367
Appendix F The PTX_SETUP Commands

Summary of the CONFIG Command

The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and
downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure
50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and
UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be
DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to
configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the
uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by
the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.
The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect
the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If
the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the
operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be
accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your
setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active
configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is
correctly read from FLASH.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be
unavailable.
The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be
blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to
prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTX_SETUP
commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All
PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the
Protect Configurations feature.

Operation of the FILE_IO Command

When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;filename
command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for
data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite
Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will
be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be
printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.
Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored
permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to
manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having
sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until
the entire file is loaded. The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command
“FILE_IO–CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command
will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for
temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file
download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front
panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash.

368
 Line Matrix Commands

Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient
Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once
before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited
to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the
printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator
with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the
solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System. This can be
accomplished by selecting the Optimize & Reboot function in the Flash File
System menu under the ADVANCED USER menu, “Main File System.”
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the
printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.
Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's
program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading
process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.

Line Matrix Commands

Table 28 lists PTX_SETUP commands which apply to line matrix printers
only.

Table 28. Line Matrix PTX_SETUP Commands

Command Sub-Command Parameter Description

ENGINE EJECT Performs a page eject.

369
Appendix F The PTX_SETUP Commands

370
 G Customer Support

Printronix Customer Support Center

IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
• Model number
• Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
• Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
• Configuration printout:
Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press the ENTER (↵ ) key.
• Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
• Description of the problem (be specific)
• Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing
these samples may be required)
Americas (714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114
China (86) 800-999-6836
[Link]

Printronix Supplies Department

Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas (800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4132
China (86) 400-886-5598
India (800) 102-7869
[Link]

371
Appendix G Corporate Offices

Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at [Link]

372
 H Communication Notices

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the
U.S.A.
Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries. Consult your Printronix representative for
information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state
or imply that only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used.
Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is
the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-
Printronix product, program, or service.
Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not
give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in
writing, to:
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any
other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will
be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Printronix may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of
those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own
risk.

373
Appendix H Notices

Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled

environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments
may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on
development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these
measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore,
some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual
results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for
their specific environment.
Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the
suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly
available sources. Printronix has not tested those products and cannot
confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related
to non-Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix
products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix
offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in
recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings
can be found on Printronix’s Internet site at [Link]

Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Statements on page 376.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
• Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for
use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice,
all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or
partial copy.
• Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you
transfer the related Printronix product (which may be either machines you
own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You
must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property
taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization.
Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation.

374
Energy Star

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy with the goal of protecting the
environment by using energy efficient products.
Printronix participates in the Energy Star program for Imaging Equipment by
introducing printers that reduce power consumption when they are not being
used. Prior to 2012, Printronix certified products under the self-certification
program. In accordance with the latest requirements, Printronix now employs
approved third party test labs to certify that their product comply with the latest
Energy Star standards.
NOTE: The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement
of any product or service. More information about the Energy Star
program can be found at [Link]

375
Appendix H Communication Statements

Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

European Union Conformity

This product is in compliance with the EU

directives for safety, EMC, ROHS,
REACH, and WEEE. Please refer to the
Service and Support section at our web
site ([Link]) for the most up
to Declarations of Conformity.

Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,
including the fitting of non-Printronix option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication devices.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

376
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV
communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Printronix
cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Statement of CISPR 22 Compliance

Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.

Japanese VCCI Class A

German Conformity Statement

Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September
1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG
das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die:
Printronix GmbH
Goethering 56
D-63067 Offenbach Germany
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen
werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und
dafür aufzukommen.”

377
Appendix H Communication Statements

EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN
55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch
einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen
Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den
Printronix Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.

China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical
actions.

海拔高度和非热带性气候声明

仅适用于海拔 2000M 以下地区安全使用

仅适用于非热带气候条件下安全使用

378
LMPPLS, LMPPHS, LMPCLS, LMPCHS 系列
行列式打印機安全注意事項說明

為保護您的安全，使用本設備時，請遵循下列安全注意事項：
• 請依照設備上所有的警告與說明進行操作。
• 請確定電源的電壓與頻率符合設備的電氣等級標籤上指定的電壓與頻率。
• 請不要將任何物件塞入設備的開口。導電的異物可能會導致短路，引起火
災、電擊、或設備損傷。
• 不要對本設備進行機械或電氣修改。對經過修改的產品的安全與法規符合
性，不負任何責任。
• 不要阻礙或覆蓋產品的開口。永遠不要將產品放在靠近輻射來源或熱源的
地方。未能依照這些指引，將可能導致過熱情況，影響產品的可靠性。
• 產品是設計來配合有中性地線的電源系統使用。為降低電擊風險，請不要
將產品插入任何其他類型的電源系統。如果您不確定建物提供的電源類
型，請向建物管理員或合格電氣技師尋求協助。
• 不是所有的電源線都有相同的電流等級，請千萬不要將隨附於您設備的電
源線用在其他產品上。請勿在產品上使用家用延長電源線。對於那些有多
條電源線的產品，請確認您將所有的電源線拔下後，才算將系統電源完全
中斷。
• 甲類警語 :

379
Appendix H Communication Statements

Taiwan
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate
measures.

Korea
Class A
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Office Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for office use (Class A), this
equipment is intended to use in other than home area. Sellers or users need
to take note of this.
A 급 기기
( 업무용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는
이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을
목적으로 합니다 .
Class B
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Home Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for home use (Class B), this
equipment is intended to use mainly for home use and may be used in all
areas.
B 급 기기
( 가정용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 가정용 (B 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는
것을 목적으로 하며 , 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 .
CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s
safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock.

380
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software
including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement
apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied
with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of
your printer.

eCos License
This file is part of eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Red Hat, Inc.
eCos is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms
of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 or (at your option) any later version.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with eCos; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
eCos is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
As a special exception, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or
inline functions from this file, or you compile this file and link it with other
works to produce a work based on this file, this file does not by itself cause
the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License.
However the source code for this file must still be made available in
accordance with section (3) of the GNU General Public License.
This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why a work based on
this file might be covered by the GNU General Public License.
Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat, Inc. at
[Link]

381
Appendix H Software License Agreement

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and
distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.

Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation
software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You
can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can
change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for
a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make
sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer
you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the
software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients
to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems
introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputation.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We
wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually
obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent
this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
free use or not licensed at all.

382
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution, and modification
follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION, AND
MODIFICATION
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of
this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such
program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by
this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients
of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it,
thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part
thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice
that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty)
and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions,
and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if
the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)

383
Appendix H Software License Agreement

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable

sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights
to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically
performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to
distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed
only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.

384
 If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any
other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both
it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the
Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or
other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this
section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.

385
Appendix H Software License Agreement

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain

countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number
of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE
IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING,

386
REPAIR OR CORRECTION
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Artifex Portions Software Copyright Notices

Portions Copyright © 2001/2009 Artifex Software Inc.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Portions Copyright © 1998 Soft Horizons.
All Rights Reserved.

BSD License
Portions of this software may have been derived from OpenBSD, FreeBSD or
other sources, and are covered by the appropriate copyright disclaimers
included herein.
Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright (C) 2002 Red Hat, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

387
Appendix H Software License Agreement

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

388
 Index

A Print [Link], 235

PTX_SETUP Option, 230
Absorb After ^PN, 191 Pwr Save Control, 234
Absorb After ^PY, 189 RBN End Action, 236
Accented Char, PRINTER CONTROL, 219 RBN Low Action, 236
Acknowledge, Centronics Parallel Interface RBN Low Warn @, 236
Signals, 248 Rcv. Status Port, 234
Acoustic noise level, 330 Ret. Status Port, 235
Active Char Set SD File System, 233
3270 Params menu, 114 Set Lock Key, 235
5250 Params menu, 121 Set Sharing, 233
Active Emulation, 83 Shuttle Timeout, 233
Active Host, 82 Slow Paper Slew, 234
Active IGP Emulation, 83 AI 00 Spaces, 179, 191
Active Protocol, 84 Alarm, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
Adapter, Microsoft Loopback, 265 Alignment, 223
Add Alt. Char Set, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
header two-key download, 278 Alt. Set 80-9F, 131, 136, 149
manual two key-download, 278 Epson FX Emulation, 164
ADVANCE key, 29 Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
ADVANCED USER Menu, 220 Alt.. Set 80-9F, 134
Alarm, 234 ANSI Emulation menu, 166
Auto Elevator, 232 Autowrap, 170
Auto Locking, 232 Barcode Darkmode, 172
Cancel Key, 234 BC Check Digit, 172
Disp. Intensity, 237 Character Set, 171
Downloaded Fonts, 231 CPI/LPI Select, 168
Hex Dump Mode, 230 Define CR Code, 170
Job Sel/Typeface, 235 Define LF Code, 171
Main File System, 232 ESC c Sequence, 171
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, 231 ETX/ACK, 173
Power Saver Time, 234 Font Attributes, 168
Power Stacker, 231 Page Format, 169
Power-Up State, 230 Pos. on BC/OvrSz, 172
Print Energy, 237

389
 Printer Select, 171 B
Private Mode, 172
PUM Default, 172 BAD NVM CALL A, 292, 319
Received CR, 171 BAD NVM CALL 1, 292, 319
Received DEL, 172 BAD NVM CALL 2, 292, 319
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 171 BAD NVM CALL 3, 292, 319
Truncate PI Slew, 172 BAD NVM CALL 4, 292, 319
Append Rotated, 188 BAD NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 290
AR3240, 131 Bar Code Quality, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
ASCII Character Set, 335 Bar Code Verification, 286
ASCII data port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107 Barcode Darkmode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
ASCII Fault Messages, 290 Barcode Errors, 193
ASCII Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327 Barcode Options, 178
Auto Dump, DIAGNOSTICS, 241 AI 00 Spaces, 179
Auto Elevator, ADVANCED USER Menu, 232 C39 Compatbl., 180
Auto FF at ^PN, 192 I 2/5 Selection, 179
Auto Locking, ADVANCED USER Menu, 232 Optimized Ratio, 179
Auto Save Configuration, 62 Select SO Char, 179
Auto Save CONFIG. CONTROL menu UPC Descenders, 178
Auto Save, 92 User-Def Ratio, 179
Auto Skip At End, 117 Barcode Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Auto Switching submenu, 94 Barcode Size, IPDS Emulation, 199
Port Type, 94 Barcode Speed, IPDS Emulation, 199
Report Status, 95 Barcodes on Page, 230
Switch Out On, 95 Baud Rate, Serial submenu, 102
Timeout, 95 BC Check Digit, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Trickle Time, 95 BCD OPTIMIZATION menu
Auto Trickle Quiet Zone Fault, 228
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99 Bcodes Optimized, 230
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97 BUFFER OVERRUN message, 293
Auto Uppercase, 177 Buffer Size in K
Automatic Download, 260 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Autowrap, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
ANSI Emulation menu, 170 Serial submenu, 104
Epson FX Emulation, 163 Busy On Strobe, Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160 Busy, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153 Bxx ERROR
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 NO DOWNLOADER FOUND, 292, 319
Autowrap, LG Emulation, 209 Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*
message, 291, 318
B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*
message, 291, 318

390
B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD MODE Data Bit 8, 98
message, 291, 318 Data Polarity, 98
B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET Latch Data On, 99
message, 291, 318 PI Ignored, 98
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE* Prime Signal, 99
message, 291, 318 Resp. Polarity, 99
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM* TOF Action, 99
message, 291, 318 Trickle Time, 100
B30 STATUS INITIALIZING, 292, 318 Change Case, 3270 Params menu, 115
B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 292, 318 Changing parameter settings, 54
B51 XX% LOADING, 292, 318 Changing parameters, example, 58
C Changing Ribbon Cartridge, 50
Character Set, 130, 149
Cancel a print job, 33 ANSI Emulation menu, 171
CANCEL key, 30 ASCII, 335
Cancel Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234 Epson FX Emulation, 164
CARTRIDGE, 293 Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
CARTRIDGE AT END POINT message, 293 Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
CARTRIDGE INCOMPATIBLE message, 294 Character Sets, 135
CARTRIDGE MISSING message, 294 Characteristics, environmental, 329
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED message, 294 Cleaning
Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), 48 exterior, 283
CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH interior, 284
message, 294 Cleaning requirements, 283
CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 293
message, 294 Clear to Send (CTS), RS-232, 246
CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH message, 294 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH
CATASTROPHIC ERROR message, 294, 319 message, 293, 319
Centronics Parallel Interface, 247 Clip Page, 214
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248 CLOSE PLATEN message, 293
Acknowledge, 248 Code Page Subset, IPDS Emulation, 200
Busy, 248 COIL HOT ERR 1 message, 293
Data Lines 1 through 8, 248 COIL HOT ERR 2 message, 293
Data Strobe, 248 COIL TEMP FAIL message, 293
Fault, 248 Command
Online, 248 operation of FILE_IO, 368
Paper Empty (PE), 248 Commands
Paper Instruction (PI), 248 line matrix, 369
Prime, 248 PTX_SETUP, 361
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98 Compatbl. Mode, 181
Auto Trickle, 99 Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel
Buffer Size in K, 99 Interface, 249
Busy On Strobe, 99

391
Compatibility Op Control panel, 28
Auto Skip At End, 117 Control panel keys
CR at MPP+1, 116 ADVANCE, 29
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117 CANCEL, 30
FF After Job, 117 CONFIG, 30
FF Validity, 117 ENTER, 31
Last Char = FF, 116 ONLINE, 29
NL At MPP+1, 116 PREV or NEXT, 32
Null Suppression, 116 PREV + NEXT, 32
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116 SELECT, 30
Compatibility Op, 3270 Params menu, 116 TOF, 30
Compliance, Energy Star, 330 UP or DOWN, 31
Component locations, printer, 26 UP + DOWN, 31
Compressed CPI, 180 VIEW key, 29
Compressed Print, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154 Conventions, manual, 15
CONFIG command, summary, 368 Copying QCMC snapshot image, Quick Change
CONFIG key, 30 Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 359
Config Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206 CPI/LPI Select, 137
Configuration ANSI Emulation menu, 168
Main Menu, 53 CR at MPP+1, 116
overview, 53 CR Bold Select, 133, 135
Configurations CR Edit, 176
custom, 54 CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117
default, 54 CR, LG Emulation, 209
saving, 63 Currency Sign, 131
Configuration, Auto Save, 62 Custom configurations, 54
Configure Printer, Run Demo File, 280 Customer Support Center, 17, 371
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu, 91 C128 Mode Comp, 192
CONFIG. CONTROL menu C39 Compatbl., 180, 192
Delete Config., 92 D
Load Config., 91
Name Configs, 92 Darker print, Integrated Print Management
Power-Up Config., 92 System, 49
Print Config., 91 Data Bit 8, 194
Protect Configs., 92 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Reset Cfg Names, 92 Data Carrier Detect (DCD), RS-232, 246
Save Config., 91 Data Lines 1 through 8
Contact information, 17 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Control Code 06, 147 Data Polarity
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 Data Protocol, Serial submenu, 101
Control Control Code 08, 147 Data Set Ready (DSR), RS-232, 246

392
Data Strobe DIAGNOSTICS Menu, 238
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248 Auto Dump, 241
Data Term Ready, Serial submenu, 103 Feature File, 241
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), RS-232, 246 Paper Out Dots, 240
DBCS ASCII Mode, 83 Phase Value, 240
DBCS ASCII Style, 83 Print Statistics, 240
DBCS CPI, 82 Printer Mgmt, 241
Default Code Page, IPDS Emulation, 200 Printer Tests, 239
Default configurations, 54 Shuttle Type, 241
Default Font, IPDS Emulation, 200 Software Build, 241
Define CR Code, 130, 133, 135, 147, 176 System Memory, 240
ANSI Emulation menu, 170 Test Width, 240
Epson FX Emulation, 163 Dimensions, printer, 21, 329
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160 Display Functions, PCL-II Emulation, 205
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153 Display Language, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 Disp. Intensity, ADVANCED USER Menu, 237
Define LF Code, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176 DO NOT POWER OFF message, 295, 319
ANSI Emulation menu, 171 Documentation list, 16
Epson FX Emulation, 163 Download
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160 automatic, 260
P-Series XQ Emulation, 154 demo facility file, 280
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 files to Main File System, 272
Delete Config., 92 files to SD Card, 276
Delete Demo File, 281 manual three-key sequence, 263
Demo Facility, 280 manual two-key sequence, 262
configure printer to run demo file, 280 PTX_SETUP, 275
delete demo file, 281 TrueType Fonts, 277
download demo file, 280 web page, 257, 273
pause demo file, 281 windows driver, 259
start demo file, 281 Download Mode, Sending Firmware, 264
stop demo file, 281 Downloaded Fonts, ADVANCED USER Menu, 231
Demo File, Delete, 281 Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Demo File, Pause, 281 print, 279
Demo File, Start, 281 select, 279
Demo File, Stop, 281 DP FIFO Busy* message, 295
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message, 295, 319 D50 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 295
Diagnostics D50 STATUS UPGRADING PANEL
BAD NVM Errors, 290 message, 295, 319
EXX Errors, 290 D50 STATUS%XX Programming, 319
ILL NVM Errors, 290

393
 E ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES*
message, 297
Early Print Cmpl ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE
3270 Params menu, 114 message, 297, 321
Early Print Comp (Complete), IPDS Emulation, 199 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID
Electrical Characteristics message, 297, 321
ASCII, 331 Error Report, 183
H-Series, 332 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED
Elong/Alt. Font, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154 message, 297, 321
Emulation Extend, 134 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message, 297, 321
EMULATION Menu, 111 ERROR WRONG OEM message, 298, 321
EMULATION menu ERROR WRONG PRINTER TYPE
Postscript/PDF, 212, 213, 214, 215 message, 298, 321
Emulation, IGP/PGL, 173 ESC c Sequence, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
Emulation, PGL, 277 ESC d command, Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
Energy Star compliance, 330 ETHERNET ADDRESS Menu
E-Net Test Unavailable message, 297, 321 Gateway address, 106
ENTER key, 31 IP address, 106
Environmental characteristics, 329 IP Assignment, 106
Epson FX Character Set menu, 165 MAC address, 106
Epson FX Emulation, 163 Subnet mask, 106
Alt. Set 80-9F, 164 Ethernet Address Menu, 105
Autowrap, 163 ETHERNET DETECTED message, 298, 322
Character Set, 164 ETHERNET INITIALIZING message, 298, 322
Define CR Code, 163 Ethernet Interface, 252
Define LF Code, 163 ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu
Printer Select, 164 Ethernet speed, 108
20 CPI Condensed, 164 IPDS Data Port, 107
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID Job Control, 108
message, 297, 321 Keep alive timer, 107
Error Handling, 193 Offline Process, 108
Barcode Errors, 193 ETHERNET PARAMETERSMmenu
Error Markers, 193 ASCII data port, 107
Error Msgs, 193 Ethernet Params Menu, 107
Offpage Errors, 193 Ethernet speed, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
ERROR LOCKED SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Ethernet (LPR), Sending Firmware, 264
message, 297, 321 ETX/ACK, ANSI Emulation menu, 173
Error Markers, 193 EXCEPTION ERROR message, 298, 322
Error Msgs, 193 EXCESS RIBBON WEAR message, 298
ERROR NOR FLASHED WAS NOT CLEARED EXHAUST FAN FLT message, 298
message, 297, 321 Expanded Font, 181, 190
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message, 297, 321 Ext Execute Copy, 178

394
Exterior cleaning, 283 E32G CND 6 BP message, 296, 320
EXX Errors, Diagnostics, 290 E32H CND 7 BP message, 296, 320
E00 EXE @ ADDR0 message, 296, 320 E33 WRITE BP message, 296, 320
E01A TYPE 0x40 message, 296, 320 E34 TRACE CMPLT message, 296, 320
E01B TYPE 0x60 message, 296, 320 E99 UNKNOWN INT message, 296, 320
E02 MACHINE CHK message, 296, 320 F
E03A DSI HASH L message, 296, 320
E03B DSI HASH S message, 296, 320 Face CPI Delay, PCL-II Emulation, 204
E03C DSI BAT PL message, 296, 320 Fault messages
E03D DSI BAT PS message, 296, 320 ASCII, 290
E03E DSI CXIWX message, 296, 320 BAD NVM CALL A, 292, 319
E03F DSI CXOWX message, 296, 320 BAD NVM CALL 1, 292, 319
E03G DSI ECXIWX message, 296, 320 BAD NVM CALL 2, 292, 319
E03H DSI ECXOWX message, 296, 320 BAD NVM CALL 3, 292, 319
E04A ISI NO TRA message, 296, 320 BAD NVM CALL 4, 292, 319
E04B ISI DIRECT message, 296, 320 BUFFER OVERRUN, 293
E04C ISI PROTEC message, 296, 320 Bxx ERROR
E06 NOT ALIGNED message, 296, 320 NO DOWNLOADER FOUND, 292, 319
E07 ILLEGAL INS message, 296, 320 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*, 291, 318
E08 FLOATINGPNT message, 296, 320 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*, 291, 318
E12 SYSTEM CALL message, 296, 320 B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD
E13 TRACE INT message, 296, 320 MODE, 291, 318
E16 ITRANS MISS message, 296, 320 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET, 291, 318
E17 DLOAD MISS message, 296, 320 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE*, 291, 318
E18 DSTORE MISS message, 296, 320 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS
E19 BREAKPOINT message, 296, 320 CKSUM*, 291, 318
E20 SYS MANAGE message, 296, 320 B30 STATUS INITIALZING, 292, 318
E30 DEBUGGER message, 296, 320 B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 292, 318
E31A EVENT O BP message, 296, 320 B51 XX% LOADING, 292, 318
E31B EVENT 1 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE, 293
E31C EVENT 2 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE AT END POINT, 293
E31D EVENT 3 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE INCOMPATIBLE, 294
E31E EVENT 4 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE MISSING, 294
E31F EVENT 5 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED, 294
E31G EVENT 6 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH, 294
E31H EVENT 7 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH, 294
E32A CND 0 BP message, 296, 320 CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH, 294
E32B CND 1 BP message, 296, 320 CATASTROPHIC ERROR, 294, 319
E32C CND 2 BP message, 296, 320 CLEAR PAPER JAM, 293
E32D CND 3 BP message, 296, 320 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM
E32E CND 4 BP message, 296, 320 FLASH, 293, 319
E32F CND 5 BP message, 296, 320 CLOSE PLATEN, 293
COIL HOT ERR 1, 293

395
 COIL HOT ERR 2, 293 E03H DSI ECXOWX, 296, 320
COIL TEMP FAIL, 293 E04A ISI NO TRA, 296, 320
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED, 295, 319 E04B ISI DIRECT, 296, 320
DO NOT POWER OFF, 295, 319 E04C ISI PROTEC, 296, 320
DP FIFO Busy*, 295 E06 NOT ALIGNED, 296, 320
D50 STATUS UPGRADING PANEL, 295, 319 E07 ILLEGAL INS, 296, 320
D51 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 295 E08 FLOATINGPNT, 296, 320
D51 STATUS%XX Programming, 319 E12 SYSTEM CALL, 296, 320
E-Net Test Unavailable, 297, 321 E13 TRACE INT, 296, 320
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321 E16 ITRANS MISS, 296, 320
ERROR LOCKED E17 DLOAD MISS, 296, 320
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn, 297, E18 DSTORE MISS, 296, 320
321 E19 BREAKPOINT, 296, 320
ERROR NOR FLASHED WAS NOT E20 SYS MANAGE, 296, 320
CLEARED, 297, 321 E30 DEBUGGER, 296, 320
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 297, 321 E31A EVENT O BP, 296, 320
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING E31B EVENT 1 BP, 296, 320
QUEUES*, 297 E31C EVENT 2 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PRINTER TYPE, 298, 321 E31D EVENT 3 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PROGRAM NOT E31E EVENT 4 BP, 296, 320
COMPATIBLE, 297, 321 E31F EVENT 5 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321 E31G EVENT 6 BP, 296, 320
ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT E31H EVENT 7 BP, 296, 320
DETECTED, 297, 321 E32A CND 0 BP, 296, 320
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 297, 321 E32B CND 1 BP, 296, 320
ERROR WRONG OEM, 298, 321 E32C CND 2 BP, 296, 320
ETHERNET DETECTED, 298, 322 E32D CND 3 BP, 296, 320
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 298, 322 E32E CND 4 BP, 296, 320
EXCEPTION ERROR, 298, 322 E32F CND 5 BP, 296, 320
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR, 298 E32G CND 6 BP, 296, 320
EXHAUST FAN FLT, 298 E32H CND 7 BP, 296, 320
E00 EXE @ ADDR0, 296, 320 E33 WRITE BP, 296, 320
E01A TYPE 0x40, 296, 320 E34 TRACE CMPLT, 296, 320
E01B TYPE 0x60, 296, 320 E99 UNKNOWN INT, 296, 320
E02 MACHINE CHK, 296, 320 FIRMWARE ERROR, 299
E03A DSI HASH L, 296, 320 FLASH CHECK RETURN, 299, 322
E03B DSI HASH S, 296, 320 FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED, 299, 322
E03C DSI BAT PL, 296, 320 FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2, 299, 322
E03D DSI BAT PS, 296, 320 FM HEADER ERROR, 299
E03E DSI CXIWX, 296, 320 FRAMING ERROR, 299
E03F DSI CXOWX, 296, 320 GENERATING XX% NAND FLASH
E03G DSI ECXIWX, 296, 320 TABLE, 299, 322

396
HAMMER COIL BAD, ###, 300 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE
HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD*, 300 CONTROL, 304, 324
HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED*, 300 PROCESSOR HALTED
HMR BANK FAN FLT, 300 EC_FAULT_RTSYS2, 304, 324
H-Series, 310 PROTECTED INSTR *, 304
H00: PCI SLOT ?, 299, 322 PS/PDF ERROR CHECK ERROR, 304
H01: PCI J12, 299, 322 PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR, 304
ILL EXT BUS ACC *, 300 PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS, 304
ILL NVM VALUE 5, 301, 323 PS/PDF ERROR I/O ERROR, 304
ILL NVM VALUE 6, 301, 323 PS/PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED, 305
ILL NVM VALUE 7, 301, 323 PS/PDF ERROR STACK ERROR, 305
ILLGL OPR ACCSS *, 301 PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR, 305
INITIALIZING.., 301, 323 PWRSUPP VOLT *, 305
INTAKE FAN CHECK, 301, 323 REMOVE USED SPX, 305, 324
INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00, 301, 323 RESTORING BOOT CODE, 305, 324
LO DRV. SHORT *, 301 RIB INVLD CMD*, 305
LOAD PAPER, 301 RIBBON STALL, 305
LOADING PROGRAM FROM RIBBON UNDER 2%, 306
PORT XX%, 302, 323 SCS COMMAND ERROR, 325
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 302, 324 SD CARD ERROR, 306, 325
NEW SPX DETECTED, 302, 324 SD FILE EXISTS, 306
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 302, 324 SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files, 306
ONLINE, 302, 324 SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big, 306
PANEL BAD CHECKSUM, 302, 324 SD FILESYS WRITE, 306
PAP BAD TABLE *, 302 SD INSERTED, 306
PAP FIFO OVERFL *, 302 SD NOT FOUND, 306
PAP FIFO UNDRFL *, 302 SD READING, 306
PAP ILLGL ST *, 303 SD REMOVED, 306
PAP INVLD CMD *, 303 SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 307
PAP INVLD PARM *, 303 SD WRITING, 307
PAPER REQUESTED, 303 SDSC CARD NOT SUPPORTED, 307, 325
PARAMETER ERROR*, 324 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED, 307, 325
PARITY ERROR, 303 SECURITY VIOLATION, 307, 325
PLAT DRVR CIR, 324 SF ERROR, 307, 325
PLAT INV CMD *, 303 SHUTL INV CMD *, 307
PLAT INV PARM *, 303 SHUTL INV PARM *, 307
PLAT INV STATE *, 303 SHUTL OVR SPEED*, 307
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN SHUTTLE JAM, 307
PROGRESS, 303, 324 SHUTTLE STALL, 308, 325
POWERSUPPLY HOT *, 303 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 308
PRINTER HOT *, 303 SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER, 308

397
 SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT 437 REG MISSING, 313
DETECTED, 308, 325 438 TIP MISMATCH, 313
SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS 439 SHTL MISMATCH, 313
ENABLED, 308, 325 445 SD INSERTED, 313
SSTACKER JAM, 308 446 SD REMOVED, 314
STACKER FAULT, 308 447 SD FL EXIST, 314
STACKER FULL, 308 448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 314
SYS R/T ERROR, 325 449 SD FILE WRITE, 314
TCB CORRUPTED*, 309 450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big, 314
TCP PORT BUSY, 309, 326 451 SD NOT FOUND, 314
UP DRV. SHORT*, 309 452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files, 314
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX*, 309 453 SD READING, 314
WELD NOT DETECT, 309 454 SD WRITING, 314
WELD SNSR ERROR, 309 607 CTL VOLT FAIL *, 314
WELD SNSR MISSING, 309 608 DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD, 314
XXXX CHECKING PATTERN, 309 609 EXHAUST FAN CHECK, 315
XXXX MEMORY FAILURE, 309 613 HAM. COIL BAD, 315
XXXX WRITING PATTERN, 309 614 HAMMER BANK* NOT INSTALLED, 315
x/y BARCODES / Not Found, 292 615 HAMMER FAN CHECK, 315
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 311 617 LOWER DRIVER SHORT*, 315
104 POWERSUPPLY HOT*, 311 619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT*, 315
105 PRINTER HOT*, 311 620 POWER VOLT CHECK*, 315
12 VOLT FAILED*, 291 622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT*, 315
401 BUFFER OVERRUN, 311 623 STACKER FAULT, 316
402 CLEAR PAPER JAM, 311 624 UPPER DRIVER SHORT*, 316
403 CLOSE PLATEN, 311 702 FIRMWARE ERROR, 316
409 FRAMING ERROR, 311 703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC *, 316
410 LOAD PAPER, 311 704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC*, 316
411 PARITY ERROR, 311 705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS *, 316
414 RIBBON STALL, 312 706 PAP BAD TABLE*, 316
415 SHUTTLE JAM, 312 708 PAPER FIFO OVERFLOW*, 316
416 STACKER FULL, 312 709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW*, 316
417 STACKER JAM, 312 710 PAP ILLGL ST*, 316
418 RBN INK LOW, 312 712 PAP INVLD CMD*, 316
419 RBN INK OUT*, 312 713 PAP INVLD PARM*, 316
420 EXC RBN WEAR, 312 717 PLAT INV CMD*, 317
423 OLD RIBBON, 312 718 PLAT INV PARM*, 317
425 UNKNOWN RBN2, 312 719 PLAT INV STATE*, 317
427 CRTG MISSING, 313 720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION*, 317
428 CRTG COMM ER, 313 721 RIB INVLD CMD*, 317
432 CRT NOT SET, 313 723 SHUTL INV CMD*, 317
435 NO WELD, 313 724 SHUTL INV PARM*, 317

398
 725 SHUTL OVER SPEED*, 317 Graphic Chek Cod, 5250 Params menu, 122
727 SOFTWARE ERROR*, 317 Graphic Chek Err, 5250 Params menu, 122
730 TCB CORRUPTED*, 317 Graphics Density, PCL-II Emulation, 204
733 DP FIFO Busy*, 317 Graphics enhancement, 15
Fault, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248 Graphics Options, 188
Feature File, DIAGNOSTICS, 241 Absorb After ^PN, 191
Features, printer, 11 Absorb After ^PY, 189
FF After Job, 117 AI 00 Spaces, 191
FF Valid at TOF, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161 Append Rotated, 188
FF Validity, 117 Auto FF at ^PN, 192
FF, LG Emulation, 210 C128 Mode Comp, 192
File Properties Not Shown in Menus, 273 C39 Compatbl., 192
File Types, firmware, 256 Expanded Font, 190
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus, 272 Ignore Dots, 188
FIRMWARE ERROR message, 299 Ignore Spaces, 189
Firmware File Types, 256 Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 192
FLASH CHECK RETURN message, 299, 322 IGP110 Compatbl., 192
FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED message, 299, 322 I25 Selection, 190
FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2 message, 299, 322 LP+ Font, 190
FM HEADER ERROR message, 299 Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
Font Attributes, 138 MSI Check Digit, 190
ANSI Emulation menu, 168 PDF Size Comp., 192
Font Set, 194 Print Quality, 190
Font Size, IPDS Emulation, 198 Rot. Char Size, 189
Fonts, TrueType, 277 Slash 0, 188
Font, LG Emulation, 208 True Vert 1/10, 189
Form Length, 84, 85 Truncate Alpha, 189
Form Width, 84, 85 UPC Descenders, 189
Format Control Width Limit, 191
3270 Params menu, 118 Graphics Print, IPDS Emulation, 198
5250 Params menu, 123 Graphics Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Forms Handling, 177 Graphics Scaling, IPDS Emulation, 200
FRAMING ERROR message, 299 Graphics Spd-Up, 83
Framing Errors, Serial submenu, 105 Gray Adjust, 215
Frequent Problems, Solutions, 289 H
G
HAMMER COIL BAD, ### Message, 300
Gateway address HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD* message, 300
Ethernet Address Menu, 106 HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED* message, 300
General PTX_SETUP commands, 362 HD Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327
GENERATING XX% NAND FLASH TABLE Header Two Key-Download, 278
message, 299, 322 Hex Dump Mode, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
Graphic CharSize, IPDS Emulation, 200 Hex Dump, printing, 287

399
Hexdump Mode, IPDS Emulation, 201 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
HMR BANK FAN FLT Message, 300 Auto Trickle, 97
Horiz Forms, 86 Buffer Size in K, 96
Horiz Forms, LG Emulation, 209 Offline Process, 97
Hor. Quiet Zone, 227 Prime Signal, 96
Host Command, 137 TOF Action, 96
Host Form Length, 180 Trickle Time, 97
HOST INTERFACE Menu, 93 Ignore Char, 181
Auto Switching, 94 Ignore Chars, 193
Centronics (Parallel), 98 Ignore CH#1, 194
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional), 96 Ignore CH#2, 194
Serial, 100 Ignore Dots, 188
Host Override Ignore Spaces, 189
3270 Params menu, 118 Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 192
5250 Params menu, 122 Ignore/DB8 Setup, 193
Host PI, 194 Data Bit 8, 194
HS Print (High Speed Print), P-Series XQ Ignore Chars, 193
Emulation, 154 Ignore CH#1, 194
H-Series Fault Messages, 310 Ignore CH#2, 194
H-Series Firmware, Main Menu, 80 IGP/PGL Emulation, 173
H-Series Hangul configuring with the control panel, 174
KS Emulation, 133 IGP/PGL submenu, 175
KSSM Emulation, 135 Auto Uppercase, 177
H-Series Hanzi Big5 Autowrap, 176
LQ-1600K, 129 Barcode Options, 178
H-Series Hanzi GB Compatbl. Mode, 181
LQ-1600K, 129 Compressed CPI, 180
H-Series Kanji CR Edit, 176
LQ-1600K, 129 Define CR (Carriage Return) Code, 176
H-Series Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327 Define LF (Line Feed) Code, 176
H00: PCI SLOT ? message, 299, 322 Error Report, 183
H01: PCI J12 message, 299, 322 Expanded Font, 181
I Ext Execute Copy, 178
Forms Handling, 177
I 2/5 Selection, 179 Host Form Length, 180
Idle Response, Serial submenu, 104 Ignore Char, 181
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249 PGL SFCC, 176
Byte Mode, 249 PI Slew Range, 176
Compatibility Mode, 249 Power On IGP/PGL, 178
Nibble Mode, 249 Power on S-Mode, 182
Signals, 250 Print Quality, 182
Printer PI Line, 182

400
 Scalable Size, 181 Interfaces
Select Font, 177, 183 printer, 243
Select LPI, 177 specifications, 332
Skip Cmd Prefix, 177 Interior cleaning, 284
Slash 0, 177 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00
True Form Slew, 182 message, 301, 323
Trunc Dyn Data, 183 Intervention Req, 3270 Params menu, 115
Var Form Adjust, 180 IP address
Var Form Type, 180 Ethernet Address Menu, 106
IGP/PGL, Font Set menu, 184 IP Assignment
IGP/VGL Emulation, 185 Ethernet Address Menu, 106
configuring with the control panel, 186 IPDS Data Port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
IGP/VGL Font Set Menu, 196 IPDS Emulation, 197
IGP/VGL submenu, 186 Barcode Quality, 199
Error Handling, 193 Barcode Size, 199
Font Set, 194 Barcode Speed, 199
Graphics Options, 188 Code Page Subset, 200
Ignore/DB8 Setup, 193 Default Code Page, 200
LPI, 188 Default Font, 200
PI Control, 194 Early Print Comp (Complete), 199
Prt to Emulate, 195 Font Size, 198
SFCC & Pwrup, 187 Graphic CharSize, 200
IGP110 Compatbl., 192 Graphics Quality, 199
ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 300 Graphics Scaling, 200
ILL NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 290 Hexdump Mode, 201
ILL NVM VALUE 5 message, 301, 323 I2/5 Checksum, 200
ILL NVM VALUE 6 message, 301, 323 Print IPDS Fonts, 201
ILL NVM VALUE 7 message, 301, 323 Print Quality, 198
ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 301 VPA Check, 200
Indian Option, 144 I2/5 Checksum, IPDS Emulation, 200
Indian Option (Indian Language), 88 I-2/5 Guard Bars, LG Emulation, 210
INITIALIZING... message, 301, 323 I25 Selection, 190
Installing Quick Change Memory Cartridge J
(QCMC), 356
Install, Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265 Job Control, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
INTAKE FAN CHECK message, 301, 323 Job Sel/Typeface, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Integrated Print Management System, 48
Darker Print, 49
Lighter Print, 49

401
 K Barcode Height, 146
Barcode x-offset, 146
Keep alive timer, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107 CPI/LPI Select, 137
KS Emulation, 133 Error Handling, 146
Alt. Set 80-9F, 134 Font Attributes, 138
Autowrap, 134 Host Command, 137
CR Bold Select, 133 H-Series Hangul, 132
Define CR Code, 133 H-Series Hanzi Big5, 127
Define LF Code, 134 H-Series Hanzi GB, 126
Emulation Extend, 134 H-Series Kanji, 128
Printer Select, 134 Indian Option, 144
KSSM Emulation, 135 Page Format, 143
Alt. Set 80-9F, 136 Print Char. Set, 144
Autowrap, 136 Printer Protocol, 137
Character Sets, 135 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 145
CR Bold Select, 135 Set Substitution, 146
Define CR Code, 135 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII Indian
Define LF Code, 136 Language) submenu, 124
Printer Select, 136 LO DRV. SHORT * message, 301
20 CPI Condensed, 136 Load Config., 90, 91
L LOAD PAPER message, 301
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%
Label specifications, 328
message, 302, 323
Last Char = FF, 116
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH
Latch Data On
message, 302, 324
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Loading Used Ribbon, 49
LG Emulation
LPI, 188
Autowrap, 209
LPI Adjust, 86
CR, 209
LPI Adjust, PCL-II Emulation, 205
FF, 210
LP, LG Emulation, 209
Font, 208
LP+ Font, 190
Horiz Forms, 209
LQ-1600K
I-2/5 Guard Bars, 210
Alt. Set 80-9F, 131
LP, 209
AR3240, 131
Plot Mode Opt, 210
Autowrap, 130
Print Mode Opt, 210
Character Set, 130
Unsolicited Rpt, 210
Currency Sign, 131
Vert Forms, 208
Define CR Code, 130
Lighter print, Integrated Print Management
Define LF Code, 130
System, 49
H-Series Hanzi Big5, 129
Line Matrix Commands, 369
H-Series Hanzi GB, 129
Line Terminator, PCL-II Emulation, 205
H-Series Kanji, 129
LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu

402
 Printer Select, 130 OpenPrint SURE SCAN, 222
20 CPI Condensed, 131 PRINTER CONTROL, 216
M Printer Mgmt, 242
Menus
MAC address file properties not shown, 273
Ethernet Address Menu, 106 Mgmt Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Main File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 232 Mgmt Protocol, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Main File System, Download Files, 272 Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265
Main Menu Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
H-Series Firmware, 80 Move to TOF, 215
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF MSI Check Digit, 190
Firmware, 79
N
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, 78
P8000 ANSI Firmware, 77 Name Configs, 92
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, 81 Navigating the menus, 55
P8000 LG Firmware, 76 NETWORK SETUP Menu, 105
P8000 PCL-II Firmware, 75 Ethernet Address, 105
P8000 STD Firmware, 73 Ethernet Params, 107
P8000 TN Firmware, 74 NEW SPX DETECTED message, 302, 324
Maintenance, 15 Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
Manual NL At MPP+1, 116
conventions, 15 noise level, acoustic, 330
related documents, 16 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED message, 302,
special information, 16 324
warnings, 16 Not Shown in Menus, Filename Extensions, 272
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence, 263 Null Suppression, 116
Manual Two-Key Download, 278 O
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
Margins, 85 Offline Process
Max Line Width, 86 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Max Line Width, PCL-II Emulation, 204 Offline Process, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
Max PI 16, 195 Offline Process, Serial submenu, 105
Max. Print Width Offpage Errors, 193
3270 Params menu, 118 One Char Enquiry, Serial submenu, 104
5250 Params menu, 123 Online
Menu Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
ADVANCED USER, 220 ONLINE key, 29
CONFIG. CONTROL, 91 ONLINE message, 302, 324
DIAGNOSTICS, 238 Open Platen @ BOF, 90
EMULATION, 111 Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
IGP/PGL Font Set, 184 PRINTER CONTROL, 217
navigating, 55 OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware,
NETWORK SETUP, 105 Main Menu, 79

403
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, Main Paper
Menu, 78 reload, 34
OpenPrint SURE SCAN menu, 222 stacker, power, 337
Alignment, 223 unload, 45
Barcodes on Page, 230 Paper Empty (PE)
Bcodes Optimized, 230 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Hor. Quiet Zone, 227 Paper Instruction (PI)
Optimize Barcode, 222 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Update PDF, 229 Paper Out Dots, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Ver. Erase Zone, 228 PAPER REQUESTED message, 303
Operating modes, 27 Paper Size, 87, 213
Operation of FILE_IO command, 368 Paper Size Fault, 214
Operational procedures Paper specifications, 328
cancel a print job, 33 Parallel Interface
reload paper, 34 Centronics, 247
unload paper, 45 Parallel, Sending Firmware, 270
Optimize Barcode, 222 PARAMETER ERROR* message, 324
Optimized Ratio, 179 Parameter settings
Optimizing print quality, 68 changing, 54
Optimizing print speed, 69 saving, 54
Output Darkness, 48 Parameters, changing, example, 58
Overstrike, 148 PARITY ERROR message, 303
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 Parity, Serial submenu, 103
Overview, Main Menu, 53 Pause Demo File, 281
Overview, printer models, 11 PCL-II Emulation, 202
P Config Print, 206
Display Functions, 205
Page Format, 143 Face CPI Delay, 204
ANSI Emulation menu, 169 Graphics Density, 204
Page Length Rep, 86 Line Terminator, 205
Page Length Rep, PCL-II Emulation, 204 LPI Adjust, 205
Page L./Inches, PCL-II Emulation, 205 Max Line Width, 204
Page L./Lines, PCL-II Emulation, 205 Page Length Rep, 204
PANEL BAD CHECKSUM message, 302, 324 Page L./Inches, 205
Panel Display, PRINTER CONTROL, 218 Page L./Lines, 205
PAP BAD TABLE * message, 302 Perforation Skip, 204
PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 302 Primary Char. Set, 204
PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 302 PTX Linefeed, 205
PAP ILLGL ST * message, 303 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 206
PAP INVLD CMD * message, 303 Second Char. Set, 204
PAP INVLD PARM * message, 303 Symbol Set Print, 206
PDF Size Comp., 192

404
Perforation Skip, PCL-II Emulation, 204 POWER SUPPLY HOT * message, 303
PGL Emulation, 277 Power Up ^ F, 188
PGL SFCC, 84, 176 Power Up ^ X, 188
Phase Value, DIAGNOSTICS, 240 Power Up ^PY, 188
PI Control, 194 Powering on the printer, 27
Host PI, 194 Power-on S-Mode, 182
Max PI 16, 195 Power-Up Config, 90
Printer PI, 194 Power-Up Config., 92
PI Ignored Power-Up State, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98 PREV or NEXT key, 32
PI Slew Range, 176 PREV + NEXT key, 32
PLAT DRVR CIR message, 324 Primary Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
PLAT INV CMD * message, 303 Prime Signal
PLAT INV PARM * message, 303 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
PLAT INV STATE * message, 303 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN PROGRESS Prime, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
message, 303, 324 Print Char. Set, 144
Plot Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210 Print Config., 91
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, ADVANCED Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
USER, 231 Print Energy, ADVANCED USER Menu, 237
PNE Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242 Print Hist. Log, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
PNE Port Timeout, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242 Print IPDS Fonts, IPDS Emulation, 201
PNE Port, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242 Print job, cancel, 33
Poll Character, Serial submenu, 104 Print Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210
Poll Response, Serial submenu, 104 Print Quality, 182, 190
Port Type, Auto Switching submenu, 94 optimizing, 68
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116 Print speed, optimizing, 69
Postscript/PDF submenu Print Statistics, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Clip Page, 214 Printer
Gray Adjust, 215 component locations, 26
Move to TOF, 215 control panel, 28
Paper Size, 213 dimensions, 21, 329
Paper Size Fault, 214 exterior cleaning, 283
Resolution, 212 features, 11
Pos. on BC/OvrSz, ANSI Emulation menu, 172 interior cleaning, 284
Power Consumption maintenance, 15
ASCII, 331 models, 11
H-Series, 332 operating modes, 27
Power On IGP/PGL, 178 power paper stacker, 337
Power requirements, 19 powering on, 27
Power Saver Time, ADVANCED USER, 234 run demo file, 280
Power Stacker, ADVANCED USER Menu, 231

405
 site requirements, 19 Proprinter XL Character Set menu, 162
weight, 329 Proprinter XL Emulation, 160
PRINTER CONTROL Menu, 216 Alt. Char Set, 161
Accented Char, 219 Autowrap, 160
Bar Code Quality, 217 Character Set, 161
Display Language, 218 Define CR Code, 160
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form), 217 Define LF Code, 160
Panel Display, 218 FF Valid at TOF, 161
Ribbon End Point, 217 20 CPI Condensed, 161
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), 217 Protect Configs., 92
Unidirectional, 218 PROTECTED INSTR * message, 304
View Function, 218 Prt Partial Line
ZTP SETTINGS, 217 3270 Params menu, 114
PRINTER HOT * message, 303 5250 Params menu, 121
Printer interfaces, 243 Prt to Emulate, 195
PRINTER MGMT Menu P-Series Character Set menu, 150
Mgmt Port Number, 242 PSeries Dbl High, 149
Mgmt Protocol, 242 P-Series Emulation, 147
PNE Port, 242 Alt. Set 80-9F, 149
PNE Port Number, 242 Autowrap, 148
PNE Port Timeout, 242 Character Set, 149
Status Port Numb, 242 Control Code 06, 147
Printer Mgmt Menu, 242 Control Code 08, 147
Printer Mgmt, DIAGNOSTICS, 241 Define CR Code, 147
Printer PI, 194 Define LF Code, 148
Printer PI Line, 182 FF Valid at TOF, 149
Printer Protocol, 137 Overstrike, 148
Printer Select, 130, 134, 136 PSeries Dbl High, 149
ANSI Emulation menu, 171 P-Series SFCC, 148
Epson FX Emulation, 164 SFCC d Command, 149
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156 VFU Select, 149
Printer Tests, DIAGNOSTICS, 239 P-Series SFCC, 85, 148
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL P-Series XQ Emulation, 153
message, 304, 324 Autowrap, 153
Printing speed, 333 Compressed Print, 154
Printing, Hex Dump, 287 Control Code 06, 153
PrintNet Enterprise, consumable monitoring, 14 Define CR Code, 153
Printronix_SETUP Option, overview, 361 Define LF Code, 154
Private Mode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172 Elong/Alt. Font, 154
Problems, frequent, 289 HS Print (High Speed Print), 154
PROCESSOR HALTED EC_FAULT_RTSYS2 Slew Relative, 155
message, 304, 324

406
 Upr. Case Select, 155 Form Length, 84, 85
VFU Select, 154 Form Width, 84, 85
PS/PDF ERROR CHECK ERROR message, 304 Graphics Spd-Up, 83
PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR Horiz Forms, 86
message, 304 Indian Option (Indian Language), 88
PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS message, 304 Load Config., 90
PS/PDF ERROR I/O ERROR message, 304 LPI Adjust, 86
PS/PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED message, 305 Margins, 85
PS/PDF ERROR STACK ERROR message, 305 Max Line Width, 86
PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR message, 305 Open Platen @ BOF, 90
PTX Linefeed, PCL-II Emulation, 205 Page Length Rep, 86
PTX Transparent Paper Size, 87
3270 Params menu, 114 PGL SFCC, 84
5250 Params menu, 121 Power-Up Config, 90
PTX _SETUP Option, ADVANCED USER P-Series SFCC, 85
Menu, 230 Resolution, 87
PTX_SETUP commands, 361 Ribbon End Point, 90
general, 362 Save Config, 90
PTX_SETUP Download, 275 Select CPI, 84
PUM Default, ANSI Emulation menu, 172 Select LPI, 84
Pwr Save Control, ADVANCED USER, 234 Slow Paper Slew, 90
PWRSUPP VOLT * message, 305 Typeface, 83
P8000 ANSI Firmware, Main Menu, 77 Vert Forms, 86
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, Main Menu, 81 ZTP Data Time, 82
P8000 LG Firmware, Main Menu, 76 ZTP TearDistance, 82
P8000 PCL-II Firmware, Main Menu, 75 ZTP Wait Time, 82
P8000 STD Firmware, Main Menu, 73 Quiet Zone Fault, 228
P8000 TN Firmware, Main Menu, 74 R
Q
RBN End Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
QCMC, 355 RBN Low Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 355 RBN Low Warn @, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
copying QCMC snapshot image, 359 Rcv. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
installation, 356 Receive Data (RD), RS-232, 246
saving printer’s configuration, 357 Received CR, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
QUICK SETUP menu Received DEL, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Active Emulation, 83 Reload paper, 34
Active Host, 82 REMOVE USED SPX message, 305, 324
Active IGP Emulation, 83 Report Status, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Active Protocol, 84 Request to Send
DBCS ASCII Mode, 83 RS-232, 246
DBCS ASCII Style, 83 Serial submenu, 103
DBCS CPI, 82

407
Requirements SD CARD ERROR message, 306, 325
power, 19 SD Card, download files to, 276
printer site, 19 SD FILE EXISTS message, 306
Reset Cfg Names, 92 SD File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 145 SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files message, 306
ANSI Emulation menu, 171 SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big message, 306
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, PCL-II Emulation, 206 SD FILESYS WRITE message, 306
Resolution, 87, 212 SD INSERTED message, 306
Resp. Polarity SD NOT FOUND message, 306
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99 SD READING message, 306
RESTORING BOOT CODE message, 305, 324 SD REMOVED message, 306
Ret. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235 SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED
RIB INVLD CMD* message, 305 message, 307
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications SD WRITING message, 307
ASCII, 327 SDSC CARD NOT SUPPORTED
HD, 327 message, 307, 325
H-Series, 327 Second Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Ribbon Cartridge, changing, 50 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED
Ribbon End Point, 90 message, 307, 325
Ribbon End Point, PRINTER CONTROL, 217 SECURITY VIOLATION message, 307, 325
RIBBON STALL message, 305 Select CPI, 84
RIBBON UNDER 2% message, 306 Select Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
Rot. Char Size, 189 Select Font, 177, 183
RS-232 SELECT key, 30
Clear to Send (CTS), 246 Select LPI, 84, 177
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 246 Select SO Char, 179
Data Set Ready (DSR), 246 Sending Firmware in Download Mode, 264
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 246 ethernet (LPR), 264
Receive Data (RD), 246 Parallel, 270
Request to Send (RTS), 246 Serial, 271
Transmit Data (TD), 246 USB, 264
RS-232 Serial Interface, 245 Serial Interface, RS-232, 245
Run Demo File, 280 Serial Matrix Character Set menu, 158
S Serial Matrix Emulation, 155
Alt. Set 80-9F, 157
Save Config, 90, 91 Autowrap, 156
Save, Auto, 62 Character Set, 157
Saving new configurations, 63 Control Code 06, 156
Saving parameter settings, 54 Define CR Code, 156
Saving Printer’s Configuration, Quick Change Define LF Code, 156
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 357 ESC d command, 157
Scalable Size, 181
SCS COMMAND ERROR message, 325

408
 Overstrike, 156 Signals
Printer Select, 156 Centronics Parallel Interface, 248
Serial submenu, 100 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 250
Baud Rate, 102 Site requirements, 19
Buffer Size in K, 104 Skip Cmd Prefix, 177
Data Protocol, 101 Slash 0, 177, 188
Data Term Ready, 103 Slew Relative, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
Framing Errors, 105 Slow Paper Slew, 90
Idle Response, 104 Slow Paper Slew, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
Offline Process, 105 Software Build, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
One Char Enquiry, 104 SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER
Parity, 103 message, 308
Poll Character, 104 Solutions, Frequent Problems, 289
Poll Response, 104 Special information, 16
Request to Send, 103 Specifications
Stop Bits 1, 103 interfaces, 332
Word Length, 103 label, 328
Serial, Sending Firmware, 271 paper, 328
Set Lock Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235 Speed print, 333
Set Sharing, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233 SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED
Set Text Orientn message, 308, 325
3270 Params menu, 115 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED
5250 Params menu, 122 message, 308, 325
Setup, SureStak Power Paper Stacker, 338 STACK FAULT message, 308
SF ERROR message, 307, 325 STACKER FULL message, 308
SFCC d Command, 149 STACKER JAM message, 308
SFCC & Pwrup, 187 Stacker, power, 337
Power Up ^ F, 188 operation, 337
Power Up ^ PY, 188 Start Demo File, 281
Power Up ^ X, 188 Status Port Numb, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
VGL SFCC, 187 Stop Bits 1, Serial submenu, 103
SHUTL INV CMD * message, 307 Stop Demo File, 281
SHUTL INV PARM * message, 307 Submenu
SHUTL OVR SPEED* message, 307 IGP/PGL, 175
SHUTTLE JAM message, 307 IGP/VGL, 186
SHUTTLE STALL message, 308, 325 Subnet mask
Shuttle Timeout, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233 Ethernet Address Menu, 106
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED* Summary, CONFIG command, 368
message, 308 Supplies Department, 17, 371
Shuttle Type , DIAGNOSTICS, 241

409
SureStak Power Paper Stacker U
loading, 341
setup, 338 Unidirectional, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
starting, 341 Unload paper, 45
Switch Out On, Auto Switching submenu, 95 Unsolicited Rpt, LG Emulation, 210
Symbol Set Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206 UP DRV. SHORT* message, 309
SYS R/T ERROR message, 325 UP or DOWN key, 31
System Memory, DIAGNOSTICS, 240 UP + DOWN key, 31
UPC Descenders, 178, 189
T
Update PDF, 229
TCB CORRUPTED* message, 309 UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX* message, 309
TCP PORT BUSY message, 309, 326 Upr. Case Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), PRINTER USB Port, 246
CONTROL, 217 USB, Sending Firmware, 264
Test Width, DIAGNOSTICS, 240 User-Def Ratio, 179
Three-Key Download Sequence, 263 V
Timeout, Auto Switching submenu, 95
TOF Action Var Form Adjust, 180
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99 Var Form Type, 180
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96 Vert Forms, 86
TOF key, 30 Vert Forms, LG Emulation, 208
Translation Tbl Ver. Erase Zone, 228
3270 Params menu, 114 VFU Select, 149
5250 Params menu, 121 VFU Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
Transmit Data (TD), RS-232, 246 VGL SFCC, 187
Trickle Time View Function, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 100 VIEW key, 29
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97 Voltage
Trickle Time, Auto Switching submenu, 95 ASCII, 331
Troubleshooting H-Series, 332
frequent problems, 289 VPA Check, IPDS Emulation, 200
True Form Slew, 182 W
True Vert 1/10, 189
Warnings, 16
TrueType Fonts, 277
Web Page Download, 257, 273
print, 279
Weight, printer, 329
select, 279
WELD NOT DETECT message, 309
TrueType Fonts, download, 277
WELD SNSR ERROR message, 309
Trunc Dyn Data, 183
WELD SNSR MISSING message, 309
Truncate Alpha, 189
Width Limit, 191
Truncate PI Slew, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Windows Driver Download, 259
Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
Word Length, Serial submenu, 103
Typeface, 83

410
 X Compatibility Op, 116
Early Print Cmpl, 114
XXXX CHECKING PATTERN message, 309 Format Control, 118
XXXX MEMORY FAILURE message, 309 Host Override, 118
XXXX WRITING PATTERN message, 309 Intervention Req, 115
x/y BARCODES / Not Found message, 292 Max. Print Width, 118
Z Prt Partial Line, 114
PTX Transparent, 114
Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP)
Set Text Orientn, 115
adjust paper guides, 344
Translation Tbl, 114
clear paper jams, 353
401 BUFFER OVERRUN message, 311
forms type, 352
402 CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 311
load paper, 346
403 CLOSE PLATEN message, 311
menu, 351
409 FRAMING ERROR message, 311
overview, 343
410 LOAD PAPER message, 311
paper jams, 353
411 PARITY ERROR message, 311
position paper, 344
414 RIBBON STALL message, 312
position paper out sensor, 348
415 SHUTTLE JAM message, 312
set tear bar distance, 349
416 STACKER FULL message, 312
set top of form, 350
417 STACKER JAM message, 312
ZTP Data Time, 351
418 RBN INK LOW message, 312
ZTP Function, 352
419 RBN INK OUT* message, 312
ZTP Platen Open, 351
420 EXC RBN WEAR message, 312
ZTP TearDistance, 351
423 OLD RIBBON message, 312
ZTP Wait Time, 351
425 UNKNOWN RBN2 message, 312
ZTP Data Time, 82, 351
427 CRTG MISSING message, 313
ZTP Function, 352
428 CRTG COMM ER message, 313
ZTP Platen Open, 351
432 CRT NOT SET message, 313
ZTP SETTINGS, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
435 NO WELD message, 313
ZTP TearDistance, 82, 351
437 REG MISSING message, 313
ZTP Wait Time, 82, 351
438 TIP MISMATCH message, 313
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*
439 SHTL MISMATCH message, 313
message, 311
445 SD INSERTED message, 313
104 POWER SUPPLY HOT* message, 311
446 SD REMOVED message, 314
105 PRINTER HOT* message, 311
447 SD FL EXIST message, 314
12 VOLT FAILED* message, 291
448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED
20 CPI Condensed, 131, 136
message, 314
Epson FX Emulation, 164
449 SD FILE WRITE message, 314
Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big message, 314
3270 Params, 112
451 SD NOT FOUND message, 314
3270 Params menu
452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files message, 314
Active Char Set, 114
453 SD READING message, 314
Change Case, 115

411
454 SD WRITING message, 314 721 RIB INVLD CMD* message, 317
5250 Params, 119 723 SHUTL INV CMD* message, 317
5250 Params menu 724 SHUTL INV PARM* message, 317
Active Char Set, 121 725 SHUTL OVER SPEED* message, 317
Format Control, 123 727 SOFTWARE ERROR* message, 317
Graphic Chek Cod, 122 730 TCB CORRUPTED* message, 317
Graphic Chek Err, 122 733 DP FIFO Busy* message, 317
Host Override, 122
Max. Print Width, 123
Prt Partial Line, 121
PTX Transparent, 121
Set Text Orientn, 122
Translation Tbl, 121
607 CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 314
608 DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD message, 314
609 EXHAUST FAN CHECK message, 315
613 HAM. COIL BAD Message, 315
614 HAMMER BANK NOT INSTALLED
message, 315
615 HAMMER BANK CHECK Message, 315
617 LOWER DRIVER SHORT* message, 315
619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT*
message, 315
620 POWER VOLT CHECK* message, 315
622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT* message, 315
623 STACK FAULT message, 316
624 UPPER DRIVER SHORT* message, 316
702 FIRMWARE ERROR message, 316
703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC *
message, 316
704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC* message, 316
705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS * message, 316
706 PAP BAD TABLE* message, 316
708 PAPER FIFO OVERFLOW* message, 316
709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW* message, 316
710 PAP ILLGL ST* message, 316
712 PAP INVLD CMD* message, 316
713 PAP INVLD PARM* message, 316
717 PLAT INV CMD* message, 317
718 PLAT INV PARM* message, 317
719 PLAT INV STATE* message, 317
720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION* message, 317

412
*256381-001*
256381-001B